« October 2004 | Main | December 2004 »

November 30, 2004

Tough day at the office, honey

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI instead of on a plane heading to Norfolk VA, 30 November 2004

All set to fly out of Providence to Norfolk tonight for a briefing at a naval base down there, which C-SPAN was scheduled to tape for later use (originally set for broadcast 6 December), but had the briefing canceled at the last minute, so no trip. Kids and wife happy (number 1 son has state report on Florida due tomorrow, so I help him as I type this), but I was more than a little peeved at having distant higher-ups in DC (not Office of the Secretary of Defense, but my own tribe!) deciding they weren't going to approve C-SPAN taping the brief.

Problem really was in going to a relatively small command and putting a relatively low-ranking person (not even an officer) on the hot seat in terms of getting the usual approvals. Frankly, when you deal with more high-ranking, they don't seek the usual approvals because that's what having rank is all about—actually making decisions on your own. But this time events conspired to put me at this particular facility and the person involved did what seemed right in terms of chain of command and in the end, that pretty much killed the whole endeavor.

You'd think my tribe would be happy to have one of their own in such demand, but frankly, that kind of prominence and my current job status simply do not mix.

I'm beginning to understand why some people call themselves "Anonymous."

No hard feelings from me, as I wasn't looking forward to all that flying in the dark on small planes. But, as will all such tussles, you learn who your friends are and those you should never turn your back on, and so you move on and plan accordingly.

Real shame is that C-SPAN is all excited about doing new taping because they have new technology that would allow them to direct feed the PowerPoint slides onto the screen for "close-ups" as desired. To me, that's a briefing worth taping.

I know that, in all these situations, one of the driving impulses for most bureaucratic resistance I run into is the ever-present suspicion that I only give briefs and seek such taping opportunities to sell the book. But in reality, I seek the tapings primarily because I want a permanent record of what I've done in all these countless briefings, and because I feel the American public deserves access to this sort of material through non-profits like C-SPAN. In short, I feel ordinary citizens deserve to know.

If I really wanted to just make money, I would have never joined the defense community or the government, because frankly, neither place is a good one to do anything more than draw a salary. Plus, I just would have written some fantastically accusatory book about who "stole/lied/deceived/etc" America on "the terror war/9-11/Iraq/Osama/etc." Writing that sort of partisan shit isn't hard for someone with my talent for writing, it would just tax my physical strength for having to go through life constantly vomiting.

On the upside . . . I got Mark Warren's edit of the piece I wrote for the February issue of Esquire and it really rocks exactly as designed. Both Mark and I agree: I've really gotten to the point where I know how to write an article like that and make it sound exactly the way I want it to sound while giving it that Esquire flair, which frankly fits my persona well.

Is that persona the cause of my trouble in my day job? You bet. Under no illusion on that one. But Christ! I'm 42 and I buried my father last spring. If I'm not going to get comfortable with that persona at this point in my life, then when the hell am I? You bottle that stuff up and you end up one of those pathetic types who ditched the wife and kids for the young babe because that was the only answer he could come up with at that stage of the game.

There is a mansion in a small, out of the way town north of Kansas City that I have my eye on. Yeah, an actual mansion, which in MO costs roughly the same as my little old Cape Cod house on the island here. What that beautiful old house in MO represents to me is simply walking away from this life and starting something new, something where I could cut my own deals as required with those across the defense community who want my ideas and inputs in spades—who don't seem to either fear me or feel the need to handle me. And it represents a deep embrace of the writing life: books, the blog, Esquire, private think tank venues.

As goofy as it feels deep down, I am ready to make an offer on the Missouri mansion, which tells me I am so close to an inflection point that I can feel the upward draft.

A famous businessman was once asked, "Are entrepreneurs born or made?" His reply, "They're cornered."

Today I was cornered, and it taught me something useful.

November 29, 2004

CSPAN taping is go, but broadcast date now unclear

Dateline: Portsmouth RI, 29 November 2004

The good news, looks like Packers go 7-4 by beating Rams at home.

The bad news, although I'll tape the CSPAN brief this week, CSPAN is now saying 6 December evening is no good, because Congress coming back into session over the Intell Bill.

So when it will be aired is up in the air.

Blame it on Congress!

Reviewing the Reviews (Milo Clark at swans.com)

Dateline: Portsmouth RI, 29 November 2004 This review sent to me by a reader. It has the interesting syntax of the self-perceived powerless outsider. My commentary follows, along with today's catch.

Find the original here Functioning Core And Non-integrating Gap by Milo Clark November 29, 2004

(Swans - November 29, 2004) Tom Barnett is a wake-up-call kind of guy. (1) He has a properly iconoclastic point of view. He decodes Pentagon jargon. He has a gut feel for strategic design. He wants to be seen and remembered as the twenty-first century's Admiral Mahan and George Kennan, father and son. (2)

No ambition is too small for Tom Barnett. He lives and breathes in the esoteric world of Pentagon strategic planning, hanging out in the Naval War College for now.

The Pentagon tends to be a very dualistic place. No matter who you are, you are or you aren't. Gray is not a Pentagon color. Nuance is touchy-feely and verboten. The name of the Pentagon game is clarity. Clarity leads to Congressional support and the megabucks for exotic high tech systems to meet future enemies presently unidentifiable beyond conceptual identity as a Big One.

Barnett looks about the world and finds little possibility or probability of a Big One emergent or even lurking over some horizon. What's a twenty-first century Mahan or Kennan, father and son, to do? Who is "Us" and who is "Them"?

Before 9/11, the Bushies worked hard to make PRChina the Big One. At that time, Russia as remnant of Soviet Big One was out of it. Putin was not yet. PRChina, unfortunately from Pentagon perspectives, was evolving towards bigger power status as mega-capitalists in Communist clothing. Capitalists in Communist clothing? Too confusing. Too gray.

All too soon it emerges that PRChina is now America's Number One trading partner. Wal*Mart is PRChina's Number One customer. Wal*Mart is the new America.

PRChina holds a very large chuck of American Treasury debt. PRChina could, if so motivated, pull the financial plug on the USA. Ironic, no? Do capitalists pull plugs on capitalists?

New Big One Enemy needed. Barnett, with Mahan and Kennans in mind, crafts a new conceptual framework. He needs to fit the Pentagon Point of View with a new lens. Same old, same old is too old. How does a new clarity drag in big Congressional bucks and strike projectable fear into the Limbaughs and O'Reillys of broadcast media?

Barnett divides up the world into a new duality. He comes up with a scheme to make a new "Us" and a new "Them," a scheme which fits a post-9/11 American world. He lusts to become the Karl Rove of Pentagon strategies. And he could be on to something.

"Have's and Have Not's" are old frame. With a Pentagon sense of buzzword power, Barnett comes up with "Functioning Core" and "Non-integrating Gap." Of what? Globalization is the answer.

"We" are the globalized or globalizing. "Them" is everybody who is neither globalized nor globalizing. Barnett has a briefing theme and briefing themes are the life-blood of Pentagon strategists. Now Barnett has a mission and a book title: The Pentagon's New Map, War and Peace in the Twenty-first Century.

Peace lies with the globalized or globalizing: The Functioning Core. War, if need be, lies with the Non-integrating Gap. The "if need be" phrase is key. Carrot and Speak Softly/Carry Big Stick merge.

Barnett draws a new world map with a new dotted line. Outside the dotted line lies the Functioning Core: the globalized or globalizing. Within it lie today's post-9/11 trouble spots and irritants: The Axis of Evil, al Qaeda, Palestinians, et al. subsumed as The Non-integrating Gap.

Tame the Non-integrating Gap by integrating it within the Functioning Core of Globalization. Out with democratizing, in with integrating. More pragmatic and descriptive, no?

The Pentagon now has a new Big One as a collection of little ones around which to focus Congressional Clarity and garner ever bigger bucks. Only trouble is that Pentagon Big Ones historically have been nation-states with a future potential more than a present danger. Within today's Non-integrating Gap, nation-states tend to be dysfunctional and festering.

Prone, as ever, to fight the last war now, the Pentagon goes into strategic schizophrenia. The Pentagon buzzword "Transform" creates new Big One capabilities, while festering sores need balm or bombs now.

Congress likes Big Ones, not collections of little ones. Missile defense costing mega-billions sells in Peoria where relatively low-cost balms for festering sores are too yucky to market.

A new Mahan or Kennans has to capture imaginations. A new Mahan or Kennans has to have a marketing plan, a grand strategy to capture the hearts and minds of Congress and Peoria.

And this may be where Barnett could be on to something. Globalization personalized is Wal*Mart and Wal*Mart is America. Wal*Mart is Bentonville, Arkansas, heartland, solid red on today's political maps.

The old games rule set, parenthetically the Bush game, said that democracies do not war on democracies. Hence, "democratize the world" sold as a slogan. Got us Iraq. Perhaps the right idea but wrong execution.

The new game says that suppliers do not war on customers. Hence, customers do not war on suppliers. Today's news is that K-Mart and Sears are merging to out-Wal*Mart Wal*Mart. Within the Functioning Core, we don't outsource, we insource. Nice reframing.

Festering sores? Nuke 'em (with the new mini-nukes or DU, of course.) Unless strategic raw materials are involved, leave the Non-integrating Gap a wasteland uninhabitable for half-lives far into succeeding administrations peacefully devoted to ever-burgeoning Pentagon budgets and manageable low-casualty short-term high-cost wars. Wars only entered into as nudge toward globalization, of course.

Can we apply Barnett's strategic design to the once United States of America? Would it be a stretch of imagination to see the "Red" states as Non-integrating Gap and the "Blue" states as Functional Core? Reframers of the world, unite!

Indeed, we are not in Kansas anymore. Kansas is certainly within us, however.


• • • • • •


Notes & Resources

1 The Pentagon's New Map, War and Peace in the Twenty-first Century, Thomas P. M. Barnett, G. P. Putnam's Sons, New York, 2004, ISBN 0-399-15175-3

2 US Navy Captain Alfred Thayer Mahan (1840-1914) formulated the strategic concepts which became the Great White Fleet heralding America's emergence as a world power. His strategic design led and leads American naval strategies to this day.

George Kennan, son, (b. 1914) is credited with formulating the post WW II containment strategy which guided American tactics during the Cold War with Soviet Communism. George Kennan, father, while little known today, physically traveled the length and breadth of then Czarist Russia penetrating Central Asia and Siberian areas. His visceral understanding of the power of land mass and old peoples was grokked by his son.

COMMENTARY: Because Clark is so committed to his I'm-just-a-little-guy-in-a-big-scary-world persona, he never really gets too close to the book (e.g., the take-it-or-leave-it "dualism" shtick—cute, but to what end?). Because everything is imposed on him from on-high (e.g., Pentagon, Bushies, a Walmart-run globalization, powerful right-wing commentators), he can only comment upon the book rather myopically, meaning "Here is the next big idea to be afraid of!" (e.g., "Globalization personalized is Wal*Mart and Wal*Mart is America."—powerful analysis, huh? Really clear things up for you?). To the extent he tries to engage the material, he's so trapped in his language (e.g., "Carrot and Speak Softly/Carry Big Stick merge.") that he says almost nothing despite all the wordage (if this is what passes for good writing on Swan.com, they need to cast their nets more widely—or hire an editor). It's one of those reviews where you wonder why the guy bothered to write it if he had so little to say (e.g., "Wars only entered into as nudge toward globalization, of course." Yes, yes, making the world safe for Walmart—God you nailed me with that one!). As for the "nuking the Gap" stuff, that's just pathetic and makes it look like he didn't bother to read past the first chapter—something I highly suspect. But I imagine he's preaching to the faithful on the site, so it's strictly nothing ventured, nothing gained.

But what's so truly asinine about this review is the guy's breathless attempts to make PNM sound like the next strategy to justify big-ticket weapons systems and platforms via-a-vis Congress. Here the reviewer reveals his sheer ignorance of the process and the reality of what shrinking the Gap will entail in terms of military assets (again, suggesting he made it all the way through Chapter One before penning his ditty). The SysAdmin force is low-tech and people-intensive, or the complete opposite of the Big One model of great power war. Combine this guy's wrongheaded logic with his pathetic attempts to sound like a world-weary cynic with insider knowledge and you get one truly misguided attempt to "reveal" the truth.

Today's catch:

One senses the coming new rule set on currencies will be profound

Plotting splendid wars beneath the waves

China is going to try anything and everything on energy

Fidel pretends the bucks don't matter in Cuba

Good pipelines require/make good neighbors

Getting real on Ukraine

The coming economic integration of SE Asia

How big a SysAdmin force for the Gap?


One senses the coming new rule set on currencies will be profound

"Currency on a Collision Course: For how much longer will America have the luxury of running its own independent monetary policy?," op-ed by Christopher Wood, Wall Street Journal, 29 November 2004, p. A14.

Fascinating analysis from Christopher Wood. Very clarifying:

The comments emanating from Washington since the November presidential election,and the related action in the foreign exchange markets, make it clear that "go for growth" will be the preferred Bush strategy. This is an administration driven by ideological supply-siders, not fiscal conservatives. Sure, this suggests a still wider current-account deficit. And America's current-account deficit already accounts for about 77% of the world's total current-account deficits. But this is a game of chicken which Asia will be expected to continue to finance.
So the dollar falls and everyone is expected to adjust in order to make our goods more attractive—everyone but fixed-to-the-dollar China, that is. So naturally there is more pressure from the U.S. on Beijing to float the yuan.

Here's where the op-ed really gets interesting:

But on this occasion, this writer is no longer quite so sure as before that the old rules apply. China is now at the center, not the periphery, or discussions about developments in the world economy. This massively higher profile on the global stage makes it much harder for the Chinese to ignore external pressures. Their problem is, however, if they only revalue by a marginal amount—by which is meant 10% or less—this is only likely further to fuel speculative pressures as the animal spirits move in for the kill.

All this raises another question: Is it really in America's interests to pressure China for a renminbi revalution? The U.S. trade deficit is clearly one motivating factor. The U.S. merchandise trade deficit rose by 19% year-on-year in the first nine months of this year to $470 billion, with China accounting for 24% of the total. But this is, to a certain extent, offset by China's trade deficit with other countries, notably those in Asia. Excluding America, China posted a trade deficit of $50 billion with the rest of the world and $62 billion with Asia alone in the first nine months of this year. But U.S. pressure also seems to be driven by other considerations, notably the ideological view that floating currencies are a good thing and that mercantilism is fundamentally unfair as well as misconceived in that it suppresses the purchasing power of Asian consumers.

If this is all true, it also ignores the point that America needs to be careful what it wishes for. The Bush administration can only "go for growth" on the assumption that Asia will keep financing its current-account deficit because it has no choice if the region's exporters want to maintain access to America's domestic markets. This is all very well. But America can only run such a strategy because the dollar holds the privileged position of being the world's reserve currency. The dollar paper standard, which has been in place since Richard Nixon broke the last link with gold in 1971, has meant that America has the luxury of running its own independent monetary policy. That happy situation can continue only for so long as the dollar decline remains gradual and does not turn into a rout.

America's dollar being the de facto reserve currency for the world is how we're able to afford the military we now possess, meaning the rest of the Core subsidizes our Leviathan to a tremendous degree. When we overspend on our budget, we expect the world to pick up the tab, so anything that threatens that implicit transaction threatens our ability to continue exporting security around the planet. Without it, we'll soon enough have a military like everyone else's: good for guarding the homeland and nothing else.

And something very large will be lost with that…


Tom Toles for The Washington Post, Universal Press Syndicate (the little cartoonist who chirps up in the corner says "…which brings us to your saving rate . . . .)

Plotting splendid wars beneath the waves

"China's Growing Undersea Fleet Presents Challenge to Its Neighbors," by David Lague, Wall Street Journal, 29 November 2004, p. A12.

"Eyeball to Eyeball," book review by Ben MacIntyre (High Noon in the Cold War by Max Frankel and Engaging India by Strobe Talbott), New York Times Book Review, 28 November 2004, p. 9.

Another piece (WSJ) about the Chinese-Japanese nuclear sub incident that occurred earlier this month, filled with ever more warnings about how China's economic growth translates into military power.

Of course, no foreign direct investment of $50 billion a year from the outside world (really, primarily from the Old Core of the U.S., Japan, and Europe), and you'd see Chinese military spending plummet just like it did all over Asia following the Asian Flu of 1997-98. So China's "independent" military muscle is no more independent than ours—it's a luxury that requires others to essentially foot the bill.

What will China do with all these subs (around 70 by 2010)? They can threaten our attempts to threaten their attempts to threaten Taiwan following its threats of going independent. Got that?

Oh, and they can threaten shipping lanes and work to cut off the flow of energy from the Gulf to Asia.

Does all this logic sound like it emanates from a distant age? It does. But guess what? That doesn't deter the submarine commanders or commentators on either side, who just love to go on and on about this scenario, as if it had any real legs.

I'm not saying neither side lacks the right mix of bravado and stupidity to try something, just that it wouldn't last for very long. China couldn't pull off an imitation of Nazi U-boats for very long and if it tried, what would be the point? To tank its economy or ruin the last 25 years of economic development there?

Ah, but we are told that we must always take into account the irrational? Like the irrational desire of the submarine fleets on both side to justify their existence?

The U.S. submarine fleet has been smarting ever since the Sovs left the scene, and they are fairly desperate in their attempts to justify their ever-dwindling numbers.

My question is, How much do we owe the global economy versus how much do we owe the Navy's submarine community? If you're telling me that Taiwan is the source of the problem, then we need to redo the deal on Taiwan, not give in to this idiotic logic that says this conflict is inevitable simply because the sub guys on both sides are just itching to make it happen.

Smart leadership would defuse this situation now. Our historical knowledge of brinksmanship between great powers says this: "For the roots of crises, look to powerful men feeling vulnerable. It leads to belligerence."

In Taipei, powerful men feel vulnerable over that country's progressive economic integration with rising China. In Beijing, powerful men feel vulnerable over Taipei's threats to make explicit their desire to make permanent their independence from China. In Washington, outside of the Navy's submarine community, powerful men should know better.

China is going to try anything and everything on energy

"China banks on new energy plan," by Le-Min Lim and Loretta Ng, International Herald Tribune, 24 November 2004, http://www.iht.com/bin/print_ipub.php?file=/articles/2004/11/23/bloomberg/sxcoal.html.

>■"Latin America Isn't Likely to Send More Oil to U.S.: Increasing output requires money that the region's cash-strapped governments lack," by David Luhnow, Wall Street Journal, 29 November 2004, p. A2.

First article sent to me by reader details a new Chinese energy plan to produce gasoline directly from coal in a series of coal-to-liquids plants built in conjunction with Royal/Dutch Shell:

The plans tie in with the Chinese government's drive to cut reliance on crude oil, said Wu Guihui, an official with the National Development and Reform Commission. Those plans, which include building more nuclear power plants, finding and importing more natural gas and building the world's biggest hydropower plant—the Three Gorges Dam—have been given added impetus by the gain in oil prices.
Meanwhile, cars continue to multiple throughout China in a population explosion. Sales are up 18 % from a year ago.

So when China starts pouring money into Latin America, it's simply taking advantage of the capacity there, as it will everywhere else it can across the planet. Since the most stable reserves sites are already taken by oil companies from the Old Core, expect China to go into the more desperate and risky situations, including those the U.S. tries to isolate for political reasons—like Iran.

All this energy-driven activity can put China on the wrong side of Gap conflicts that the United States gets drawn into, like Sudan, and all these "conflicts" only reinforce the perception that "rising China" must be a threat to the United States—hence we must do things like counter China's military influence and rising threat to Taiwan.

It amazes me how people are so quick to see energy as the root cause for many U.S. foreign policy decisions and yet seem to miss it completely on China. For Beijing, just like us, there is a profound military-market nexus that cannot be ignored.

The danger is, of course, that military planners on both sides routinely ignore that reality, preferring to plan splendid wars. There is a reason why "resource wars" is a big fad right now in national security planning circles. And that reason is, big-ticket platform planners are looking for new scenarios to justify their desired "requirements" in light of the rise in funding going toward the Global War on Terrorism.

It's that underlying reality that also makes the Swans.com review so asinine in its logic.

Fidel pretends the bucks don't matter in Cuba

"For Many Cubans, an Uneasy Farewell to the Dollar: Putting an end to dependency on a symbol of capitalism," by James C. McKinley, Jr., Wall Street Journal, 29 November 2004, p. A12.

Fidel is trying to de-dollarize the Cuban economy, which, quite frankly, has been dollarized for so long that Cuba barely has a national currency. Now Castro issues a decree saying you can't use dollars anymore, although you can hold them in bank accounts (boy, that makes it seem like a permanent rule set, huh?). To incentivize citizens to convert their dollar holdings, Castro is enforcing a 10% surcharge on all money changing after 15 November.

And yet still people holding onto their dollar savings. Why?

"Nobody knows if this is permanent or momentary," said a 33-year-old plumber, who like many people interviewed for this article asked that his name not be published. "A year from now the law supporting the convertible peso could not exist. This exchange rate only exists here in Cuba, because Fidel Castro is the only one who says it is true. So the smart ones who have money are guarding their dollars.
Fidel must be feeling vulnerable, cause he's cutting off his nose to spite his face, but clearly he feels this desperate move will solidify his grip on power, which surely was weakened over the years by a dual economy: one based in pesos that he could control and one based in dollars over which his control was largely marginalized (its implicit slogan being, "To each citizen according to his uncle in Miami"). So now Castro reins in private enterprise and re-establishes state control over the lucrative tourism industry.

All this represents is yet another way the government of Cuba takes from its people and gives little back in return. This is nothing more than Castro's hard-currency accumulation scheme: give me real money and I'll give you pieces of paper that are worth whatever I damn well declare they're worth. This is the logic of the Big Man at work, and it's why Cuba remains firmly inside the Gap.

Good pipelines require/make good neighbors

"How a Thirst Led To a Thaw," by Manjeet Kripalani, Businessweek, 15 November 2004, http://www.businessweek.com/print/magazine/content/04_46/b3908046.htm?chan=mz&.

Article sent to me by reader reminds us yet again of the military market nexus: you need energy to develop and that energy takes infrastructure and so you do what you have to in order to make that infrastructure come about.

Is this the logic of resource wars? Shouldn’t an India desperate for Iranian natural gas simply wage war with obstacle Pakistan in order to achieve its energy security?

Or do the leaders of the two countries agree to an unprecedented series of negotiations for India to build a gas pipeline from Iran to India that passes through Pakistan in exchange for transit fees plus some of the gas being bled off for Pakistan's use? As the article says, "Funny how a thirst for energy can make the oldest of foes suddenly eager to cooperate." Funny to everyone except military planners who still dream of nuclear war in South Asia.

But India isn't stopping there. "Indeed, India is conducting petroleum diplomacy throughout the region and beyond"—as in Burma, Bangladesh (another pipeline), Sudan, Russia, Vietnam, and Iraq.

And guess what? "Everywhere it goes looking for petroleum, India is overshadowed by China."

Geez, I thought only America did this sort of thing! So I guess it will have to be India and China, in addition to America, "waging perpetual war all over the planet."

Or not.

Getting real on Ukraine

"Ukraine's Rifts Extend to the Economy," by Erin E. Arvedlund, New York Times, 29 November 2004, http://www.nytimes.com/2004/11/29/business/worldbusiness/29econ.html.

Key point of this piece: Ukraine needs economic association with both the EU and Russia to survive and grow, so pretending it can go one way or the other is simply some Cold War logic rearing its stupid head.

When I last blogged this, I asked the question, "Why does Russia fear the alternative outcome to this election so much?" posing it in the direction of the Bush administration.

Fellow-blogger T.M. Lutas followed up with this post, of which I quote the following:

Russia should look to the UK/US relationship if it is serious about its need to maintain influence over Ukraine. The UK has good relations when it has an ideologically friendly party alignment (center-right Thatcher with center-right Reagan, center-left Blair with center-left Clinton) as well as opposite ideological tendencies (center-left Blair with center-right Bush).

If Russia could generate that sort of relationship, appeal both to western Ukraine as well as the more russified eastern section, it wouldn't have to put its thumb on the scales and spend so much political capital ensuring that "Russia's man" won the election. All the major parties would nominate people acceptable to Russia. This is going to be difficult because Russia has not been a good steward of Ukraine, dominating instead of partnering …

Dr. Barnett has the question right when he addressed this issue. The only problem with his approach is that he seems to think that we're the ones who should be asking it. We should not. It's Russia's problem to solve and us butting our noses in that relationship infantilizes Russia and will inevitably cause resentment.

President Bush has got it about right. Electoral irregularities need to be adjudicated and settled by Ukrainian institutions before we, or anybody else, recognize one or the other candidates. Can you imagine if some country had recognized Gore during the recount phase in 2000? It wouldn't have been better if a country recognized Bush during that same period.

The situation in Ukraine is not settled, according to the law. If the courts find fraud, Russia should stay out. In fact, the best thing we should all do is to sit on our hands and let Russia be the first to recognize the official results. That would be a tremendous statement of respect and deference to Russia that would cost us absolutely nothing
but could salvage honor and pride in the East.

Some very solid analysis from TM, in my opinion. Got right to the sore spot about the 2000 U.S. election.

The coming economic integration of SE Asia

"Southeast Asia Urged to Form Economic Bloc" by Jane Perlez, New York Times, 29 November 2004, p. A8.

The Association of Southeast Asia Nations, aka ASEAN, are once again talking bold on economic integration. They did so previously following the Asian Flu of 1997-98, but back then the fear was subsequent financial panics. Now the threat perception is different. As the new leader of Indonesia declared, "Our main challenge today is to deepen our economic integration. Why? Two words: India and China."

The association is signing a new trade pact with China to remove tariffs on merchandise by 2010, and there's a long-term plan to create an EU-like economic community by 2020. My guess is that it will happen before then and it'll be driven by China's continued rise. By 2020, as I predicted in PNM, I expect to see not only a NATO-like Asian military alliance, but an Asia-wide EU-like entity. For that to happen, ASEAN will have to move much faster than planned, and, judging by this article, it sounds like that's a growing realization shared by several of its leaders.

How big a SysAdmin force for the Gap?

"African Union Strives to End Deadly Cycle in Darfur," by Somini Sengupta, New York Times, 29 November 2004, p. A3.

Sudan is becoming a key proving ground for the African Union, and they certainly couldn't have picked a more difficult spot right now:

For the African Union, a nascent organization representing African governments and struggling to shake off the mantle of its largely ineffectual predecessor, the Organization of African Unity, Darfur represents a crucial test. If the union's mission succeeds in Darfur, it will score a major credibility victory. If it fails, the price will be dear.

"We will take a long time to recover our credibility toward our people and our partners," Jean-Baptiste Natama, a senior political officer in the African Union, said this week.

The African Union's success or failure will be measured, in part, by how it responds to incidents like the one in Tawila and whether it can prevent others like it. For now, its troop strength in Sudan, which may take until February or later to reach its full level of 3,400 peacekeepers, is grossly insufficient to deploy full-time to every fractious, violence-prone town like Tawila.

Privately, diplomats in Sudan have long worried that deploying so few troops would be a recipe for failure. Since the violence in Tawila, Jan Pronk, the top United Nations envoy for Sudan, suggested expanding the African Union force to more than twice the number.

To me, it's situations like this that speak to the compelling need for the Core as a whole to be able to put forth a SysAdmin force that would enable a regional entity like the AU to do more than just run around snapping photos and taking notes while the killing continues unabated. Everyone in the Core wants this situation to settle, but we don't have a transparent, non-zero-sum process for making it happen, and that process can't come into being until the military resources are pooled and coherently arranged in a larger whole, and that international military capability won't come about until the Pentagon shows it's serious of fielding its own version of a Sys Admin force.

How much force would that need to be?

Recently, Chet Richard's review of PNM ended with the following bit of logic:

If there are indeed two billion people in the Gap, one could envision the need for an international Core Sys Admin force of some 20 million members [applying Shinseki's ratio, which in light of recent events may be conservative] trained and funded to take control of failed societies and rebuild them not as Western, Christian democracies but as connecting members of the World Core in all its myriad forms, each respecting all the others as long as they continue to connect. Although a force this size may seem impractical, it is only marginally more than the 16 million Americans who served in WW II. The entire modern Core holds around 4 billion people, and eliminating the Gap is the most critical factor in their, that is, our continued well being and perhaps of our continuing to exist at all.
When I reviewed this review, some readers were unhappy I didn't deal with this cited figure of 20 million, which frankly, I viewed as bizarre in its logic of positing an occupation force for the entire Gap all at once—and I still do.

Here now is how I would disaggregate that number down to something more realistic: Let's go with Mr. Richard's 20 million total, as extrapolated from Shinseki's calculations for Iraq. There are roughly 100 countries in the Core. As I recount in PNM, at any one time no more than about one-third are experiencing levels of mass violence of the sort likely to trigger outside interest. So if we need 20 million SysAdmin personnel for the entire population of the Gap (2 billion), then we can lower that estimate by two-thirds right off the bat. So let's go with 7 million troops to possibly cover upwards of three dozen Gap states at any one time. Then let's use the U.S. standard of the past 15 years, which is to try and deal with the toughest cases with the highest interest levels and best chances of success. That has equated, historically speaking, to roughly one-quarter of the extant mass violence situations, or roughly 8 region- or country-specific responses a year. If we talk about a large-scale long-term effort in one country, then that simply lowers our capacity for others so long as it continues.

That brings our proposed total down to something in the range of 1.8 million personnel. Taking cue from the Europeans' recent proposal regarding a Human Security Force, let's go with the notion that one-third of the force must be civilian (mostly cops, but also judges, administrators, medical, etc.). That takes us down to 1.2 million personnel in uniform. Now let's set a standard for how big a role the U.S. should play in this total force package, because we'll primarily play a hub-within-spokes function.

Keeping that goal in mind, I would propose the U.S. supply roughly one out of every ten bodies. How do I come by that number? When polled in the mid-1990s about proposed peacekeeping in the Balkans, Americans replied that the U.S. should supply roughly one out of every five peacekeepers for such overseas situations. That's because they assumed we provided roughly 40 percent and thus they wanted to see that share cut in half, because they thought it was too high.. Actually, cutting that assumed figure in half would have yielded a burden roughly 5 times what we supplied the UN effort in Yugoslavia, which was/is only 4 % of the total. On that basis, I'm willing to bet Americans would support a ten percent share.

Ten percent of 1.2 million troops would be 120,000 troops. We have 130,000 basically engaged in Iraq today. Does it strain us at the bit to do this given all our other responsibilities around the world? You bet. But it's do-able if we restructure our forces to rebalance the Army and Marines in this direction, a process that's already in motion.

To have 120,000 out in the field, you need a force roughly 4 times that size in active duty order to handle the rotation and nine times that size in reserve components (reserves and National Guard). The Army and Marines number about 400,000 in deployable troops today, yielding a rotation of 100,000 out in the field. We have 500,000 such troops in the Reserve Component, yielding another 50k or so. That gives us 150k out of the Army, Marines, and reserves in today's largely imbalanced force. Given further transformation of the warfighting side of the house and a general rebalancing of our troop strength across the various services, and I think this is a burden the Pentagon could easily adjust to.

Could the rest of the Core supply the almost 1.1 million men? India's army alone is home to roughly 1.1 million ground forces at this time. It is the third-largest force in the world. China has two million in ground forces, plus 2.5 million more in reserve militias and police-type forces. The numbers are there, and the money is there, when you add up the entire Core as a whole.

None of this is realistic until we decide to make it realistic. Then it all becomes possible overnight.

On the beach ...

Dateline: Second Beach, Middletown RI, 28 November 2004

Took my boys and our pup Stormy to Sachuest Beach in Middletown (called Second Beach by everyone on the island). It's where we regularly boogie board and surf when the weather's right. Despite facing winds of roughly 30-40 mph with gusts up to 50, we walked the length of the beach and then climbed the cliffs overlooking the beach. Our goal was Purgatory Chasm, a big crack in the cliff. The sand was blowing so hard on the beach that Story's was figuratively painted during our journey (first her hind quarters as we walked with the wind and then her face and we walked against it).

Some photos from the handi phone-cam:


Heading west toward the cliffs.


Our favorite big rock on the way.


The view of 2nd Beach from the cliffs.


View of Purgatory Chasm from foot bridge above.


Heading back to the car along the beach; son Kevin setting the pace.

November 28, 2004

Catching up on the news over the holiday weekend

Dateline: Portsmouth RI, 28 November 2004

I know it's a slow surfing weekend, but here's all the news I saw fit to comment upon. Like most people, I spent most of my weekend doing aimless things with my family. But thanks to our new puppy, I get up early no matter how late I go to bed (nor how many hours our baby keeps us up with her latest night terrors—man, I see a sleep-walker here very much in my own vein). So here I catch up through yesterday’s Times Then I think it’s duckpin bowling with the kids:

The stories of our times

How the world votes on our elections

The classic African plight

It gets ugly in Ukraine

The Iran-Iraq connection presents both danger and opportunity

Pakistan is the reason why we can't do Iran right now

China's people-driven connectivity spreads around the Pacific

Europe will get more interested in Gap—with age!

The tipping point on air pollution grows near in Asia

The myth about the myth about moral values

The very loose rule set on special ops inside the Gap

Smart Palestinians desperate to move beyond Arafat

Kansas: center of global freedom!


The stories of our times

"Good News About Poverty: Poorer nations are leading the way," op-ed by David Brooks, New York Times, 27 November 2004, p. A35.

"Quiet Time: A new Saudi law silences dissent by public employees," op-ed by Khalid Al-Dakhil, New York Times, 27 November 2004, p. A35.

"Iran’s Lonely Crowd: Being an intellectual means keeping your thoughts to yourself," op-ed by Farouz Farzami, New York Times, 27 November 2004, p. A35.

"Saving the Iraqi Children: Child malnutrition is soaring," op-ed by Nicholas D. Kristof, New York Times, 27 November 2004, p. A35.

No real commenting on the articles themselves, just noting the pattern array: one piece on how globalization is working and then three pieces on negative politico-military situations in three key pillars of the Middle East—a region that sucks at globalization.

These are the stories of our time: excel at globalization or become a security issue for the world’s Leviathan. It really is that simple.

How the world votes on our elections

"Foreign Interest Appears to Flag As Dollar Falls," by Edmund L. Andrews, New York Times, 27 November 2004, p. B1.

In PNM, I wrote that although we’re the world’s sole superpower, there is a way for the rest of the Core to “vote” regarding our employment of that awesome power, and it’s called being willing to buy our debt.

Right now the rest of the Core is voting no:

Investors and market analysts are increasingly worried that the last big source of support for the American dollar - heavy buying by foreign central banks - is fading.

The anxiety was on full display Friday, when the dollar abruptly slid to a record low against the euro after a report suggesting that the Chinese central bank might start to reduce its holdings in the American currency.

Though Chinese officials later denied the report, and the dollar recovered, analysts say the broader trend is that foreign governments are becoming less willing to finance the growing debt of the United States government.

On Tuesday, a top official with the Russian central bank said his government had become worried about the sinking value of the dollar and might switch some foreign reserves to euros.

A day later, India's central bank hinted that it was worried about the same issue and might shift some reserves into other currencies.

Japan and China, which together have amassed nearly $900 billion in United States Treasury securities, have both slowed their buying sharply from the frenetic pace in February and March.

"There is an emerging consensus that banks around the world are moving to expand their reserves of euros at the expense of dollars," said Laidi Ashraf, chief currency analyst at MG Financial Group in New York.

The Bush administration is going along with the dollar’s decline because it makes sense economically, as does pushing China to make the yuan convertible, but the effect of both efforts will be to dramatically dry up the pool of foreign governments willing to keep buying up our debt. Our current accounts deficit is such that we need to attract $2b a day to maintain our overall deficit spending, a good portion of which is driven by our military costs in this Global War on Terrorism.

American can afford its current Leviathan force, but it cannot afford to self-finance the bulk of the follow-on SysAdmin work that will ensue from efforts like our recent takedown in Iraq. The coming renegotiation of that security burden is inevitable, otherwise you’ll see American withdraw dramatically from the world militarily.

Admitting that strategic reality is the first step toward making the deals we’ll need to make if we’re going to get truly serious about waging a Global War on Terrorism that will clearly last decades.

There is no alternative.

The classic African plight

"Despite Pact, New Violence Stymies Aid in Sudan," by Somini Sengupta, New York Times, 27 November 2004, p. A1.

The story you know: Sudan is imploding with internal violence and nobody seems able to do anything about it. Europe stands idle, the U.S. is too busy elsewhere, the UN does nothing (in keeping with its charter of complete impotence), the New Core powers like Russia and China haven’t been brought on board in any significant strategic sense so they block what meager procedural moves we do try in the UN, the African Union is there in force (all 1,000 troops armed with notebooks and cameras), and now we reach the CNN moment where tens of thousands will start starving while food aid sits piled up in local warehouses.

Everyone wants this problem to go away and for what little oil there is to flow, but we don’t have a working system to deal with this sort of “internal” problem that effectively defines the Gap. And until we get that A-to-Z system for processing politically-bankrupt states there, there will be no shrinking that Gap.

It gets ugly in Ukraine

"Rivals in Ukraine Agree to Negotiate Over Disputed Vote: Little common ground, but planned talks signal an easing of tension," by C. J. Chivers, New York Times, 27 November 2004, p. A9.

"A Tug of War Over Ukraine: In Cold-War-Like Rift, It's Putin vs. the West," by Steven Lee Myers, New York Times, 24 November 2004, p. A1.

"Powell Says Ukraine Vote Was Full of Fraud," by Steven R. Weisman, New York Times, 25 November 2004, p. A10.

Ukraine is a tricky one for this administration, given it’s own history of getting elected not twice but once—finally!

To me, fixating on Ukraine the issue itself is not the long-term answer to anything. What we need to be thinking about is, Why does Russia fear the alternative outcome to this election so much? Deal with that fear effectively and it won’t matter who gets elected in Ukraine, which is how it should be.

Instead of asking that question, too many on our side are getting all excited about recasting Russia as the bad guy, a tendency that will only grow as we increasingly become intertwined economically with rising China. For the U.S. to work the Russia issue only reactively like this shows what a poor job this administration has done over the past four years in terms of solidifying the Core political alliances with any eye to amassing the resources and will necessary to successfully prosecute this Global War on Terrorism.

Powell can’t leave fast enough, as far as I’m concerned. At least Rice will know Moscow from her elbow.

The Iran-Iraq connection presents both danger and opportunity

"Iranians Refuse to Terminate Nuclear Plans: Step Threatens Accord With Europeans," by Elaine Sciolino, New York Times, 26 November 2004, p. A1.

"Iraqi Leaders Plan to Meet Insurgents in Jordan: Call for Rebels to Join Political Process—Zarqawi Aide Held," by Edward Wong, New York Times, 26 November 2004, p. A1.

Anyone who believes this European-led negotiations with Iran is going to accomplish anything is simply dreaming. Iran will continue to use these negotiations to forestall any military actions by the West to the point where they’ll finally have nuclear-tipped missiles capable of making any invasion of their territory highly improbable.

Unlike a North Korea, there isn’t any single dictator to knock off at the top, because the regime rules with far more legitimacy than does Kim (as evidenced by the far smaller police-state presence in everyday life in Iran). Moreover, unlike northeast Asia where there are big rich countries all over the dial who would be very interested in making sure any takedown goes well, in the Gulf area, we’d really be on our own.

Plus, North Korea serves no strategic purpose in Asia—it’s basically good for nothing. Whereas Iran could serve some serious strategic purpose in the Gulf, by helping us deal with the aftermath that is Iraq.

In both regions, it’s all about local ownership of security issues: where you have it already, I say use it, and where you don’t, I say, you better create some.

Pakistan is the reason why we can't do Iran right now

"Hiding in Plain Sight: Why Pakistan still isn't aggressively pursuing the ex-Taliban leaders living inside the country," by Tim McGirk, Time, 29 November 2004, p. 44.

"C.I.A. Says Pakistanis Gave Iran Nuclear Aid: An illicit network passed bomb-making designs in the 90's," by Douglas Jehl, New York Times, 24 November 2004, p. A8.

Pakistan gave Iran the bomb, basically, and we can either accept that or turn it into a giant West versus the Shiites. If we chose the latter course, we can’t expect much support from either India or China, because both countries need Iran economically and both countries need Pakistan to be stable militarily. India has to live with Pakistan and its bomb, there’s just no two ways about it, and China sees Pakistan as it’s great land bridge into the Persian Gulf region. So if we make Iran with the bomb the center of all evil, we’re picking up the Pakistani problem and all the New Core allegiances that go with that problem, and that scenario pathway gets you about as closes to Hungtington’s “clash of civilizations” than any other nightmare I can dream up.

If we let the Global War on Terrorism draw a line through the Islamic world, isolating the heavier Shiite populations in Iran, Afghanistan and Pakistan, we’ll find ourselves providing a strategic rear to Osama bin Laden and al Qaeda that may end up being impossible to surmount for many, many years, especially is we simultaneously isolate Russia and its “near abroad.” Check out a map. In that strategic package, Osama is safely embedded deep inside an opposing security rule set—be default, becoming the New Core’s war by proxy with the West.

That’s why Iran is more important now than ever. Getting to Iran stops that domino effect from going into motion. Otherwise, we may find ourselves staring across a serious civilizational faultline for decades.

China's people-driven connectivity spreads around the Pacific

"China Sees Chances for Fun and Profit Offshore: More Air Service, Tourism and Investment Flow From Mainland to South Pacific," by James Brooke, New York Times, 25 November 2004, p. W1.

Chinese tourism is remaking the economics of island nations all over the Western Pacific, and that influence will only grow. The number of Chinese tourists is expected to increase ten-fold over the next two decades, reaching a global total of 100 million a year. That’s the equivalent of one out of every three Americans traveling abroad every year:

“The Chinese will dwarf the Japanese in tourism and business,” said Dirk A. Ballendorf, an American who teaches Micronesia’s history at the University of Guam. “I recommend that all my student study Chinese.”

Will the flag follow trade? You bet, which means China’s navy is becoming the new kid on the block. And it will be welcomed because that trade is welcomed. Eventually, America will need a security alliance in Asia that includes China, and it won’t be to ratify their military presence, but ours.

Europe will get more interested in Gap—with age!

"Demographic Time Bomb Threatens Pensions in Europe: Saving more, paying higher taxes and working longer for retirement benefits," by Alan Cowell, New York Times, 26 November 2004, p. A3.

Here’s how one European expert describes it:

“They got used to having that very cushy social system, and now they are slowly coming to grips with the fact that the cushy system doesn’t hold any more.

When it’s pay-as-you-go you need a lot of payers if you want to “go” onto to retirement, and Europe simply isn’t creating the babies to make that happen. The number of workers to retirees in Europe today is about 3 to 1, compared to 5 to 1 in the U.S. By mid-century, it will be 2 to 1, unless Europe lets in a lot more immigrants.

Old James J. Pinkerton might find that advice to be insane, but he isn’t going to try and retire in Europe.

So either Europe lets in many more immigrants, or that “dream” that Jeremy Rifkin loves to talk about is going to disappear.

The tipping point on air pollution grows near in Asia

"Air Pollution Is a Big Concern in Asia," by Stan Sesser, Wall Street Journal, 24 November 2004, p. B8.

Of the 20 biggest cities in Asia, only Singapore’s air is considered reasonably safe. Meanwhile, the number of “bad air” days in other cities is skyrocketing. Last year the pollution index hit 100 or more only 53 times in Hong Kong. This year it’s 79 and counting. Beijing and New Dehli suffer air considered three times worse than Hong Kong’s, which mostly suffers the pollution from Guangdong province, something I remember only too well from our week there in August when I though my head was going to explode.

The locals are expected to suffer silently in the face of all that necessary development, but here’s what will push things along: foreign companies are having a harder time getting their workers to live in these cities and pollution is becoming the big reason. Frankly, I could never live in Beijing in its current state, nor would I subject my young children’s growing lungs to it (your lungs don’t stop opening up until about age 7).

Here’s what one exec said when asked why he moved away from Hong Kong with his family:

My daughter and I have been taking nasal sprays and various antihistamines for coughing and rhinitis,” an inflammation of the mucous membrane of the nose, he adds. “We’re constantly coughing, but when we go away it’s fine. Our doctor has repeatedly told us these are pollution-induced.

Asia is reaching the tipping point on big city air pollution because their cities are their showcases as they open up to the global economy, and having your showcases be unlivable is simply bad for business, so expect business to change as a result—and soon.

The myth about the myth about moral values

"'Terrorism Worries, Not 'Moral Values,' Decided Election," by John Harwood, wall Street Journal, 24 November 2004, p. A4.

Harwood makes the best case possible for the notion that moral values mattered little in the election, and that it all came down to terrorism. His point: the Republicans get back above 50% in a national election for the first time in 16 years because we’re back to having security atop the agenda—pure and simple.

I don’t think you can argue with that analysis. I just also think it’s incomplete. Terrorism the physical danger is rather minor in the U.S. Yes, 9/11 was horrible, but it’s likely to be a very rare historical event. What’s coming under attack every day in the Global War on Terrorism are our values. Not so much our political values (which most still admire), nor our economic values (which most still emulate). Instead, it’s our moral values that attract the most hatred.

I know, I know, if we only pulled out militarily from the Middle East and gave up supporting Israel, then everything would be great in the region, except it would still be full of dysfunctional governments, backward social structures, and populations ill-prepared and—in many ways, unwilling—to succeed in a globalized world.

Now you might be wondering: if it’s our “loose” moral values that offends so much, how come a resurgence of traditional values comes about in this war? This is classic mirror-imaging to a certain extent. We did the same in the early years of the Cold War, becoming reflexively far more conformist as a society in the face of the “red threat.” We’re doing something similar today.

So to say it was all about terrorism far more than moral values is awfully misleading. The war is all about values, and the American public wants someone at the top who will defend those values while demonstrating them as much as possible. The two points, then, are intimately linked.

This is what the Democrats better figure out if they hope to rule in the White House anytime soon.

The very loose rule set on special ops inside the Gap

"U.S. Drafts Order for Special Forces: Troops Are Being Prepared for Cladestine Operations Against Terrorist Groups," by David S. Cloud and Greg Jaffe, Wall Street Journal, 24 November 2004, p. A4.

Frustrated with the Global War on Terrorism and our inability to track down and kill certain terrorist leaders hiding away in certain ungoverned territories or states, the Pentagon is rewriting the rule set on clandestine ops by Special Forces. Frankly, this is a very good thing. We want these guys to have the loosest possible rule sets, with the world as their playground. That sort of direct action belongs with the Pentagon in a GWOT, not the CIA. We’re not hunting spies in this war, but actual combatants.

Kerry was right: this is a police action . . . inside the Core. But Bush was also right: this is a war inside the Gap.

Smart Palestinians desperate to move beyond Arafat

"After Arafat, Opportunity? Some Palestinians Hope Moment Brings Reshaping of Governance," by Farnaz Fassihi, Wall Street Journal, 24 November 2004, p. A11.

Here’s a realistic judgment on Arafat: “He was the guardian of our national cause but could not understand the modern concept of governance.” So says a long-time legal reform advocate living in the West Bank, where “Palestinian courts don’t repreent or uphold the law, and are procedurally sloppy and filled with corrupt judges.”:

Others pursuing change are focusing their energies on education, health care, police and security measures, and gaining control of Palestinian finances. They accuse Mr. Arafat’s tight circle of advisers—for the more part founders of the Fatah movement and exiles who moved here with him—or corruption and cronyism. These failings bear part of the blame, they say, for a shriveled economy and the fact that more than half the Palestinian residents of Gaza and the West Bank live in poverty and nearly half are without jobs.
The rest of the blame obviously goes to the negative security situation with Israel, where—of course—one might argue Arafat’s legacy was all the worse. But the connections between the internal rot and the external insecurity are striking more and more Palestinians as real:
Those pursuing a new order are hoping to find representatives who will tackle the two main questions facing the Palestinian people: how to have peace with Israel and how to build a new country. “I think democracy is a precondition to peace. No agreement will be respected if it doesn’t come from the people; otherwise we have to oppress our population to reach a deal,” says Mustapha Barghouthi, a member of the National Board of Reform . . .
What Palestinians need is a reformist interim leader who starts both processes and then turns them over to a respected leader of the post-founders generation. As with almost all revolutionary movements, the founders tend to make bad political leaders—i.e., they can lead in war but not in peace. George Washington was that rarest of leaders, and we’re the country we are today thanks in no small measure to that fact. People forget that Washington was only a so-so general, but an amazingly foresighted president.

Kansas: center of global freedom!

"Kansas as No. 1," editorial, Wall Street Journal, 24 November 2004, p. A12.

Gotta admit I was impressed with the Kansas-Missouri area when I visited just before Thanksgiving. As we consider where we might live next, it ranks rather high, thanks to the Southwest hub in KC, the fact that you’re roughly two hours by air to either coast (West coast trips are hard for me now living way up in New England), plus by car you’re within a day of so much of America (like Denver, Dallas, Twin Cities, Chicago, my mother-in-law in Indiana). Would be hard to leave the ocean, but not the East Coast. Frankly, my pulse drops quite a bit just driving around a far less settled place like KS or MO. Out East it’s so crowded and it shows in the way people interact with one another.

So maybe we’ll “migrate for freedom,” as the WSJ says, noting that Kansas ranked number one in their annual state freedom indexing, conducted with the Heritage Foundation. Based on a number of variables, to include tax rates, state spending, occupation licensing, environmental regulations, income redistribution, right-to-work laws, minimum wage and tort law, Kansas came out on top. Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York and Massachusetts all ranked in the lowest fifth, to no surprise.

It was probably be easier maintaining my Democratic identity there as well, surrounded by all those Republicans. Hard to keep your sense of who you are politically when you live in a one-party state.

If we were to move to Kansas, wouldn’t I be giving up all my military connectivity? Strange this is right now in my career, but I probably need to leave the Defense Department to maintain connectivity to the military. Where PNM takes me right now is to the other three services (Marines, Army, Air Force) far more than to the Navy, where I’m currently located. To get and maintain the professional connectivity I think my career is calling for right now, I will likely need to move into a situation where I can maintain a looser employment situation while simultaneously forging stronger links with those services I have up to now largely ignored. That will mean periodic travel all over the dial, and that speaks to a central geographic location, which a Kansas City metro region provides, along with that nifty, Southwest hub.

November 27, 2004

A special thanks

Dateline: Portsmouth RI, 27 November 2004

As you might remember, I was given a couple of command coins from the Air War College and the Air Command Staff College when I visited Maxwell Air Force Base down in AL at the beginning of November, only to have them stolen with my wallet on the return trip home.

Maj. Tim Bergmann down there was nice enough to buy the two coins from the local base store and mail them to me. I requested he inform me of their price that I might repay him for his kindness, but he deferred, saying "No compensation necessary, just keep up the good work expanding our horizons!"

Yet another example of why I feel proud to have spent my entire adult career in this business working directly for the military. As someone who's spent a good twenty years thinking hard about war and peace, I've come to greatly appreciate the sacrifices of our military personnel, although I will confess I have learned more simply by living in military communities all these years than by performing the analysis per se.

America is a very lucky country, but that luck is the result of millions and millions of choices made each and every day by individuals to serve the higher cause that is America.

Christopher Cavas' "U.S. Fleet of Mother Ships" in Defense News

Dateline: Portsmouth RI, 27 November 2004

Had ambition to blog a collection of ten articles I've collected over the holiday, but we've got something spreading through the ranks and several of us are suffering a variety of symptoms suggesting a virus of sorts, the kind that just hits you in the early evening and leaves you sort of funky through the next morning. So me and the boys are watching Jerry Lewis's "Nutty Professor" downstairs (really nice to see the widescreen version looking so sharp). Last night we watched "Master and Commander" (first time for me) and I was stunned how good it was, though I've expected the very best from Peter Weir, ever since "Gallipoli."

I know there is a point in there somewhere . . ..

Oh right, feeling kinda crappy so I'm just tossing out this article on a holiday-weekend Saturday (I'm told it's a low-traffic day, typically, so sue me for the lack of effort). This article by Chris Cavas stemmed off a series of interviews he conducted back in early November, me being one of them. I hadn't expected to make it into the article, as I had just chatted with him briefly by cell phone from my hotel in Princeton NJ the afternoon before my talk at the Woodrow Wilson School, and at the time, I didn't feel like I had offered him much worthwhile. But apparently I gave him what he needed, so here's the piece.

U.S. Fleet of Mother Ships: Will Swarms of Tiny Unmanned Vehicles Replace Large Vessels?

By CHRISTOPHER P. CAVAS

A professor at the U.S. Naval War College has some good news and bad news for young officers attending the Newport, R.I., school.

“The good news is, you may command several hundred ships in your career. The bad news is, there isn’t anybody on them,” said Thomas Barnett, who spends a great deal of time analyzing naval trends.

The future U.S. Navy most likely will comprise fewer large ships, fewer traditional cruiser- and destroyer-sized warships and many — perhaps thousands — of small, unmanned vessels.

But don’t be fooled by the small size or benign appearance of the unmanned craft. Plugged into worldwide communications networks, the craft can be ordered from afar to deal with a threat or summon heavy firepower from over the horizon.

So where does that leave the traditional, multirole warship?

“I think they’re going to have to rethink surface combatants,” Barnett said of Navy planners. “I think submarines and aircraft carriers are going to have to be thought of as mother ships which send off swarms of unmanned things.” The result is a notion that only engineers will likely find inspiring.

“The Navy’s going to be fundamentally a ferry,” Barnett said. Ships will just “ship things around.”

The Mother Ship

That trend already is apparent. The mission modules being designed for the new Littoral Combat Ship (LCS) all use unmanned air, surface or underwater vehicles to carry out anti-surface, anti-submarine or anti-mine warfare. Nary a ship is designed today without a flight deck to launch unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs). Most new surface ship designs include stern ramps for launching and recovering small craft, plus large internal spaces to handle and maintain them.

The concept of a mother ship to unmanned systems isn’t new, but how far that concept can be taken is only a guess at this point.

“The Navy used to call them Carriers of Large Objects, or Carriers of Small Objects,” said Robert Work, who studies future naval force structure issues for the Center for Strategic and Budgetary Assessments (CSBA) in Washington. Work sees great mother ship potential in the SSGNs, former Trident ballistic missile submarines now being converted to carry 154 Tomahawk cruise missiles and operate special forces teams. Work believes that rather than carry cruise missiles, the subs will bear torpedo-sized, reconfigurable unmanned underwater vehicles, or UUVs.

“You could put, potentially, 154 of these inside a single SSGN,” he said. “And assuming you could control them — and that’s a big assumption — you would have a mother ship with 54 of these little things zooming around, 50 charging and 50 more on their way to replace” the first group.

The mother ship doesn’t have to be a warship either.

“Maybe what you do is have a larger container ship that’s been designed to take care of a whole big number of UAVs. Or say you have another ship that’s designed to carry a whole big number of USVs,” or unmanned surface vehicles, Work said.

Command and Control

While it is possible to field swarms of unmanned vehicles, command-and-control issues need to be worked out before that becomes a reality. “We still don’t know how to technically control processing memory and power,” said Cmdr. Greg Glaros, who works on future forces technology at the Office of Force Transformation. “When we’re talking about smaller sizes, we haven’t solved those issues,” he said, “technically nor operationally.”

But there’s no question the day of the independently operated, multimission-capable warship is waning. Network-centric operations that connect ships, aircraft and sensors into vast command and communications systems are the order of the day. The result is likely to be a fleet of only a few large ships, many smaller ones and a galaxy of small unmanned sensors — all “nodes” to gather and relay information. Such a “distributed” system concentrates power on fewer hulls and spreads it over a potentially vast area.

“I think over time, what’s going to happen is there’s going to be a group of manned nodes
and there’ll be some large powerful nodes,” Work said. “There’ll be an increasing number of smaller unmanned nodes. And then there’s going to be an even more increasing number of unmanned systems. The Navy that figures that out first is going to have a step ahead on the next stage of naval competition.”

The possibility that a small, foreign competitor could quickly develop a cheap, deployable ability to challenge the United States has planners worried.

“The uncertainty there is that, although we right now are very good in very large complex ships,” Work said, “over the next 20 years — once nano-robotics and high-speed computing machines start to be kludged together — you could see a Navy challenge emerge a lot quicker than it could in the past.”

After a number of analysts inside and outside the Navy criticized the service for concentrating on near-term programs, several studies now are under way to look at the long-term issues of what the future threats could be and what should be built to counter them. Among the groups looking at the issue are the Center for Naval Analyses and the Office of Force Transformation. None of the studies are complete.

Work’s CSBA is looking at what the Navy needs “with an eye towards the industrial base and keeping it vibrant,” he said.

Affordability is key to the projections. During the past two years, the Navy has allocated between $11 billion and $12 billion a year for shipbuilding, according to CSBA, and the “Navy plan is to go up to somewhere between $16 [billion] and $20 billion. And we just quite frankly think that’s unaffordable,” Work said. “We have done some preliminary analysis that says we think $12 billion a year, steady-state, is what we can reasonably expect to sustain over time.”

The Opposition

Perhaps the most fundamental question in planning the future fleet is determining who the enemy could be. Some strategists foresee a possible large-scale confrontation with China or India, in which case a conventional fleet of submarines, aircraft carriers and large surface warships would be useful.

But Barnett is among those who downplay this idea. Rather than developing into adversaries, “India and China [should] become more important players for us,” Barnett said, in “investment, partnership. We’re not going to be more strategically inclined to compete with them.”

Strategists who see no potential large-scale adversaries say the Navy instead will face opponents with less concentrated war-fighting power. “Most of the navies of the world are shifting to gray coast guards,” Work said. “They have some capability but certainly not enough to stop a U.S. push into the littoral.”

The challenge for the Navy is to keep or develop the ability to meet a huge variety of threats or missions — and keep it affordable. That means keeping some of the very expensive, power-projection fleet now in service, and developing newer, cheaper systems to meet the range of threats.

The Big Unknown

While the DD(X) and LCS are meant to support operations near and on land, the Navy and Marine Corps are developing the Sea Base, a concept that envisions groups of large ships stationed near a potentially hostile coastline that will serve as a preparation and launch point for special operations and major combat efforts.

Manned and unmanned vehicles would operate from Maritime Prepositioning Force (Future), or MPF(F), ships, which also will support special operations forces. The ships — probably built with large flight decks — would support Marines and troops ashore in a role that transcends that of existing prepositioning and assault ships. But how the ships will do that — along with logistics issues such as how materiel will get from ship to shore and what defensive capabilities the ship should have — remain unanswered.

“Sea Basing is the big unknown at this time,” Work said. “I think there needs to be a lot more clarification on just what the Sea Base is designed to do.” The Sea Base concept fits squarely into planning for the next Quadrennial Defense Review, now being launched inside the Pentagon.

“What’s driving Sea Basing is the 10-30-30 requirement” at the heart of the new review, Work said. “The 10-30-30 is a stretch goal” . . . where “you want to be able to seize the initiative within 10 days, you want to be able to solve the objectives of the first war in 30 days, and you want to re-cock the force and go and fight another war in the next 30 days. The only way you can get forces anywhere in the world within 10 days is with a thing like sea basing.”

Doing all these things, the analysts said, is expensive, and feelings persist that the Navy will lose funding in the upcoming 2006 budget battle to support an expanding Army and ongoing operations in Iraq. That could force the Navy to choose between surging ahead with big ships like the DD(X), MPF(F), new assault ships and the next aircraft carrier, or smaller platforms like LCS and a host of unmanned concepts.

Doing it all at once, said a Washington-based naval analyst, would meet the 10-30-30 requirement, “but it’s also going to be the unaffordable Navy.” •

E-mail: ccavas@defensenews.com.


[BOX]
The Facts: Driving Design

Robert Work of the Center for Strategic and Budgetary Assessments, Washington, sees four basic “fleets” driving U.S. naval design and acquisition:


The Dissuasion Fleet. Work views this as a “fleet in being,” able to “dissuade someone from mounting a global open ocean challenge against us. The best way to do that is to have a strong nuclear-powered submarine fleet. A fleet of fleet-killers,” he said. But he thinks the current U.S. fleet of more than 50 attack submarines isn’t necessary, and recommends a fleet of between 33 and 44 subs. A “vibrant shipbuilding capability,” along with ongoing efforts in technical research and development, is also necessary. “The dissuasion fleet is having the industry to build more subs if you’re met by a challenge,” he said. Also included is the fleet of strategic submarines armed with nuclear ballistic missiles, although that number could drop from the current 14 missile boats to 10 subs, he said, which would allow four more hulls to be converted for the SSGN cruise missile and special operations forces mission.

The Global War on Terror/Homeland Security Fleet. The SSGN and LCS are keys to the “GWOT” fleet, Work said. “Plus the Coast Guard cutter fleet, which is very big and should be a complementary investment.” New threats also could emerge to emphasize the importance of this mission. “One of the things that may happen over time is that protection of offshore infrastructure is going to be an important mission,” Work said. “Twenty-five percent of our oil and gas comes from the Gulf of Mexico. If somebody was operating in there trying to destroy that infrastructure, the Coast Guard would be overwhelmed. They could not do it. So in that case, you could easily see the LCS fleet being called back because it’s very ideally suited for that type of mission.”
The Coast Guard is just starting to build the first large cutter under its Deepwater modernization program. During the next decade or so, the service plans to construct eight large cutters, 25 medium cutters and about 58 smaller patrol cutters. Work would like to see the modular mission systems of the LCS concept incorporated into the Coast Guard fleet. He also envisions a homeland security role for the LCS. “The LCS becomes the gunboat of the GWOT,” he said. “They can be everywhere. We can afford enough of them [at $220 million per hull] so that we can really control chokepoints.”

The Contested Access Fleet. Conceptually, the LCS is at the heart of the Navy’s ability to fight its way into defended areas near shore. Stealthy designs with stand-off weapons that operate unmanned systems, such as the large DD(X) destroyer, are also designed with this mission in mind. “The contested access fleet will be a lot of experimentation,” Work said. The new integrated power system for DD(X), for example, will make available much more power for weapons and sensors, and will allow designers to mount new systems such as railguns, which have the potential to hurl projectiles more than 200 miles. General Atomics, San Diego, is working on an electromagnetically propelled railgun using pulsed power that, the company claims, removes propellants and explosives from the weapon system, leading to greatly increased magazine capacity.

The Sea-based Power Projection Fleet. The current fleet, built to defeat other navies on the high seas and strike targets on land, is “way too much” for littoral missions against non-traditional opponents, Work said. “It is an extremely powerful fleet that has way too much capability compared to the other three. If there are any changes, I would believe that that is where we would cut.” While dropping the numbers of attack submarines, Work also sees a drop to 10 aircraft carriers from the current force of 12, but continuing improvements in precision weapons wouldn’t necessarily mean a drop in striking power, he said.



COMMENTARY: I came away pretty impressed by the article, and even more by Bob Work, whom I've heard about but never met. I think his analysis of the four fleets is dead-on. Funny for me, but I've been talking about the "smart dust Navy" (lotsa sensors) for several years now, just sort of tossing it out there without a whole lot of understanding of what was possible, much less actually happened, but it was just something that both appealed to me and seemed a logical next evolution. When I saw my quotes up front (the usual misquote: I always say, "The bad news is, most of them will be unmanned."), I thought, "Oh no, this guy is going to make me seem like some sort of futuristic nutcase!" But to my relief, my ideas are just where I want them to be typically located: just beyond the foreseeable horizon but not so far that people aren't working in this direction. That sort of info appeals to investment firms, which is why I tend to get a lot of invitations to speak in such settings. But when I speak of the future Navy being more ferry than warship, you can see why I have a tendency to piss off more than a few people up on top in the Department of Navy.

Ground temperature reading in Iran

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI, 27 November 2004

As we contemplate the newsletter, we hope to catch and package the best of the responses we get to the blog. The following email is a good example. Where do I find this guy and his information? I don't. He finds me.

The Internet permits this sort of data-free research: I'm a pattern spotter. I've had certain patterns in my mind about Iran for years, and so I keep pushing certain ideas, waiting for the data to appear. That's really all futurism is: spotting the weather changes on the horizon and then waiting for the evidence to appear.

I wrote a blog recently about the proposed return of their old president Rafsanjani, who ruled with some moderation across most of the nineties, only to be replaced by (at the time) even stronger reformist Khatami (who, like Rafsanjani in 1997, is also looking long in the tooth in terms of reform, but his excuses [9/11; Axis of Evil speech] were at least better). The article cited a lot of conventional wisdom among the political commentariat of Iran that Rafsanjani would be a serious--even leading--candidate to replace Khatami. If true, it would be a Nixon '68-like resurrection.

I liked the article because it told me that--at least among the political elite--there was a groundswell for a return to the practicalism of the mid-1990s, or before this recent return to hard-line nonsense. So to me, the discussion itself was the interesting sign, not whether Rafsanjani is the guy. The better outcome would be, of course, an even stronger but lower (meaning on the street) groundswell for someone not so used up and perhaps with both more domestic political capital and external diplomatic standing to rise up and be the next president. I'm still looking for someone Nixon-like, meaning someone who can talk the hard-line talk (can't pass mullah muster otherwise, and rememeber: the only good reformist presidential candidate is the one who can actually win), but has the sense to go to Washington before the Pentagon comes to Tehran.

Who would such a person be? And does this groundswell exist?

One data point arrive in the email from a YoungHusband just back from Iran. If you check out his site listed below, you'll see an obvious bias (good one, but obvious), so you judge his judgment as you see fit. Clearly he wants change too, but that's no reason to doubt his analysis of Rafsanjani vis-a-vis other potential candidates.

Here's his email to me:

Mr. Barnett,

Great book, love the blog. Now onto this: http://www.thomaspmbarnett.com/weblog/archives2/001166.html

I just returned from a month in Iran, and my feelings on the ground are that Rafsanjani doesn't have a chance if he gets vetted for the next election. He is the target of much scorn on the part of the Iranian people, and is considered a greedy opportunist that used his terms as prez to cash in. Out of every person I talked to, young and old, no one said that they would vote for Raf. In fact, one guy told me he would vote for Tony Blair in the next election and another told me George Bush! But by far the most popular candidate seemed to be Rohani, the man currently negotiating with the EU3. Another candidate that popped up was Molavi.

But of course Iran has notoriously low election turnout (somewhere around 50%) and if there is some meddling by the Council like earlier this year. . . http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/middle_east/3510573.stm

Just passing on some news from the street.

Younghusband
http://www.cominganarchy.com

We're at a weird point with Iran that is very similar to late Brezhnevian Russia: this is the only country in the region where the government hates us but the people basically like us. Elsewhere, it's mostly the other way around.

This is one of many reasons why I think the U.S. needs to rethink its approach to Iran, something I write about in the February issue of Esquire (a piece I'm still editing with Mark Warren). I expect more hate mail than I can possibly answer on that one! But you need to remember one thing when you finally read that one: it's not about the means but the ends in foreign policy, which is always a realistic balancing of security requirements and economic needs--and it's always (at least for us) about getting what America wants. That's the discussion we so rarely have in this country: not about what we think others want us to do or what we think history wants us to do, but about what we--deep down--know what we want from the outside world because it's right, it makes sense, and it'll keep us who we are.

November 26, 2004

Reviewing the Reviews (James Pinkerton @ The American Conservative)

Dateline: Portsmouth RI, 26 November 2004

The following lengthy review by James Pinkerton, former Reagan and Bush '41 White House aide and currently at the New American Foundation and Newsday as a columnist, was sent to me by a reader. It appears in the current (6 December) issue of The American Conservative. Like many critical reviews, it has less to do with PNM than with the reviewer, who apparently is very disturbed by the "neoconservatives" of the Bush '43 administration.

Here is the complete text, with commentary to follow:

Books

[The Pentagon's New Map: War and Peace in the Twenty-First Century, Thomas P.M. Barnett, Putnam, 385 pages]

Don't Say the (Other) N-Word

by James P. Pinkerton

IF YOU EVER find yourself wondering why Iraq has proved to be a quagmire, you might take a look at The Pentagon's New Map by Thomas P.M. Barnett.

The book's optimism is as bold as the administration's promises of Iraqi "jubilation" that we heard two years ago. Indeed, for those seeking a "new operating theory to explain how this seemingly 'chaotic' world actually works," the dust jacket assures us, "Barnett has the answers." But answers for whom? The book does not explain the world as it is; Barnett's two-variable analysis—people are driven by economics, except when they must be kept in line by American military force—has already been refuted by world events. Instead, the author answers a different, sneakier, question: how does one establish neoconservativism as the dominant politico-military paradigm—without using the word "neoconservative"? That is, how does one mainstream radical ideas, making them seem as normal and American as apple pie and PowerPoint?

Barnett's mission, seemingly, is to synthesize two strands of neoconservatism. One is the "conservative" interventionism of Deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz and the Bush 43-ized Republican Party. The other strand, perhaps more important in Barnett's view, is the liberal interventionism of New York Times columnist Thomas Friedman and much of the Clintonized Democratic Party. To be sure, Friedman's economism, leading to utopianism, has been discredited in the eyes of many, even before Iraq. Yet other Americans remain susceptible to a Barnett vision of the post-Cold War world—namely, a "grand strategy on par with the Cold War strategy of containment," a strategy in which the U.S. leads civilization against the dark forces of barbarism.

Barnett, a senior military analyst with the U.S. Naval War College, is touted on the dust jacket as having "given a constant stream of briefing over the past few years, and particularly since 9/11, to the highest of high-level civilian and military policy-makers." And now, the jacket continues, "he gives it to you."

Actually, this briefing will cost you $26.95. The U.S., meanwhile, has committed close to $200 billion for the war in Iraq—which Barnett cites as "obviously" the first action item for his geostrategic plan—so why start pinching pennies now? A few hours spent with this book will leave the reader with a better understanding of how marchers of folly first put their boots on. In Barnett case, it begins with a map of the world, a little jargon, a few factoids—and a brash theory unalloyed by judgment or historical perspective.

Yet Barnett appears to have influence in the U.S. government. In addition to his post at the Naval War College, he has also worked in the Office of the Secretary of Defense and the Center for Naval Analyses; if the Pentagon had disapproved of Barnett's bold title, presumably the brass could have stopped him from using it. Instead, they funded his work and even blurbed his book.

Barnett's Big Idea is to draw lines across the planet delineating the "functioning Core" and the "non-integrating Gap." The Core consists of the rich countries of North America, Europe, Japan, and Australia, plus Russia, China, and India. The Gap includes most nations of Central and South America, Africa, the Middle East, and Southest Asia.

The great work of the 21st century, Barnett says, is for the "connected" Core countries to come to the rescue of the "disconnected" Gap regions. How to do this? One route is foreign aid, another is trade. Yet another is the military—yes, armed intervention. That is, the Core must prove its systemic superiority by invading the Gap. Paying no mind to St. Augustine, Barnett explains, "My definition of just wars is exceedingly simple: They must leave affected societies more connected than we found them." In other words, perpetual war for perpetual connectivity.

So the idea is globalization in all forms, by all means. Indeed, Barnett goes into full pompous-reverential mode to declare The Lexus and the Olive Tree is a "seminal volume." One might think of Barnett as Friedman with a security clearance. This Pentagon guru declares, "America's national interest in the era of globalization lies primarily in the extension of global economic connectivity." With that single thought in his head, restated endlessly across nearly 400 pages, he reduces all the complexity of the world down to one simplicity: whether or not countries are "connected." And like Friedman, he never doubts that the U.S.—the worldwide history of failed colonialism notwithstanding—can reliably do the connecting.

In a weak moment, Barnett admits, "globalization's progressive advance will trigger more nationalism around the world, not less." Then he catches himself—the cure for measles of nationalism, he insists, is more globalism. "For each time we expand globalization's Functioning Core, we expand for all those living within it the freedom of choice, movement and expression." Prosperity, in other words, begets harmony.

But is affluence really the antidote to war? As Aristotle once observed, no tyrant ever conquered a city because he was cold and hungry. And the Stagyrite knew whereof he spoke: his pupil Alexander the Great suffered little deprivation in his Macedonian royal family. Yet Alexander's chosen form of "movement and expression" was to conquer the world.

But we haven't got to the real thrust of the book, which is that it's the mission of the Core—all united, of course, as one big connected and integrated family—to fill in the Gap, with treasure, blood, and the American way. This shiny, happy vision includes such unhappy Core-iors as France, Germany, and Russia. Indeed, Barnett even sees China as "a serious strategic partner in managing global stability." Do I hear the word "Taiwan"? Only by ignoring a dozen nuclear-edged feuds among the richer nations does Barnett get to the Friedman Station—to the terminus of a certain historical view, to the place where history ends because everyone is sitting peaceful and pretty. That is, if they are on the right side of the global tracks.

Because on the wrong side of the tracks, Barnett warns, lies a world of despair and danger. So even as the Core forms its multinational condominium, it must venture forth to slay the monsters. Barnett explains, "If the Core seems to be living the dream of Immanuel Kant's perpetual peace, then the Gap remains trapped in Hobbes' far crueler reality." As a result, America's globocop destiny is manifest: "American soldiers will end up being the tip of the spear."

If some of this is starting to seem familiar, that's because those ideas that were not cribbed from Friedman were taken from Wolfowitz.

Thus we come to "The National Security Strategy of the United States," released by the White House in September 2002. That document, on which Wolfowitz had been working while serving in the Bush 41 administration a decade earlier, asserted that the world now has only "a single sustainable model for national success: freedom, democracy, and free enterprise."

But since not everyone recognizes the blessings of this single model—aka the American Way—the U.S. should intervene as necessary to give history a shove. Operation Iraqi Freedom was the beta test for the new strategy. And although the war hasn't gone exactly as planned, President Bush continued to prove that theory often trumps reality, insistently describing Iraq as the first step on the long march to peace and freedom for the world.

Yet interestingly, the word "neoconservative" never appears in this book's index. In fact, Barnett goes to great lengths to disguise the neocon-y nature of his argument. At one point, he launches into a reverie in which he claims to be "the real Fox Mulder," referring to the '90s TV show "The X-Files." Continuing in his self-dramatization, Barnett describes a sinister conspiracy inside the U.S. government: "Now the ZOG [Zionist Occupation Government, a term used by Timothy McVeigh types] conspirators basically have control of the Pentagon, with the Jews Paul Wolfowitz and Doug Feith running the show." The ZOG running the military? What are we supposed to make of that? One suspects that the purpose here is for us to have a good laugh, thus chuckling away legitimate concerns that perhaps neocon world-historical utopians are careening America over a cliff top.

The suspicion Barnett is carrying heavy neocon baggage, however disguisedly, increases as he turns toward the Middle East; there he wipes away centuries of history and oceans of blood with his simplifying globalizing brush. "What makes suicide bombers possible?" he asks. The answer: "It's not the poverty, because most of the terrorists are middle class and educated. It's that they have no realistic expectations of a better life for themselves or their children." This economic-determinist dogma might amuse the late Mohammad Atta, the Egyptian-born ringleader of 9/11, who had made his way to affluent Germany before embracing al-Qaeda ideology. Nor would it explain the mysterious rise in suicide bombing in "liberated" Iraq, rising from, well, zero into the hundreds since the Connectivity invasion. In fact, as Robert Paper of the University of Chicago demonstrated, the single biggest factor in suicide bombing is the bombers' desire to drive out foreign occupiers. Pape goes unmentioned by Barnett.

Instead, Barnett plows ahead with his variable-less view of the world, leading him to dismiss all patriots everywhere as retrogrades: "When individuals cannot find opportunity in life, they are reduced to fighting over what's left over: the land and the cultural identity they attach to its history." Such nostalgic rootedness, he maintains, is only for losers. It's far better to "define a society by connectivity and the individual opportunities it provides." Then, Barnett cheers, "You will see the primordial attachment to the land disappear . . . as mobility trumps tradition." So when that Great SUV-Day arrives, patriotism will become obsolete. And as for Americans, we can build condos atop Bunker Hill and pave over Gettsbury.

Barnett ends by offering a world-fixing to-do list: "ten steps toward this world worth creating." And although the book was published just this year, it looks as though he might want to rework some of his presentation slides.

The first item on his list has already been tried: The Iraq War. Dutifiul apparatchik that he is, Barnett lauds "our efforts to recreate Iraq as a functioning, connected society within the global economy." We feel no surprise there—although maybe his further prediction, that "the Middle East will be transformed over the next two decades" needs to be tweaked a bit.

Item two on the list: apply the Iraq solution to North Korea. Writing with the jingoistic breeziness of someone who has never seen combat and never understood how a war turns out, Barnett announces, "Kim Jong Il must be removed from power and Korea must be reunited." He add, "There is simply no good reason why Northeast Asia should put up with this nutcase any longer."

Of course, some might argue that the "good reasons" for negotiating with Pyongyang include its six to eight nuclear weapons. But if neoconservatism doesn't exist in Barnett's exoteric vocabulary, it's no surprise that realism doesn't feature in the text of his book.

Item three: Iran. Once again, Barnett sees regime change as a great idea. Echoing his neocon mentors, he wants to make "Iran the greatest reclamation project the world has ever seen."

Some might note that this list echoes George W. Bush's axis of evil. Indeed, Barnett is lavish in his praise of his commander in chief, even if it means trashing another Republican president: "I prefer comparing George W. Bush to Harry Truman rather than Ronald Reagan." Why is that? "Reagan didn't win the Cold War but had it handed to him on a silver platter." In other words, according to Barnett's revisionist history, the world situation that Ronald Reagan inherited from Jimmy Carter in 1981—Soviets occupying Afghanistan, NATO drifting toward defeatism, pro-Castro forces winning in Central America—presented nothing more than a silver-platter challenge.

So we thing again of that one group of nominally conservative thinkers who argue that the Gipper is overrated. Yup, it's the neocons, the Straussian silent partners in Barnett's book. They're the ones who lump Reagan in with the quarter-century of American presidents before Bush 43 in order to support the claim that America's Middle East policy has been weak and morally cloudy since the fall of the Shah of Iran.

And what else does Barnett recommend? Faster immigration, please. Europe, he avers, needs to "move beyond 'guest workers' and into American-style encouragement of immigration flows." Indeed, "The right-wing anti-immigrant politicians need to be shouted off the political stage and pronto." Moreover, after encouraging Europe to become more like the U.S. on immigration policy, Barnett next encourages the U.S. to become more like the United Nations. In his dream scenario, the U.S. would merge with Mexico and by 2050, a "United States" president would be elected directly from the former Mexico. As Steve Sailer has noted, the neocon vision is a two-step: first, America invades the world; then America invites the world.

America, meet Tom Barnett. Your government rates him as one of the best and brightest. He endorses the radical world-remaking foreign-policy agenda of the neocons, although he won't quite come out and say it. Yet, lest anyone mistake him for a mere stooge of the neocons, he endorses a few nation-remapping ideas that are even more radical than anything the neocons have proposed, at least in public. So this would-be Clausewitz, writing from the bosom of the military-industrial-PowerPoint complex, demonstrates that the neocon bubble has yet to burst. If his book is any indicator of the future, then we ain't seen nothing yet.

James J. Pinkerton is a columnist for Newsday and a fellow at the New American Foundation in Washington, D.C. He served in the White House under Presidents Ronald Reagan and George H.W. Bush.

COMMENTARY: Let me go through the text in full before some summary comments:

Instead, the author answers a different, sneakier, question: how does one establish neoconservativism as the dominant politico-military paradigm—without using the word "neoconservative"?

This is basically the crux of the review: Pinkerton identifies me and my vision as being completely derived from the neocons. The neocons are the great big bogeyman in Pinkerton's analysis of how Bush 43 has hijacked the beloved party of Reagan, who is clearly his idol (man, does he get mad later on when I dis Ronnie about the end of the Cold War!). So, in effect, his review of my book becomes his chance to tee off on the neocons, and the fact that I don't personally "admit" to being under their sway makes my "sneaky" attempt to mainstream these dangerous ideas all the more threatening. As is pretty much always the case with Pinkerton's writing, going all the way back to his rise to prominence as the "great domestic thinker" of the first Bush administration (wow, there's an historical claim to greatness: you really have to hand it to Bush 41 as a great domestic president—or was that why he was a one-term president?): he is always fuming about those who are true Reaganites and those who have betrayed the party. If only I were a Republican I might give a rat's ass about that dumbass historical feud.

Barnett's mission, seemingly, is to synthesize two strands of neoconservatism. One is the "conservative" interventionism of Deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz and the Bush 43-ized Republican Party. The other strand, perhaps more important in Barnett's view, is the liberal interventionism of New York Times columnist Thomas Friedman and much of the Clintonized Democratic Party.

Whoa doggy! Is Barnett a Trojan Horse of the Straussian neocons or a Trojan Horse of the do-gooding Clintonites? Man, I do sound like a radical if I'm trying to fuse Clinton and W. together into one big happy vision of the future. But if I'm even more a Clintonite-Friedmanite than a Straussian, then how can I be a neocon? Hmmm. Methinks Pinkerton has lived too long inside the Beltway. Perhaps he drank up a bit too much of Lee Atwater during his seminal years with Bush 41 that he sees the world so much in terms of "good Republicans" and "everyone else."

Perhaps an even bigger problem for me: I don't know who Strauss is other than I've heard he was a professor a while back at a school somewhere in the Midwest. Man, if I'm going to be part of this whole conspiracy thing with the neocons, I better read up on the rabbi himself!

Yet Barnett appears to have influence in the U.S. government. In addition to his post at the Naval War College, he has also worked in the Office of the Secretary of Defense and the Center for Naval Analyses; if the Pentagon had disapproved of Barnett's bold title, presumably the brass could have stopped him from using it. Instead, they funded his work and even blurbed his book.

Ah yes, the conspiracy reveals itself. Clearly, if I use the word "Pentagon" in the title, the book had to receive official clearance within the Defense Department (just like anyone using "liar" and "Bush" have to clear it with the administration before publishing). As for funding my work, yes, I received a paycheck for my thinking, and later I wrote about that thinking in a bestselling book. Something James himself did, although his book was anything but a bestseller. But clearly, if the White House "funds" your work and you later publish your ideas, that's one thing, whereas if the Pentagon does, that's quite another. And James better read my dust jacket again: no officials of the Pentagon blurb my book using their titles. In fact, only one such official even appears, Art Cebrowski, and his official title is nowhere to be seen. My guess is that James' book has a few ex- or retired (like Cebrowski) government figures blurbing it, but why call the kettle black on that one?

The great work of the 21st century, Barnett says, is for the "connected" Core countries to come to the rescue of the "disconnected" Gap regions. How to do this? One route is foreign aid, another is trade. Yet another is the military—yes, armed intervention. That is, the Core must prove its systemic superiority by invading the Gap. Paying no mind to St. Augustine, Barnett explains, "My definition of just wars is exceedingly simple: They must leave affected societies more connected than we found them." In other words, perpetual war for perpetual connectivity.

Pinkerton seems to miss all the arguments about foreign direct investment driving global integration, and being far more influential than trade, aid or the infrequent military interventions I predict. But that's asking too much. Pinkerton's review has all the earmarks of skipping over the "boring chapters," meaning anything that doesn't fit his critique of the neocons. So if I write an entire chapter dissecting the nonsense about "perpetual war," then that goes unmentioned in this review, because it's somewhat inconvenient to the rhetoric.

One might think of Barnett as Friedman with a security clearance. This Pentagon guru declares, "America's national interest in the era of globalization lies primarily in the extension of global economic connectivity." With that single thought in his head, restated endlessly across nearly 400 pages, he reduces all the complexity of the world down to one simplicity: whether or not countries are "connected." And like Friedman, he never doubts that the U.S.—the worldwide history of failed colonialism notwithstanding—can reliably do the connecting.

Always neat to see a Republican arguing against global economic connectivity as a source of peace and stability, but that's what happens when you feel you're in a battle with the devil: you end up arguing against anything the man says, no matter how sensible. Then again, Pinkerton never offers anything as an alternative explanation other than to reiterate his love for the good old days when we faced off with the commies and Ronnie was our Lone Ranger. But his point is well-taken here: economic connectivity is no guide to anything in terms of war and peace, and the only way it can be encouraged (or the global economy extended) requires the U.S. to become a colonial power. So I guess the end of the Cold War was just one big heyday for colonialization? Or is it now the case that our victory there isn't real, because all it ended up doing was connecting us economically with the East? You know, all those countries we still have "nuclear feuds" with? Maybe I'm being too complex in my thinking here: real point is simply to reiterate that the neocons are bad!

In a weak moment, Barnett admits, "globalization's progressive advance will trigger more nationalism around the world, not less." Then he catches himself—the cure for measles of nationalism, he insists, is more globalism. "For each time we expand globalization's Functioning Core, we expand for all those living within it the freedom of choice, movement and expression." Prosperity, in other words, begets harmony.

Yes, one does expect the worlds "prosperity begets harmony" to be mocked in The American Conservative. My God! What was I thinking! Nationalism is really a good thing . . . or. . . wait a minute? What's Pinkerton's point here? Oh yes, NEOCONS ARE BAD!

But is affluence really the antidote to war? As Aristotle once observed, no tyrant ever conquered a city because he was cold and hungry. And the Stagyrite knew whereof he spoke: his pupil Alexander the Great suffered little deprivation in his Macedonian royal family. Yet Alexander's chosen form of "movement and expression" was to conquer the world.

Is it just me, or does this analysis strike you as palpably pinheaded? Because Aristotle tutored Alexander and Alexander did a lot of conquering and yet wasn't cold and hungry himself, then anybody who thinks "prosperity begets harmony" is really misguided? Follow that? Man, who can argue with a Big Brain that works like that? Wow! You're right Jim, prosperity equals war, cause Aristotle said so.

Indeed, Barnett even sees China as "a serious strategic partner in managing global stability." Do I hear the word "Taiwan"? Only by ignoring a dozen nuclear-edged feuds among the richer nations does Barnett get to the Friedman Station—to the terminus of a certain historical view, to the place where history ends because everyone is sitting peaceful and pretty. That is, if they are on the right side of the global tracks.

So Taiwan means the U.S. and China can never be strategic partners? Despite our hugely overlapping economic interests? Man, who's lacking realism on that one?

As for the "dozen nuclear-edged feuds" inside the Core, who in hell is Pinkerton talking about? Is the US feuding with France to the point where anyone expects nukes to fly any time soon? China, to whom we're selling supercomputers? India, where much of our R&D is heading? Russia (oh, of course, we'll have always Moscow, James!)? Russia with China? India with China? Do we describe all these relationships as "nuclear-edged feuds"? Man, is Pinkerton still living in the good old days of the 1980s? Or am I just being a fuzzy-headed "globalist"?

If some of this is starting to seem familiar, that's because those ideas that were not cribbed from Friedman were taken from Wolfowitz.

This line sums up the review most of all: all Pinkerton sees in this book is Friedman and Wolfowitz, both of whom he obviously despises, and so my book is totally "cribbed" from them. When Pinkerton puts on his glasses, one lense is tinted with Wolfowitz and the other with Friedman, so guess what? He sees their influence everywhere! I have over 400 pages of material, but that's all BS compared to whenever he sees even the slightest evidence of their nefarious thinking!

Thus we come to "The National Security Strategy of the United States," released by the White House in September 2002. That document, on which Wolfowitz had been working while serving in the Bush 41 administration a decade earlier, asserted that the world now has only "a single sustainable model for national success: freedom, democracy, and free enterprise."

But since not everyone recognizes the blessings of this single model—aka the American Way—the U.S. should intervene as necessary to give history a shove. Operation Iraqi Freedom was the beta test for the new strategy. And although the war hasn't gone exactly as planned, President Bush continued to prove that theory often trumps reality, insistently describing Iraq as the first step on the long march to peace and freedom for the world.

Yes, here we come to the real crux of the matter, of the National Security Strategy that I mention once in the book on page 242, referencing it as a new rule set. Clearly it lies at the heart of my book because I go on and on about it so—an entire subordinate clause, for that matter. But no matter, Pinkerton wants to write about it and this review is just a pretext for that. I mean, my book is so bereft of ideas, why not bring in the National Security Strategy and Alexander the Great while you're at it?

Yet interestingly, the word "neoconservative" never appears in this book's index. In fact, Barnett goes to great lengths to disguise the neocon-y nature of his argument. At one point, he launches into a reverie in which he claims to be "the real Fox Mulder," referring to the '90s TV show "The X-Files." Continuing in his self-dramatization, Barnett describes a sinister conspiracy inside the U.S. government: "Now the ZOG [Zionist Occupation Government, a term used by Timothy McVeigh types] conspirators basically have control of the Pentagon, with the Jews Paul Wolfowitz and Doug Feith running the show." The ZOG running the military? What are we supposed to make of that? One suspects that the purpose here is for us to have a good laugh, thus chuckling away legitimate concerns that perhaps neocon world-historical utopians are careening America over a cliff top.

Hmm, that is suspicious! So the whole X-File parody was nothing of the sort! But really an attempt to throw people off the trail!

What a minute? Didn't I admit it as such in the parody! I mean, it was a parody, right?

Or was it?

The suspicion Barnett is carrying heavy neocon baggage, however disguisedly, increases as he turns toward the Middle East; there he wipes away centuries of history and oceans of blood with his simplifying globalizing brush. "What makes suicide bombers possible?" he asks. The answer: "It's not the poverty, because most of the terrorists are middle class and educated. It's that they have no realistic expectations of a better life for themselves or their children." This economic-determinist dogma might amuse the late Mohammad Atta, the Egyptian-born ringleader of 9/11, who had made his way to affluent Germany before embracing al-Qaeda ideology. Nor would it explain the mysterious rise in suicide bombing in "liberated" Iraq, rising from, well, zero into the hundreds since the Connectivity invasion. In fact, as Robert Paper of the University of Chicago demonstrated, the single biggest factor in suicide bombing is the bombers' desire to drive out foreign occupiers. Pape goes unmentioned by Barnett.

Yes, another suspicious item! I don't mention Pape, but an entirely different terrorism expert who makes the same argument I do about "diminished expectations" being the key cause of terrorism. Weird huh?

And again, Atta would have been amused, because clearly he saw a better life for himself and his non-children in having the Middle East join the global economy. So the whole connectivity argument is specious, clearly. I mean, suicide bombers are trying to drive Westerners out of the Middle East, so their actions have nothing to do with resisting connectivity!

Instead, Barnett plows ahead with his variable-less view of the world, leading him to dismiss all patriots everywhere as retrogrades: "When individuals cannot find opportunity in life, they are reduced to fighting over what's left over: the land and the cultural identity they attach to its history." Such nostalgic rootedness, he maintains, is only for losers. It's far better to "define a society by connectivity and the individual opportunities it provides." Then, Barnett cheers, "You will see the primordial attachment to the land disappear . . . as mobility trumps tradition." So when that Great SUV-Day arrives, patriotism will become obsolete. And as for Americans, we can build condos atop Bunker Hill and pave over Gettsbury.

Yes, the crux of my vision says that to be a good American is to put condos on Bunker Hill and pave over Gettsyburg and thereby "dismiss patriots everywhere." God, Pinkerton nailed me on that one! So the insurgents in Iraq are really patriots, and if they want to behead our people and stream it over the Internet rather than accept a McDonald's on their block, then dang it, I've got to learn how to respect such losers . . . uh . . I mean "patriots."

Barnett ends by offering a world-fixing to-do list: "ten steps toward this world worth creating." And although the book was published just this year, it looks as though he might want to rework some of his presentation slides.

The first item on his list has already been tried: The Iraq War. Dutiful apparatchik that he is, Barnett lauds "our efforts to recreate Iraq as a functioning, connected society within the global economy." We feel no surprise there—although maybe his further prediction, that "the Middle East will be transformed over the next two decades" needs to be tweaked a bit.

Sigh! Pinkerton's already given up on the entire Middle East changing whatsoever over the next two decades. . . But he's right, we should give up now after one good try and just admit that we'll never win this global war on terrorism. That's what Ronnie would have done in this situation, just like when he pulled out the Marines from Lebanon and basically wrote off the Middle East for the rest of his administration—except for Iran-Contra, of course.

Item two on the list: apply the Iraq solution to North Korea. Writing with the jingoistic breeziness of someone who has never seen combat and never understood how a war turns out, Barnett announces, "Kim Jong Il must be removed from power and Korea must be reunited." He add, "There is simply no good reason why Northeast Asia should put up with this nutcase any longer."

I guess because Jim was never on welfare he probably never should have written about domestic policy in the first Bush administration. The fact that I've spent a career working with the military doesn't mean anything because I haven't seen combat. Then again, not that many in the military actually do see combat, so they must all be idiots about such matters as well. So the only people who should opine about war and peace should be combat vets, just like only cancer survivors should be oncologists, and only ex-cons should be judges. Education and training is completely worthless. If you haven't REALLY experienced something, you know absolutely nothing about it.

Of course, some might argue that the "good reasons" for negotiating with Pyongyang include its six to eight nuclear weapons. But if neoconservatism doesn't exist in Barnett's exoteric vocabulary, it's no surprise that realism doesn't feature in the text of his book.

Geez, wouldn't Ronnie have said, "Mr. Kim, tear down that DMZ!" Then again, Ronnie was such a dreamer . . ..

Item three: Iran. Once again, Barnett sees regime change as a great idea. Echoing his neocon mentors, he wants to make "Iran the greatest reclamation project the world has ever seen."

Actually, I wrote that line about Iraq (p. 380), not Iran, but why quibble when Pinkerton's on a roll. I mean, anyone who cites your dust-jacket that much clearly gave your book a close read. If I actually didn't call for an invasion of Iran, no matter, Jim knows what the neocons really want and that's all this review is about anyway.

"Reagan didn't win the Cold War but had it handed to him on a silver platter." In other words, according to Barnett's revisionist history, the world situation that Ronald Reagan inherited from Jimmy Carter in 1981—Soviets occupying Afghanistan, NATO drifting toward defeatism, pro-Castro forces winning in Central America—presented nothing more than a silver-platter challenge.

So we thing again of that one group of nominally conservative thinkers who argue that the Gipper is overrated. Yup, it's the neocons, the Straussian silent partners in Barnett's book. They're the ones who lump Reagan in with the quarter-century of American presidents before Bush 43 in order to support the claim that America's Middle East policy has been weak and morally cloudy since the fall of the Shah of Iran.

No, Jim's right on that one. Reagan's record in the Middle East was a fabulous one: success after success. America won the war in Afghanistan by giving arms to the mujahadeen and growing Osama and al-Qaeda in the process, plus setting Pakistan on the wonderful path it follows today, so no moral cloudiness there. America also got those wobbly Euros in line by giving them really big missiles. And we won in Central America in a completely non-morally cloudy way, by funneling lotsa arms to the killing squads of the Contras.

Yes, the Iran-Contra scandal and the secret foreign policy shop running arms out of the basement of the White House while Ronnie slept—now that's a clear and morally unambiguous way to run a national security strategy!

Ah, but that's being unfair. Jim didn't have anything to do with any of that because he's not a foreign policy or national security expert whatsoever, which is why it's perfect that he's reviewing my book. It wouldn't be fair for me to lump him into some conspiracy with Oliver North. That was a completely different part of the White House—many doors down the hall.

Pinkerton can just lump me in with the neocons because he knows the inner workings of the Office of the Secretary of Defense like all domestic White House advisers do.

* * *

All in all, this is one of those times where your book feels like a bit player in its own review!

Pinkerton wanted to rag on the neocons, and PNM gave him the excuse. When the material fit his preferred diatribe, it was included, when not, it was simply ignored. He also went out of his way to ignore all the material on analyzing the Gap, analyzing the new form of crisis represented by 9/11, the whole argument about new rules for national security, the whole strategy of trying to shrink the Gap by using a multi-pronged approach emphasizing—most of all--stable legal rule sets leading to foreign direct investment flows. Pinkerton bypassed my model of how globalization works in terms of energy, FDI, immigration and security flows, my description of the Leviathan-SysAdmin split, and my long delineation of the American way of war. Instead, my vision is described as nothing more than a map and a few factoids and a complete disregard for history, even though the book is chocked full of history (none of which he apparently agrees with—especially dissing Reagan!).

In the end, my book is not reviewed here. All that's reviewed is Pinkerton's unwavering hatred for those he calls the neocons. Pinkerton can't review anything beyond his dislike for neocons because he's not a foreign relations expert, not a historian of international affairs, not a warfare expert, nor he is attuned to global economics. He sounds off vehemently on immigration, which he obviously worries about, and that's it in terms of the vision. Oh, and he reminds us that prosperity doesn't lead to peace.

Why Pinkerton can't review my book other than to say it's all wrong because the occupation (not the war) in Iraq went badly and thus any Bush Administration attempt to foster change in the Middle East will clearly fail, is because he has nothing to offer instead. Clearly, he worries over globalization and "globalism" (whatever the hell that word means), but does he offer any ideas or counterpoints to any of the arguments I make, other than to say history has already judged it and found it wanting?

So his review is basically, "I hate neocons and what they've done to the GOP."

Oh . .. and "I hate this book because it's clearly influential."

November 25, 2004

2004 Thanksgiving Rhode Island Essay Contest

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI, 25 November 2004

Grade 7, Second Place
By Emily Barnett, All Saints Academy, Middletown

The thing I'm most grateful for is my sister, Vonne Mei Ling Barnett. We have just adopted here from China this summer. My parents went to China for two weeks, which is a long time. It took them so long because it took about two or three days to get there, then once they were there and had retrieved Vonne Mei, my parents had to stay one week in China. After that, my parents came back home and brought Vonne Mei with them.

Vonne Mei is the new joy of my life because she is a really wonderful little girl. Every morning, I help feed and dress her, and every morning, I love her more. I am so grateful for her because now I have a sister, a sister who is beautiful. She has almond-shaped brown eyes, tiny hands that are always reaching and most gorgeous of all, her smile. Every time she smiles, I want to hold her close and never let her go. My new sister is the greatest thing in my life right now, and I'm extremely grateful for her. I wouldn't give her up for the world.

November 24, 2004

C-SPAN broadcasting the brief on 6 December in prime time

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI, 24 November 2004

No article blogging today or tomorrow. I will catch up on Friday.

Just a quick note today to wish everyone a happy Thanksgiving day tomorrow, and to give a head's up on the lastest word from C-SPAN's producers. After much negotiation, C-SPAN is going to broadcast my brief again--the supermax version of roughly 2.5 hours in length!

This broadcast will air the night of 6 December, Monday, in prime-time (believe it will be around 7pm). Immediately following the brief, I will appear live on C-SPAN in their main Washington, DC studio to take questions from callers over the air.

The presentation to be broadcast that night will be taped a week earlier at a military base in the greater DC area, meaning this will be a new, slightly updated version of the brief from the one broadcast Labor Day weekend (the National Defense University brief of 2 June).

I'm excited about doing it all over again for C-SPAN, and feel really honored that they not only wanted to broadcast the brief again, but wanted the most up-to-date and complete version they could get. The live Q&A in the studio following the show should be interesting, because I've never done that before (take questions from call-ins on TV, although I've done it plenty on radio).

I post this message now, even though some of the details might change (you know TV: it ain't for sure until the tape actually starts), but that is the plan for now and I'm pretty sure it's going to hold, because C-SPAN needs me in DC to get the Q&A and the only night I'll be there between now and Xmas is the 6th of December.

So tell anybody you want to see it that it'll be on C-SPAN again.

November 23, 2004

Briefing the managers at C.I.A.

Dateline: Original Headquarters Building (OHB), CIA, 23 November 2004

"Bush Wants Plan for Covert Pentagon Role: Studying paramilitary operations that the C.I.A. now runs," by Douglas Jehl, New York Times, 23 November 2004, p. A18.

"Bush Urged to Get Pentagon In Step on Intelligence Bill," by Elisabeth Bumiller and Philip Shenon, New York Times, 23 November 2004, p. A18.

Flew down to DC today on a 0610 US Airways flight directly to Reagan National instead of my usual SWA flight into BWI. Why? The Agency is paying for my travel, and for some weird reason, they couldn't book SWA directly, so unless I wanted to make it complicated, it had to be US Airways through Reagan. What sucked about that was the very early-morning flight because US has so few direct flights (only one would have gotten me here in time for a noontime speech and it was the 0610), plus I can't fly out until 5pm. That combo makes for a nice 16-hour workday.

Ah, the logic of government contracting.

Nonetheless, it was nice to be asked to come down to Langley and brief a collection of the Agency's mid-level managers. Plus, the CIA really treats you nicely when you come to talk, giving you VIP parking (plenty of spots today, given the proximity of the holiday) and putting you up in an office if need be (two courtesies that have disappeared in the Pentagon since 9/11 due to a combo of security measures plus all the rebuilding/rehabbing of the place that will continue forever!). Plus they have their clearance-checking system in good shape, meaning that if you do the paperwork right, you can actually go to the bathroom without an escort.

I came into the building via the original entrance of the Original Headquarters Building, or OHB. This building used to be the entire facility until they created the modern, far more sleek greenish building right next door (I believe they call it the NHB, or New Headquarters Building).

I like coming in the old way because it's the entrance that Hollywood always tries to copy. It has the giant inlaid agency logo in the marble floor that you walk over, plus the stars on the walls for all the agents who've died in action over the years. Then there's the original dedication markers and the big statue of William "Wild Bill" Donovan, head of the forerunner agency, the OSS.

Once inside, it's like any other big government building: drab, miles of corridors, lotsa locked doors, and lotsa billboards where the thousands of employees advertise their desires and needs (for roommates, car buyers, car poolers, etc.). Also cool is the spy museum the Agency has here, plus the funky souvenir store (I once got my Dad some CIA golf balls, the joke being, "when you hit them into the rough, don't worry, THEY FIND YOU!").

The brief took place in a modest conference room, and I gave them a medium-sized version of the spiel (75 minutes), with an obvious focus on intell issues. Despite my great sleep deprivation (God I want to sleep in my own bed several nights in a row!), I performed reasonably well, and the Q&A was lively. I also handed out the book to the various seniors in attendance (dutifully signed) and signed a bunch of others for those who brought them along to the talk. All in all a good time, not to mention an interesting time to be back here taking gauge of the intelligence community's mood.

You know, that intelligence community is far less broken than imagined, and real fixes required have little—if anything—to do with creating a cabinet-level intell czar. As a group, the 15 elements of the intelligence community interact with each other fairly well. If we would only dial down the classification requirements, this network would work just fine. But because we stovepipe the information in this manner, the networks aren't allowed to function anywhere near peak capacity.

But instead of just dialing down the secrecy, we propose centralization, which by and large negates most of the best attributes of having that distributed network of agencies who all collect, process, and analyze a bit differently from one another. In short, we're more likely to get group think with a National Intelligence Director than without one. But until we rethink the ultra-secrecy of most of these information flows, no amount of deck-chair rearranging will do the trick.

The Pentagon isn't going to give up its control over the overhead assets (where the real money is) to a NID, and frankly, it should logically seek to pull CIA's covert stuff over into its bailiwick, because the overhead stuff defines the information superiority for the Leviathan warfighter, and the CIA muscle logically belongs there as well. This fight over the intell reform bill stems fundamentally from the lack of understanding regarding the natural bifurcation of the intelligence community in response to the natural post-cold-war bifurcation of the US military. In short, certain assets logically migrate to the Leviathan, whereas most of what Congress really wants to see centralized (if they thought about it for a minute) under a NID is far more logically associated with the SysAdmin force.

Here's the essential breakdown:

Leviathan =
Defense Intelligence Agency

Navy Intelligence

Air Force Intelligence

National Security Agency

National Geospatial Intelligence Agency

National Reconnaissance Office

CIA's direct action people.

Sys Admin =

Army Intelligence

Marine Corps Intelligence

Coast Guard

FBI

Dept of Treasury

Dept of Energy

Dept of Homeland Security

Department of State

CIA analytical

National Intelligence Council


That's the crude way of describing it, meaning the splits wouldn't be that neat (but that's how you'd describe the center of gravity for each element). You'd still have a IC-wide community management office that worked info-sharing among it all, but you'd let the various agencies serve their respective masters. In other words, let the Defense agencies, by and large, serve the Leviathan and let the departmental agencies (plus the lion's share of the Marine and Army intell) serve the SysAdmin force.

It was interesting to talk with my hosts after the brief, because the same reform-minded elements who invited me today invite me everywhere else I go in the national security community. As with all cannibalizing agents, they tend to think horizontally and plan adaptively. Never ones to wait on the perfect plan, they more interested in moving ahead and letting the chips fall where they may. But alas, that is always the problem for such reformers: the heavies on top want to see everything clearly before committing, less they lose budgetary control of the process. So again, the enemies of performance tend to be centralization and greed, whereas the proponents of reform tend to favor networking and sharing without reference to cost capture.

Guess which side is better suited to fighting a transnational insurgency of terrorists?

BTW, got another medallion today from my hosts. They opined it might be a collector's item soon, but I hope it won't be. The network-centric forces must prevail.

After the brief, I spoke with one senior manager who said he teaches an annual course for intell managers and that last summer he used the original Esquire PNM article. He said it was almost universally hated by the class, because—in his mind—it told them a bunch of things they did not want to hear. He noted that the only other author who seemed to get such a negative response from community managers was Art Cebrowski, my old boss in the Pentagon. I took this as a real compliment—like father, like son.

Anyway, glad this long day is my last for . . . I dunno, a week I guess. So it's back to Reagan and yet another flight home. Thank God we're not traveling anywhere for Thanksgiving. To me (especially this year), holidays are for staying put.

Here's today's catch, on a need-to-know basis!:

Sharing SysAdmin knowledge with Iraqi bureaucrats

Around the horn in China

America: the land of mutts and geniuses

A good example of why Puerto Rico really is in the Gap


Sharing SysAdmin knowledge with Iraqi bureaucrats

"Iraqis Get Lesson in Bureaucracy: Senior Executives Share Knowledge," by Christopher Lee, Washington Post, 23 November 2004, p. A21.

Yesterday I read Francis Fukuyama's excellent essay on State-Building. I say "essay" even though it's a book stretching a whopping 131 pages. Sometimes I get the review that says PNM should have remained a magazine article instead of a book, but frankly, compared to Fukuyama's "slim volume," PNM is crammed full of ideas.

Nonetheless, Fukuyama's book puts his usual brilliance on display, as he skillfully disaggregates both the concept of "stateness" and the phases of state-building. One thing you immediately take away from the book is that the most easily transferable skill-set is that of public administration, or setting up the basic rule sets for making the government function in terms of processing the typical demands from a populace for things like driver's licenses, business permits, etc.

Yes, it's boring stuff, but it's that sort of boring rule set that makes the world go round, so teaching it to former failed/authoritarian states is crucial to helping them leave their Gapdom and join the Core:

Abdul Hadi K. Abid, the head of private-sector development for the trade ministry, said a big challenge is changing the mind-set of ordinary citizens who grew accustomed to life under a command economy in which the changing whims of the rule had the force of law.

"For example, dealing in foreign currency: One day it's a crime where they cut your hand or your ear for it, and the next day it was perfectly legal," Abid said.

By publishing a monthly magazine called Iraqi Trade and through other efforts, Abid said he is trying to promote public debate on market economics and raise issues such as transparency in government policy-making.

Boring yes, but a fundamentally crucial task if you're going to win a Global War on Terrorism. Weak or bad governments must be replaced by good one. Bad rule sets must be replaced by efficient ones. Disconnectedness must be replaced by connectivity.

Around the horn in China

"A Tricky Transition in China: Manufacturers Adapt to Lure More-Sophisticated Consumers," by Ginny ParkerWall Street Journal, 23 November 2004, p. A17.

"A Cash Crop, a Better Life: Farmers Find Profit Niche In China's Industrial Boom," by Peter S. Goodman, Washington Post, 23 November 2004, p. E1.

"China, India Turn to Ecuador in Search for Oil," by Joel Millman, Wall Street Journal, 23 November 2004, p. A17.

"Bears (Take Interest) in China's Shop: Hedge Funds Aim to Profit From Stock-Market Rally, But Shorting is Difficult," by Laura Santini, Wall Street Journal, 23 November 2004, p. C3.

China's growing consumer market is changing the way foreign investors look at China. Instead of viewing it simply as a place to make things for other markets, increasingly big corporations are looking at China as a place to design and manufacture consumer goods for domestic markets. To really access that market, you have to customize for local tastes, and that typically means teaming up with local players, but the fear here is the loss of technology to eventual competitors. Is China unique in this danger? Not really. Any emerging market tends to demonstrate this promise/pitfall, but the necessary rule sets do emerge with time, in part because all those foreign companies entering the marketplace eventually demand it.

The demand created by the rising consumer class not only draw in foreign investors but likewise is remaking the rural countryside by creating niche cash crops that are directly linked to the country's industrial boom. The second article describes the reformatting of significant portions of China's rural farms in the direction of growing rubber trees for the country's burgeoning need for tires for all those cars desired by the emerging consumer class.

This demand not only changes crops in the countryside, it changes mind-sets:

"In our tradition, we rely on our land to feed us," said Li [Ziqie, 25], who was a boy when the first meeting about the rubber project was held here. "We were really suspicious at first. My father wanted us to use just a small portion of our land for a pilot project. Some people said, 'Why plant rubber? You cannot eat the trees.' But eventually, he agreed to devote 30 mu. We were really nervous. If we couldn't grow enough food, then what?"

The Li family reached into meager savings and sank nearly $80 into the project. They planted 800 trees.

By 1996 the Li family was generating income in the range of $800 per year, and some families now earn upwards of $4,000/yr, which is a huge income in China.

Here's the real change: now Li's father no longer plants rice, instead buying that in the village. That's connectivity. That's mutually-assured dependence. That's the creation of real wealth where none previously could be generated.

The downside of all that consumer demand, however, is the requirement for far more energy than the country can generate on its own, which is why China, like India, is scouring the planet for oil, often going where Old Core companies fear to tread (like shaky Ecuador) or simply cannot because of political restrictions (Iran).

The other downside to this process of expansive growth is that—traditionally—what goes up must eventually come down somewhat, which is why you're seeing Wall Street beginning to discount, largely through derivatives at this point, the inevitably recession that must someday afflict China.

Here's hoping that, when that fall inevitably occurs, our security relationship with China is one helluva lot more secure than it is today. To me, that would be the U.S. government discounting that danger politically, reflecting what I hope would be our leadership's ability to start seeing China within the context of everything else so that it understands why any military conflict with China would invariably affect that everything else.

America: the land of mutts and geniuses

"Rejecting the Next Bill Gates," op-ed by Fareed Zakaria, Washington Post, 23 November 2004, p. A29.

One of the reasons why I support letting non-native born Americans run for president is that this country is essentially mongrel in character and will only grow more so in coming decades. We've never had a higher percentage of foreign-born citizens than we do right now, and that's primarily a result of the huge influx of immigrants (unprecedented in sheer numbers) across the 1990s, the first decade of nearly-global globalization (with the Core expanding to include two-thirds of humanity).

For the U.S. to remain open to this historic process, I favor the quickest and simplest routes for immigrants to become citizens, and for foreign-born citizens, after living in the U.S. for a quarter-century or more, to be granted the right to run for national office (we have only two—president and vice-president). When we created the amendment to ban foreign-born presidents, we were living under the long shadow of our birth as British colonies, and the fear that drove that rule set was that British citizens might use that loophole to come over here and re-establish control, so to speak. That fear is a long-gone concept (although I don't doubt a Tony Blair would clean up here in any presidential run), and given the fact that one-third or more of our citizens in 2050 are likely to be foreign-born, it makes sense to reverse the now outdate rule.

One of the great efficiencies of our system is that, if you're secretly Bill Gates, or Steven Spielberg, or Michael Jordan, this is the place to come and find full outlet for that talent. There is no economic system in the world that rewards talent like ours, which is why the U.S. has so long been such an incredible magnet for talents professionals from all over the world.

That magnetic attraction will naturally diminish as other rising poles of the Functioning Core (like China, India, etc.) grow their own forms of magnetism, but it can also be artificially depressed by our own policies toward guest workers, student visas, and immigration in general.

I am scared, as is my former fellow grad student Fareed Zakaria, by the heavy drop in foreign students studying in the U.S. since 9/11, because this is the first downward movement in that trend in more than three decades. Undergrads from China have dropped 20 percent in 2004 (45 percent in grad students), and the similar numbers for India are 9 percent (undergrads) and 28 percent (grads).

Here's why it matters:

Some Americans might say, "Good riddance, it's their loss," Actually the greater loss is ours. American universities benefit from having the best students from across the globe. But the single most deadly effect of this trends is the erosion of American capacity in science and technology. The U.S. economy has powered ahead in large part because of the amazing productivity of America's science and technology. Yet that research is now down largely by foreign students. The National Science Board (NSB) documented this reality last year, finding that 38 percent of doctorate holders in America's science and engineering workforce are foreign-born. Foreigners make up more than half of the students enrolled in science and engineering programs. The dirty little secret about America's scientific edge is that it's largely produced by foreigners and immigrants.

One way how the Defense Department spreads it's influence around the world is its educating of many of the world's military leaders in institutions like the Naval War College. Same thing is true for U.S. higher education in general, especially in places like the University of Chicago, which is famous for cranking out economic leaders for foreign governments.

All that influence is put at risk by this aspect of our Global War on Terrorism. The flow of people, as I describe it in PNM, is crucial to making America the country it is today. Mess with that flow, and you mess with America's economic and political future.

[p.s., is it just me, or does anyone else notice that Fareed basically publishes the same piece--word for word--each week in both Newsweek and the Washington Post? No offense, but isn't that sort of cheating?]

A good example of why Puerto Rico really is in the Gap

"Puerto Rico is dangerous ground for police: Much of violence linked to drug traffickers using island, by Kevin Johnson, USA Today, 23 November 2004, p. 5A.

I catch grief from some readers because this or that state is either inside or outside the Gap. People tend to take this designation very personally, and I understand the frustration. When I first drew the map, I simply drew my line around the icons representing the instances of U.S. military crisis response activity in the post-Cold War period without any great reference to the countries that Gap shape encompassed. That's true primarily because the map I use in my brief is rather iconic in its simplicity, failing to include small islands and not delineated in terms of national borders or state names.

When I got to the point of publishing the original article with Esquire, I was pushed by Bill McNulty of the New York Times, who constructed the map for the magazine, to get very specific about where the Core-Gap dividing line should be. That's because it's McNulty's style to have ultra-crisp maps (or should I say, it's the style of the Times). So he kept calling me up as he built the map, asking about this or that country, as in, "in or out?"

So I had to make a lot of choices, knowing that I really viewed the line less as a clear demarcation and more like a fuzzy, fat seam—or more like a deep beach against which the waves of globalization lapped constantly, altering the make-up of the shoreline. One of those choices was basically to include the entire Caribbean in the Gap, along with the southern (i.e., Chiapas) state of Mexico. Why be so inclusive/exclusive?

It's weird, but Caribbean islands are both slimly connected and more than disconnected as both tourism spots and off-shore banking facilities. Both ventures desire a minimal form of connectivity, but no more. If you're too connected in terms of tourism, you're not really a "get away from it all" spot. And if you're an off-shore banking center, you want certain basic forms of flows, but not exactly the oversight—if you know what I mean.

But the real reason why I chose to keep the entire Caribbean inside the Gap is the question of smuggling—both in terms of drugs and people.

Puerto Rico is technically part of the United States as a U.S. territory, but it's not really part of the United States, meaning it's not a state, and that's what makes up these "united states." Part of why that's happened, meaning why PR has never become a state, is because of the way we've chosen to structure the political and economic system there. In effect, we've disincentivized statehood to a significant degree.

Lacking such statehood, PR is far more Gap-like than any U.S. state, and that should be no surprise. As the article says, "Puerto Rico may be an island paradise for tourists, but it's also one of the most dangerous places in the world to be a cop."

PR is an island of less than 4 million citizens, yet the number of cops who die there every year outnumber the states of Florida (best comparable in terms of drug interdiction issues) and New York (police capital of the world), two states whose combined population is over 50 million. Only the huge states of Texas and California have recorded more cop killings since 1994.

The drug trade is the prime reason for the high level of killings, since PR is a "staging area for illicit shipments of cocaine and heroin heading to the U.S. mainland from Colombia."

What has pushed this up-tick since 9/11 is the U.S.'s crackdown on traditional smuggling routes through Mexico and Central America, which means Puerto Rico has become more Gap-like as a result of America's attempt to firewall itself off from bad things vectoring into the continental U.S. So thanks to the System Perturbation of 9/11, Puerto Rico is more negatively connected to the United States.

November 22, 2004

Talking the Future of War with CNN

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI, 22 November 2004

CNN's Paula Zahn show came by the college today in the person of correspondent Tom Foreman to interview me regarding an upcoming series on "future war." Like with the German "PBS" crew, we shot this in my office. Foreman really liked PNM and asked a lot of great questions, but I will confess that I didn't feel like I performed that well. Then again, I never feel I perform that well in such situations (the pre-taped stuff) and I guess I know why.

When it's live, the reporters tend to ask you easier questions (more specific) because everyone wants the process to go as perfectly as possible. The joy/pain of the taped interview like this one is: they will cut up the tape later and splice the best answers together for the produced segment. So I think that's why reporters like doing it this way: they can ask tougher and more broad questions, knowing they can scrub out all the bad bits and grab only the best lines (which, of course, is a lot of work for them, I would imagine). But better they work hard than me.

Anyway, despite my feeling like I sucked, Foreman was very complimentary. Of course, they always are, but I didn't feel like he was comforting me, rather that he was really psyched about interviewing me and about the series he was working on, which is really cool, because you always want to interact with people who are psyched about what they do.

Foreman's enthusiasm was needed today, since I felt a bit burned out from lack of sleep. I stayed up last night until midnight to watch the Pack beat the Texans with ANOTHER TIME-RUNNING-OUT FIELD GOAL!

Better yet, this was the first football game I have ever watched on HDTV, and it was spectacular—I mean, SPECTACULAR!

Here's today's catch:

Another good take on Putin's "silver bullet"

Iran's "Nixon" Considering Getting Kicked Around Again

Why America's definition of "genocide" is the only one that matters

"Greater China" eclipsing China as a "great power"

The Netherlands is joined by the Global War on Terrorism

The New Core is the future of environmental degradation and environmentalism

Japan sounds more ready to deal on North Korea

The "world election" needs a more globalized slate of candidates

The automatic first economic step in any SysAdmin job


Another good take on Putin's "silver bullet"

"Putin: Russia to Deploy Missiles 'Unlikely to Exist' Elsewhere," by Peter Finn, Washington Post, 18 November 2004, p. A25.

Besides Putin reminding us that Russia mattered, this story offers another reason why he made this announcement about a new nuclear missile system that is unique: he wants to be able to declare that, as far as Russia is concerned, our new missile defense system is no big deal.

True or not? Doesn't matter. Only the declaration matters. He's saying that as far as he and Russia are concerned, mutually-assured destruction between them and us is not altered one whit.

Iran's "Nixon" Considering Getting Kicked Around Again

"Lion of Iranian Politics May Return for Run at Presidency," by Robin Wright, Washington Post, 16 November 2004, p. A19.

Ali Akbar Hashemi Rafsanjani was the president of Iran from 1989 to 1997. He was considered the "face of moderation in Iran" during his rule, following Ayatollah Khomeni's death. What marked his time? He opened up Iran considerably to outside connectivity, to include reviving the Shah's stock market and letting Beethoven music and Arthur Miller's plays to be performed in Tehran.

Sounds like détente with the Sovs, does it not.

Rafsanjani was succeeded by the presumed Gorby-like reformer Mohammad Khatami, who apparently has little expectation of being approved by the resurgent mullahs to run again. Khatami's plans for Iran has not born much fruit, and instead suffered a reactionary setback following 9/11 and the start of the whole Axis of Evil thing. If Rafsanjani wins approval from the mullahs to run again, his resurrection would be on par with Nixon winning the presidency in 1968 after being out of politics for so long.

How likely? He is described as "the leading candidate to become Iran's next president, according to Iranian politicians and analysts."

Here's the real question then: is this the guy whose regime we want to change? Or is this the guy we want to make some SALT-like deal to start a serious détente?

Think about it…

Why America's definition of "genocide" is the only one that matters

"In Sudan, a Sense of Abandonment: Crisis Victims See Little Help From Outside," by Emily Wax, Washington Post, 16 November 2004, p. A1.

I know I've covered this thing many times before. The only reason I cite this article is the following: to highlight the African Union's sad attempt to plus up its "observer force" from 700 to 3,000. The AU asked for $220m in donations to finance the effort, and got only $140m pledged, so nothing has happened. The plus-up is designed to make the force something closer to a peacekeeping force, instead of just note-takers, but Sudan has been adamant about not letting in any such peacekeepers, only "observers."

How many peacekeepers would be needed? Good estimate is 44,000. So is the observing helping in the absence of peacekeeping? According to one experienced Canadian general, "The mission of observing will do nothing except destroy the credibility of African Union troops . . . Observing troops getting beaten up and dying is useless."

There will be no 44k peacekeepers without the U.S. military as the hub around which the spokes can be laid. If the US sees no genocide, then it does not matter who does, because there is no critical mass without the Pentagon. No Pentagon, and it ain't on the map.

"Greater China" eclipsing China as a "great power"

"Hong Kong, Taiwan Draw Investment As China Cools Down," by Craig Karmin, Wall Street Journal, 22 November 2004, p. C1.

"Drug Companies Look to China For Cheap R&D," by Laura Santini, Wall Street Journal, 22 November 2004, p. B1.

"New York Port Hums Again, With Asian Trade," by Eric Lipton, New York Times, 22 November 2004, p. A1.

Investors are cooling on China the mainland, but still pumping money into Hong Kong and Taiwan—or the so-called Greater China markets.

That phrase tells you plenty: Greater China is an economic reality to which the political reality of something beyond China, Hong Kong, and Taiwan has yet to emerge. Economics racing ahead of politics. Connectivity racing ahead of security. The gaps suggest the need for new rule sets.

The question is, How do they come about? By violence or by diplomacy?

Guess which route means more money for everyone?

The definition of Greater China includes sectors like the drug industry, which is deciding to send more and more of its R&D effort from the US to China. But it also includes geographic realities, like a New York port system that is revitalized largely by Greater China's explosive growth over the past five years.

When I was in Beijing, I told reformists there that they needed to do more than come up with a Theory of Peacefully Rising China. They need to come up with a Theory of Greater-Than-Mainland China that was more than just economics and growing connectivity, but included political and security definitions of a better tomorrow for all who joined.

This is Rising China's real task right now, and if completed, the world will enter a new era of even greater stability and growth across a growing Core.

The Netherlands is joined by the Global War on Terrorism

"A Brutal Killing Opens Dutch Eyes To Threat of Terror: Crackdown on Radical Islam Follows Filmmaker's Death; Immigrants Get Scrutiny," by Andrew Higgins, Wall Street Journal, 22 November 2004, p. A1.

The assassination of the Dutch filmmaker who spoke out strongly against the treatment of women in traditional Islamic societies has really brought the GWOT to Amsterdam. Here is what one 39-year-old socialist alderman said: "We have to fight terrorism. The war on this small group of terrorists has to be very severe."

The filmmaker, Theo van Gogh, was shot, stabbed and had his throat slashed by a "suspected Islamic radical":

The killing set off a wave of attacks on mosques. It also triggered a surprising shift in a country where, like elsewhere across much of Western Europe, America's "war on terror" has often been derided as too crude and too brutal.

As one politician put it: "People here thought that terrorism was for other countries, not for the Netherlands. This is a rude awakening."

Sounds like a System Perturbation to me.

The New Core is the future of environmental degradation and environmentalism

"India Sets Pace on Cleaner Air: Capital Converts Bases, Other Vehicles to Less-Polluting Fuel," by John Larkin, Wall Street Journal, 22 November 2004, p. A12.

The first para says what I've been long stating:

India's dusty and congested capital seems an unlikely place to find ideas about how to cut a country's dependence on expensive foreign oil. In many ways, New Delhi is an environmental disaster zone. But it also is at the forefront of a global push to convert more motor vehicles to cleaner, less expensive natural gas.

In 2002, the city became the first in the world to mandate that all diesel buses switch over to compressed natural gas. India, by the way, imports 70% of its oil.

Who are other states apparently moving in similarly bold ways? Why, that would be China and Brazil, two other New Core powers. China plans to have its fleet ready for the 2008 Olympics held in Beijing. Why? Connectivity doesn't just require code, sometimes it requires clean air—especially if you want anyone to run 26.2 miles in Beijing!

The New Core is the logical center of gravity for future experimentation and new ideas in environmentalism. Why? These states are at a real inflection point in terms of development, meaning they're extremely motivated to find answers.

You want to get the rest of the Gap "green"? Get them into the New Core!

Japan sounds more ready to deal on North Korea

"Japanese Offical Warns of Fissures in North Korea," by James Brooke, New York Times, 22 November 2004, p. A3.

Here’s the shocking opening paragraphs:

After weeks of reports from North Korea of defecting generals, antigovernment posters and the disappearance of portraits of the country's ruler, the leader of Japan's governing party warned Sunday of the prospects of "regime change" in North Korea.

"As long as Chairman Kim Jong Il controls the government, we have to negotiate with him, but it is becoming more doubtful whether we will be able to achieve anything with this government," said Shinzo Abe, acting secretary general of the Liberal Democratic Party, on Fuji TV, referring to talks on North Korea's abductions of Japanese in the 1970's. "I think we should consider the possibility that a regime change will occur, and we need to start simulations of what we should do at that time."

By breaking an unspoken taboo on talking publicly about "regime change" in North Korea, the powerful Japanese politician underlined a feeling spreading in the region that cracks are starting to show in the Kim family's control over North Korea after nearly 60 years.

Actually, the only shocking thing about the quote is that the Japanese up and said it!

Anecdotal evidence says more than 100 North Korean generals has fled the country, or roughly 10% of the military elite. What does that tell you about the situation at the top?

It tells me that insiders can be had for a song.

Here’s the kicker: “outside analysts are speculating that the personality cult around "Dear Leader" is being curbed, either to advance painful economic reforms or to head off a military coup fomented by China.”

If that’s the rumor, you have to wonder whether or not Beijing is ready to deal on Kim. If they’re ready, the question becomes, What do we offer?

The "world election" needs a more globalized slate of candidates

"The 28th Amendment," op-ed by William Safire, New York Times, 22 November 2004, p. A31.

William Safire is retiring soon, so what he chooses for his last articles mean something. That he chooses to spend one on the notion that America should let foreign-born citizens run for president means something. It means he understands that the election of our president is the closest thing the world has to a global election.

We need to open up that process by opening up the available pool. We need to say to the world that America is open for business, open for newcomers, open for real expansion.

I thank Mr. Safire for making this choice.

The automatic first economic step in any SysAdmin job

"Major Creditors in Accord to Waive 80% of Iraq Debt," by Craig S. Smith, New York Times, 22 November 2004, p. A1.

A good sign and a needed sign. The Core decides collectively to cancel 80% of Iraq's outstanding debt of $39B.

Now the pressure's on Saudi Arabia, Kuwait and other Middle Eastern regimes to do the same.

Nice move, say I.

Also as a mental note, this decision should be automatic in any future A-to-Z Core-wide rule set on processing politically bankrupt regimes in the Gap—no ifs, ands or buts.

November 21, 2004

The wrong lesson, the wrong teacher, the wrong replacement, the wrong job

Dateline: SWA flight 132 from KC to BWI, 21 November 2004

"Hawk Sightings Could be Premature: It's hard to flex muscles around the world when the troops are tied up in Iraq" by David E. Sanger, New York Times, 21 November 2004, p. WK1.

"A Doctrine Left Behind" op-ed by Mark Danner, New York Times, 21 November 2004, p. WK13.

"The Power-Values Approach to Policy: Move to State Raises Rice's Profile" by Glenn Kessler, Washington Post, 21 November 2004, p. A8.

"Rumsfeld Isn't Showing Signs That He's Leaving: The defense secretary says he has not yet talked with Bush about staying on" by Richard W. Stevenson, New York Times, 21 November 2004, p. A23.

The Neocons are grounded, we are told, by having to keep 130,000 troops in Iraq, rotating out the old and preparing the new 365 days a year for as far as this administration can see. Far enough point. If you don't plan for the peace, you get stuck with the occupation. And if you don't build the SysAdmin force, you'll never be able to plan realistically for the peace.

What we learned in Iraq is not the enduring wisdom of the Powell Doctrine, but the incredible costs we're now paying for slavishly following it all those years, for its distaste for all "quagmires" (read nation-building) is why we don't have a SysAdmin force after 15 years of watching our military deal with such situations all over the Gap at an exploding rate. The Powell Doctrine isn't the cure, it was the cause of our current malaise, reflecting our desire to avoid administering the system of security in the age of globalization, believing, a la Tom Friedman, that the electronic herd would ride herd over all, and that globalization needed no bodyguard.

Will Rice be the answer at State. Remember, not only is she famous for declaring that "we don't need to have the 82nd Airborne escorting kids to kindergarten" (the classic put-down of Military Operations Other Than War), but she is logically held to blame most for the massive failure of the postwar occupation of Iraq.

The job of interagency coordination falls to the National Security adviser, pure and simple. As Mark Danner remarks in his op-ed:

After Condoleezza Rice's elevation as Mr. Powell's successor, so much of the commentary seemed focused on her "closeness" to the president that it might have seemed the height of indiscretion to point out that she has been something of a disaster in her present job—a fact widely acknowledged among foreign policy professionals.

Meanwhile, one of our greatest Secretaries of War ever (Don Rumsfeld) survives to transform the military another day. Here's hoping he knows enough to seed and invest n the SysAdmin force, because the impetus for that development is sure as hell not to be coming from the other side of the Potomac. Foggy Bottom will remain foggy in this second administration, as far as clear grand strategy is concerned.

If you're looking for the Secretary for Everything Else to emerge, watch for him in the Office of the Secretary of Defense, and my fervent hope is that his name will be Admiral Ed Giambastiani (currently head of Joint Forces Command), and that his title will be Chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff.

We need a Secretary of Everything Else and an anti-Powell Doctrine that places overwhelming presence on the peacekeeping side of the ledger, letting the transformed Leviathan force do its thing as designed. Adm. Giambastiani is just the man to make such a revolution occur.


Here's the rest of today's catch, basically the Sunday NYT:

On the Axis of Evil, danger and opportunity are two sides of the same coin

"Hegemons" like China aren't made, they're cornered

The Dis-abstraction of genocide

Colonial "villains" ain't what they used to be

"The Dividers: a Quinn Martin production"

In the New Core, diversity is often a four-letter word


On the Axis of Evil, danger and opportunity are two sides of the same coin

"Bush Says Iran Speeds Output of A-bomb Fuel, by David E. Sanger, New York Times, 21 November 2004, p. A1.

"Mongolia Under Pressure to Serve as haven for Refugees, by James Brooke, New York Times, 21 November 2004, p. A13.

Bush in Asia sitting down with a host of New Core leaders: he talks some scary noise on both Iran and North Korea, right up to mimicking Reagan's call to Moscow to "tear down that wall" in his pointed remarks to Kim Jong Il ("Get rid of your nuclear weapons programs.").

But no matter how harsh the rhetoric, even some of Bush's senior people are beginning to see the writing on the wall:

But Mr. Bush's quickness to seize on the Iranian production of uranium hexafluoride was driven, administration officials said, by a sense among his national security aides that there is still time to stop ran from actually producing a weapon. "We're past that point with North Korea," one senior adviser said recently. "With the North, it's a question of unwinding what's already happened."

Instead of asking which one is easier to stop, shouldn't we simple deal with the situation that's far worse? There is no deal to be made with North Korea, because that regime has nothing to offer. With Iran, there are clear things that country could offer in terms of better regional behavior that would be worth a lot to us right now, trapped as we are in Iraq. With Kim, it's just a nutcase with nukes, so disconnected from the global economy that the only way he makes money to prop up his regime is through criminal activity.

To me, the sequence of future events seems clear. If you believe China is the rising threat to peace, don't you focus on things that could bring war between you too first, while understanding that China is going to be making energy deals the world over to accommodate its massive development trajectory—like with Iran?

"Hegemons" like China aren't made, they're cornered

"China Widens Economic Role in Latin America, by Larry Rohter, New York Times, 20 November 2004, pulled off NYT web.

"Tension rises as China scours the globe for energy, by David Spencer, Daily Telegraph, 21 November 2004, pulled off DT web.

"China Eases Rules on Joint TV Ventures, by Reuters, New York Times, 19 November 2004, pulled off NYT web.

China's moving into Latin America big time in search of raw materials, throwing around investments and aid like a . . . well . .. rather developed state. We may ignore our "backyard," but China cannot. Its growth is simply too explosive and too long-term. We can turn that "scouring the globe" phenomenon into a threat ("China's infiltrating the Western hemisphere!"), but don't expect Latin America to agree with the diagnosis.

Instead, expect other New Core pillars like Brazil to speak of strategic alliances. In fact, expect, China to be offered strategic alliances all over the dial. We can sit back and view all this with alarm, or we can get our bid in early. Ask yourself which course seems like a more strategic call?

The more we delay, the more China will move in an inefficient, seemingly "threatening" manner to secure oil around the world. Why? They fear a Taiwanese move toward independence they cannot ignore, and that the upshot of that act will be an attempt by the US to punish China militarily through cutting off its access to oil, in a truly cutting-off-our-noses-to-spite-our-face globalization logic.

China's trying hard to open up to the outside world, witness the moves on such touchy areas as mass media. But it's not going to open up to that outside world strictly according to our rules and our rules alone. It's going to create its own rules along the way, which will join and shape the larger Core rule set on globalization. We can be part of that process, or simply fear it. But it will happen regardless of our stance.

The Dis-abstraction of genocide

"Mr. Bush's Better World, editorial, Washington Post, 21 November 2004, p. B6.

"At Holocaust Museum, Turning a Number Into a Name, by Joseph Berger, New York Times, 21 November 2004, p. A13.

The Washington Post editorial board is blasting the Bush Administration for doing nothing about Sudan, where likely well over 100,000 are dead (probably four times the number of dead in Iraq since the war began, according to realistic estimates, but let's be unrealistic and say it's probably only two times as many dead). The paper is right to push Bush on this issue ("How can it recognize genocide, shrug its shoulders and then carry on claiming that its vigorous foreign policy is about creating a better world?"), but why not push the entire Core, to include China for holding up a stronger response in the UN Security Council out of oil interests there (China's got it right, huh! Sudanese blood for Chinese oil).

Everyone wants to blame Bush and the Neocons, but frankly we created the conditions for this mess—America itself—years ago by refusing to admit the world would need serious administering following the end of the Cold War. We created the Powell Doctrine, we didn't rebalance the military forces as military-operations-other-than-war effectively quadrupled in demand across the 1990s, and we decided to invade Iraq without an adequate plan for the peace because we didn't have an adequate understanding for that mission much less the force structure to implement it. Our failure in occupying postconflict Iraq is rooted in America's ambivalence about its role as alleged global cop following the collapse of the Soviets, and it's that ambivalence that's on full display yet again on Sudan. We can't do anything about Sudan because we're so tied down in Iraq, and we're tied down in Iraq because we don't "get" SysAdmin work, don't want to do it, haven't prepared for it, and run away from it every time we bump into its ugly realities.

And we always blame the other guy. In the 1990s the right blamed Clinton and his do-gooders for wanting to do all that nation-building crap. Now the left blame the Neocons for wanting to try . . . God forbid! . . . . nation-building. When will we stop running from the international security environment, pretending that it can be either left alone or treated merely—in Powell Doctrine-style—by going in, shooting up the place a bit, and then being sure to pull out fast lest we fall into any Vietnam quagmire. The Gap itself is globalization's ongoing quagmire. It's only a question of how much failure and pain the Core must endure before coming to grips with the reality of what it will take in terms of military employment—both warfighting and peacekeeping—to really shrink the Gap.

In the Core and Core-like states trapped in the Gap like Israel, we treat tragedies like the Jewish Holocaust as something worth remembering—person by person. That's what the Israeli Holocaust museum seeks to do: put a name and address to every one of six million that died. That's the responsibility of societies that value individuals. When we begin to view the Gap in the same way, we won't stand by while genocide unfolds, because we'll stop seeing this carnage as abstract statistics, and begin seeing individuals dying.

And we'll be moved to do something about it.

And when we do want to do more that just flag our jaws, we'll need both the Leviathan to win the wars and the SysAdmin to keep the peace.

Colonial "villains" ain't what they used to be

"France Is Cast as the Villain in Ivory Coast: Whoever the Enemy, Ivoirians and Their Neighbors Stand to Lose," by Lydia Polgreen, New York Times, 21 November 2004, p. A10.

The Ivory Coast was an island of relative prosperity and stability in postcolonial Africa largely on the basis of France's continued economic and social and political connectivity to the country. That has frayed in recent years, and as the economic situation worsen and social stress rises to the point of violent outbreaks, the French are naturally scapegoated, along with all those immigrant workers who served the upper classes when times were good.

The latest wave of violence began Nov. 5 when the government strafed a French military camp, killing nine peacekeepers and an American aid worker, and the French retaliated by destroying much of the tiny Ivoirian Air Force. The events seemed destined to deepen a crisis that had already pitted Muslim against Christian, northerner against southerner and Ivoirians with deep roots here against those whose parents and grandparents immigrated here seeking work. But France is being made into the bogeyman.

Let the disconnecting begin. Let the diversity flower. Let the bloodshed flow.

Yes, the homogenizing effect of globalization must be a bad thing, turning everyone into fat, indolent slobs who just want to eat, have sex and watch TV. Real cultural identity must be cherished, no matter what the cost!

Otherwise, we have to call it imperialism and empire.

"The Dividers: a Quinn Martin production"

"Rebels Keep Up Attacks In Sunni-Dominated Cities Of Central and North Iraq " by Edward Wong, New York Times, 21 November 2004, p. A16.

As I make suggestions in this blog that America may well be forced by events in this insurgency to accept the notion of a partial victory in Iraq, I get more than a few emails complaining as to this line of reasoning. Let me recap my logic as it has emerged over the course of events (and yes, my logic emerges over time, it does not spring fully formed out of my head one day only to be held sacred for the rest of my life):

• America isn't going to defeat transnational terrorism in its current, Mideast-driven Islamic-heavy form until the Middle East itself is transformed from its current dyfunctionality (no matter what grievances you want to cite, the real problem is the combination of crappy governments and societies that—quite frankly—suck at globalization.

• To start that process after all our years of diddling on the margin, perturbing that system as a whole makes sense.

• The best target for such an effort following 9/11 was Iraq, because Saddam had checked so many boxes and everyone in the system wanted him gone, even if we didn't have a transparent, A-to-Z Core rule set for dispatching such rogues and rehabbing their systems.

• Once you decide to go in, make if fast and furious with the transformed Leviathan force (check!) but then overwhelm the country with a committed, massive peacekeeping Sys Admin force that segues quickly into round-the-dial reconstruction efforts that emphasizes small-and-beautiful efforts that keep hands busy, put money in pockets, put food in bellies, and give people back their dignity (completely unchecked that box)

• Understanding nation-building is hard, the larger reason for going into Iraq (once Saddam is removed) is not Iraq, but the rest of the region. Expect a strong anti-American reaction as the force for change, but then watch for that change and take advantage of it as it emerges in Syria, Israel-Palestine, Iran, etc. Make the deals, create the local ownership, be generous with the quid pro quos, etc.

• To the extent that you can't resolve Iraq as a whole, I advocate resolving what you can. The Kurdish north isn't the problem, and the Shiite south can be dealt with, leaving the Sunni center triangle as the odd man out.

• There is no reason for the Kurds and Shiites to be held back by the Sunnis, given all the nasty history between them. Iraq is an unreal country with no real basis in history. It was created by the Brits to cover their tracks. We are no more held to that past in Iraq than we were in Yugoslavia, so we need to make do with those who want to get things done, growing the Core and transforming the region where possible, instead of waiting for perfect answers.

• If it seems like we're making this up as we go along, guess what? That's how it always has been in foreign policy and national security: exploiting victories as they present themselves, likewise adapting to failures as they present themselves.

The larger reality of globalization's embrace of any region is that it tends to break things down to logical constituent parts first, which is why globalization seems so disintegrating as it comes in. When that logical reduction is achieved, you tend to see those same pieces come together in more logically defined and fair-minded economic, social, and political alliances, meaning that integration follows initial disintegration. It is a constant struggle this process, always a precarious balancing between yin and yang.

The reality for Iraq for the foreseeable future may well be: accept the disintegration for now, understanding that a lot of score-settling is inevitable after all those years:

Mr. Hussein, himself a Sunni, heightened ethnic and religious difference by installing Sunnis in the most senior positions and persecuting Shiite Arabs and Kurds. Now, with a power and security vacuum throughout Iraq, those tension are reviving and threatening to unravel the very social fabric of the country.

What does this process say to the rest of the Middle East? Better to reform your oppressive regimes that see similar events happen to you. But is also says, Iraq is the Yugoslavia of the Middle East.

I'm not a casual "Divider," as some may assume, but I do believe in adaptive planning. I believe to don't wait for perfect plans, answers, outcomes, but constantly satisfice. If we're not going to bring in significant New Core help on Iraq (seems unlike with second Bush Admin), then we better be ready to create local ownership of the process, meaning we creating local owners for the Shiite south and Kurdish north.

In the New Core, diversity is often a four-letter word

"Some Hard-Liners in Turkey See Diversity as Divisive" by Susan Sachs, New York Times, 21 November 2004, p. A8.

"Just Another Quick-Witted, Egg-Roll-Joke-Making, Insult-Hurling, Chinese-American Rapper: Jin tries to find his place in the hip-hop nation,", by Ta-Nehisi Coates, New York Times Magazine, 21 November 2004, p. 54.

New Core states typically are not far removed from their moment of achieved national identity, meaning that touchstone point in their history when they felt they had achieved their natural state of affairs/territory/self-definition. This identity achievement is typically what allowed them to get comfortable enough with the outside world so as to open up ("we are confident of who we are, therefore we can handle higher social and economic transaction rates with the rest of the world).

The further India gets away from the separatist experiences that led to the births of Pakistan and Bangladesh, the more confident it becomes. And the closer China gets to reconstituting its historical sense of self (now, only Taiwan remains beyond its acknowledged grasp, the more confident it becomes.

One of the key quid pro quos currently being foisted upon Turkey as it seeks membership in, and connectivity to, the European Union is that Europe is demanding the government there allow for more religious freedom within the country. Turkey has long defined itself as both secular but very clearly Turkish/Islamic. To really belong in Turkey, you had to be Turkish and Muslim. Others were tolerated—just barely.

The fear, of course, was all about minorities whose very existence would be used by outside powers to weaken and divide Turkey. That's because this is exactly what happened to the Ottoman Empire, of which Turkey remains as sort of the rump state, like Serbia is to the former Yugoslavia, and as Sunni-land will someday likely become for the former Iraq. Minorities in Turkey, therefore, as considered a matter of national security, a bad act that America occasionally dips into (like with too many Middle Easterners today, the Japanese in WWII, etc.).

But here's the rule-set reset demanded by Europe: stop treating your state as an ethnic identity marker and start treating it as a geographic administrative concept—meaning the definition of being a Turk needs to expand to basically anyone who lives in Turkey, speaks Turkish, and wants the same rights as anyone of Turkish ethnic descent. In short, the EU is demanding Turkey genericize the concept of being Turkish if it wants to join the EU, because the EU lets in modern states, not immature ethnic nations. If the EU approached it any other way, the dream of a United States of Europe (gee, what a familiar ring) never really takes off, because the USE can only be the USE if its united around the concept of states united, not ethnic ghettos stitched together.

When you get a mature USE, it will most definitely look like a USA, all "profound" economic lifestyle differences aside. You'll see ethnic blending and appropriation that's not seen as stealing, but the highest form of flattery, like a Chinese-American rapper who's just trying to fit into a hip-hop nation of half-breeds and mongrels (God love him).

I'm going home

Dateline: Kansas City International Airport, Kansas City MO, 21 November 2004

If you ever watch "Gods and Generals," there is this fabulous song of that title sung by a woman that is really quite moving. I think of it often while heading to an airport at the beginning of a journey home.

Heading home this morning and feeling very fine about that. I have been gone more than home over the past several weeks and I've begun to really hate it. When I left on Wednesday after only two nights home in a row, my older kids got back from school, called my wife a liar when she told them, and searched the house for me, calling my name.

I have told Vonne that this is my version of deployment, and it's the least I can do when others sacrifice so much more. No, I don't get to spend much time in my "ivory tower," so when I hear that charge, I often wonder if some people would be as vociferous about things if it involved doing anything more than just typing away from their den. My price of being away from home so much is a small price to pay, I believe, in the grand scheme of things, but for obvious reasons my kids don't agree--and I don't blame them. Having spent so many years living in military communities, it's a serious burden I see on a lot of little kids' faces, many of whom I've coached in various sports over the years (to my great delight).

Between now and the end of January, I'm going to be gone only 3 more nights and I am so looking forward to that sort of immobility.

But I do thank people for all the kind emails I get, especially on the road. That sort of stuff really bucks me up and I appreciate it immensely.

Esquire catches up with The Best & Brightest Alumni

Dateline: The Hedenkamp Ranch, north of Kansas City MO, 20 November 2004

Eight hours of serious strategizing with a trio of new friends/colleagues as to what could logically lie ahead--this Future Worth Creating. I haven't had this much self-directed strategizing and goal-oriented navel gazing since I did a week of EST up in the Maine woods following my first-born's long struggle with cancer in the mid-1990s. A truly calibrating experience of the sort I really need right now.

In short, somebody needs to manage this career, and that somebody is me--armed with the right firepower.

The need for such orientation reflects the trajectory of the past three years, which has been intense. 9/11 really perturbed my system from top to bottom, as well it should, given my line of business, but it's also very important to remember who I am amidst all the increased velocity, new connectivity, additional responsibilities.

To that end, it was great to go out to dinner with friends Michael and Janet from Lawrence KS, daughter Arwen in tow. We replicated one of the great memories from our shared trip in China: a fabulous night out with our new babies in Guangzhou at a Vietnamese restaurant. Like all good visits with dear friends, you leave the experience feeling more centered, more aware, more you.

That sense of feeling self-connected is important as you strategize ahead on an individual, familial, and group level. Likewise, it's useful to remember the road traveled. Esquire decided to do the same this issue (December) in its third annual Best & Brightest edition, devoting a two-page "centerfold spread" to a small collection of B&B alumni, to include myself, Jeffrey Sachs, and Craig Newmark (creater of Craig's List).

Here's the intro and the entry on me:

The Best & Brightest: The Alumni

Strategists * dreamers * builders * healers * corporate leaders * seers * world-beaters * public servants * thinkers * writers * actors * artists * inventors * stargazers * watchdogs * citizens. First appearing in these pages in December 2002, the Best and the Brightest continue on their paths of inspiration and accomplishment. Here's what some past honorees have been up to in the last year, and it's nothing short of creating the future.


From obscure Naval War College to strategic rock star, THOMAS P.M. BARNETT catapulted into the limelight after his appearance in Best and Brightest 2002. His March 2003 article for Esquire, "The Pentagon's New Map," outlined his grand strategy for the United States in the post-cold-war era, which, in expanded form, became a New York Times best-seller this spring. And Barnett's blog, thomaspmbarnett.com, is now required reading throughout the political and military establishment. Barnett says, "Up until Best and Brightest, I was slaving away in relative obscurity in the Office of the Secretary of Defense on a proposed grand strategy for the United States in the global war on terrorism." He added that his presentation, although well received in policy circles, "wasn't getting a lot of traction. Now, well . . ." Barnett's work articulates a bracing new vision and lexicon to confront security challenges in our drastically changed world. He now works as the senior concept developer at Joint Forces Comand, advising the four-star general running Special Operations Command and working with other "change agents" within the intelligence community. In the June 2004 issue of Esquire, Barnett wrote a follow-up to "The Pentagon's New Map" titled "Mr. President, Here's How to Make Sense of Our Iraq Strategy."


COMMENTARY: I got the request from Esquire about two months ago to write a couple of paragraphs about what's gone on in my life since December 2002, so that's how they got the basics. The first "quote" up there is either a bit "enhanced" or it comes from someone else. As you can see from the second "I" quotation, I did use the word "obscurity" but , frankly, I would never deign to call myself either "obscure" (trapped in obscurity, yes, but not obscure per se!) and while I've said in the blog that I sometimes have strong responses from audiences that feel like a musical performance, I've never actually called myself a "strategic rock star"--not that I don't like the phrase . . ..

Actually, other people refer to me as a "rock star," and all they really mean by that short hand is that I experience blimpse glimpses of significant fame, like getting in Rolling Stone. My usual reply to such things is, "yeah, riiiiight!--a la Doctor Evil. But then people remind me that I'm the only person they've ever known who's gotten into Rolling Stone or been page-1 profiled in the Wall Street Journal and I step back for a second or two and realize what's the basis of their excitement on my behalf (which is always touching) and think--for another minute or too--"yeah, that is pretty cool." But you can't spend much time thinking about that sort of stuff, otherwise it just becomes consuming, plus it always gets old for me very fast. I have an attention span that's very short on such things, so I enjoy them for a good five minutes or so and then I'm gone.

What's important to me about this remembrance from Esquire is that they consider me one of theirs, not just in terms of the selection as B&B, but as a writer who's penned a couple of pieces and--ta da!--has one in the works. Writing for a magazine like Esquire has been a truly "horizontalling" (yes, I make up words) experience for me, meaning I get to move out of my narrow confines and understand the true possible impact of the ideas, which--in many ways--need to pick up horizontal "speed" if there are going to become real, in a very broadband sense, for U.S. foreign policy as a whole. That's what this whole weekend of strategizing has been about: making the vision less me-centric so as to both enhance its broadband appeal and to--frankly--free me up for what I do best: move on to the next iteration. Esquire really got this ball rolling for me, and for that I am eternally grateful to Andrew Chaikivsky, my friend and compadre Mark Warren, and David Granger. You appreciate people who really believe in your work, especially as you receive plenty of correspondence from those who don't.

Heck, that's why this weekend was so special for me, and that's why this issue of Esquire was so special for me. That makes the 8th time I've been in the pages (B&B issue of Dec 02, PNM article of Mar 03 and two "Sound & Fury" letter issues following, Mr. President article of June 04 and two more letter issues, plus this one). Next month's article will make it nine times, and yes, I am hoping this is still just the beginning of a beautiful relationship between me and the mag.

November 20, 2004

Reviewing the Reviews (Defense and the National Interest)

Dateline: Hedenkamp Ranch, somewhere north of Kansas City, MO, 19 November 2004

Spending some time with friends in KC at the end of my business trip, thinking about the way ahead. Very nice to spend time with people whom I rarely get to see F2F.

Here's a review of PNM that was sent to me by numerous readers over the past few days (thanks to you all). My comments follow, then the daily catch:

Find the original at http://d-n-i.net/dni_reviews/pentagon_map.htm

The Pentagon’s New Map
Thomas P. M. Barnett
426 pp., including extensive notes

Reviewed by Chet Richard
Editor
Defense and the National Interest
November 12, 2004

The late American strategist John R. Boyd noted that “Interaction permits vitality and growth while isolation leads to decay and disintegration.” Boyd worked out an effective strategy for isolating an enemy physically, mentally, and morally in order to produce his disintegration and facilitate his destruction. In his new book, Barnett asks, rhetorically, why are we treating one-third of the world’s population as our enemies?

His solution would also be familiar to Boyd: Start doing whatever it takes to integrate that third of the human population, which he calls the “Non-integrating Gap,” back into the rest of the world, the “Functioning Core.” If this could be done, Barnett claims, the result would be an end to the forces driving global “terrorism,” which would diminish to the nuisance level as just another form of international crime – disturbing, but not threatening the future of Western or any other Core society.

The genius of Barnett’s concept is that it avoids the two major pitfalls that most plans for winning the “global war on terrorism” fall into: Either a reliance on military force as the primary tool, or an appeal to social theories about the causes of “terrorism.” The problem with military force, per se, is that there are few cases short of genocide where an established insurgency was defeated by conventional military force. The problem with the theories is that they are theories, with counterexamples for virtually every one.

Barnett takes a higher level approach, without ruling out any of the others as useful tools. He says, simply, that it’s the system – the world system – that keeps the Gap isolated, and so if we want to make real, lasting, long-term change, we have to change that system. Rather than propose his own utopian scheme, he prescribes “perturbing” the Gap out of its depressingly stable state and then guiding its redevelopment to ensure connectivity and democracy. New social, political, and economic systems will emerge in the different Gap countries, but they will all be guided by the principle of connectivity with the functioning core, to which they will all eventually belong.

As societies of the Gap accept, or are restructured to accept, the “global security rule set” and emerge into the Core, their standards of living will increase dramatically as will their contributions to the economy and quality of life in the rest of the Core countries. Support for “terrorist” organizations will decrease as fewer people will see any point in supporting organizations that are working against their interests and those of their children.

It is a wonderful vision for humanity, at least as seen from the Western world, and if he had just stopped there, there would be little to argue over. But then he wouldn’t have had a very long book.

But he didn't stop there, and embedded within it is a cornucopia of ideas, from recognizing Harry Truman as the architect of victory in the Cold War to schemes for reforming general officer promotions. One stands out from the crowd: the need for an organization other than a traditional military force for the purpose of rebuilding Gap counties and integrating them into the Core. This “systems administrator” (Sys Admin) force is the crucial idea in the book. Without such a force, we might—through massive military effort—perturb a Gap country’s system, but we will have no mechanism to steer it into the Core. We are seeing this in Iraq today where the initial surgery on the country was successful, but both the patient and the surgeon may succumb to the post-operative infection.

Iraq is the most mystifying element of the book and some may use it to attempt to discredit his basic premise. Barnett’s rationale for Iraq, however, actually lies outside the concept of perturbing the Gap. He does make a weak claim that the invasion was a perturbation to force change in the Middle East, but this is belied by the effort extended – enough, but just enough, to take Baghdad and eventually capture Saddam. Certainly not enough effort to guide the transformation of the Middle East.

The problem is that it is not true, as Barnett claims, that “when the United States perturbs the system, we set the conditions under which the new rules emerge.” This is wishful thinking, as shown, ironically, by the example he chooses to illustrate his point—Iraq (the manuscript was completed in the Fall of 2003.) When we perturb the system, we put the country in play with us as one of the players. What happens next depends on how skillfully we play the game. If we act fast and begin the hard work of shaping the new system while the situation is still perturbed, we may stand a chance. This is what the Sys Admin force is supposed to do. Without it, perturbation will be followed by chaos or re-descent into the Gap.

His other, and probably his real explanation for Iraq is that Saddam was bad and so the war was justified. Such an argument is an after the fact case of ends justifying means, offered only when the original justifications – WMDs and the threat of providing them to terrorists – turned out to be what can charitably be called “mistakes.” Considering that we had no Sys Admin force on the books, the results are exactly as he should have predicted, but didn’t. His basic argument – shrink the Gap by means of perturbation exploited by a robust Sys Admin force – is sound.

To get the Sys Admin force into position, Barnett recommends a restructured military, and here he begins to stray from his forte of grand strategy. He has a naïve faith in the efficacy of military force. Ours in particular will always win, and win quickly, through an application of maneuver warfare and high technology. “We no longer,” he proclaims, “need strategic surprise to defeat a well-armed enemy.” Well, maybe, but such a claim would carry more weight if it were based on something other than the 2003 invasion of Iraq. We didn’t do that terribly well in Vietnam, as I recall. It also fails to give future opponents any credit for being able to watch and learn.

His intervention force, “Leviathan,” contains smaller editions of the four services, but employing hardware even more top-of-the-line than DoD is buying today, “the few and the expensive.” Given the nature of Defense R&D and procurement, the “few and expensive” will become the “few and very expensive,” and one can only envision the debates in Congress over a $400 million F-22. A more practical idea might be to realign the Cold War era force structure into something else, simplified and streamlined to form the point of the spear that Barnett envisions (I made a few modest proposals in A Swift, Elusive Sword).

He assumes that once we’re in, the locals will recognize that they have lost and give up. He makes the curious claim that “we know our enemies cannot defeat us in extended conflicts,” even though history has shown that protracted war is exactly where we are most vulnerable. This view of war better describes the Third Generation (to his credit, to be sure, given the Second Generation nature of much of our force), but he has no vision of Fourth Generation Warfare (4GW.) In 4GW, the defeat of a state army by an invading 3GW force is prologue to the main act. Other entities – tribes, cartels, nations without states (e.g., the Kurds), and transnational ideological and religious groups (e.g., al-Qa’ida) – are now waging war, and as we have seen in Iraq, they can pick up where the state leaves off. And they can keep it up for a very long time. All the high tech whiz bang $400 million fighters are useless in such a struggle because they won’t have targets to shoot at, and what they do hit will provide new recruits for the opposition. What will prove useful is a massive Sys Admin force on the ground, which of course is what we don’t have in Iraq.

A few minor points. Barnett informs us on at least four occasions that he is Catholic. Does this mean that his arguments don’t apply if the reader is Baptist? He tells us that the crucifixion and resurrection of Jesus is a historical fact (p. 262), which is contrary to the Quran and so is not accepted by the world’s billion or so Muslims nor for that matter by the 5/6 of the world that is not Christian. Does this invalidate his arguments for those people? Or does Barnett have something else in mind? In the midst of displaying his religion on his sleeve, he proclaims that the US has a mission to transform the Middle East. Into what? Inhabitants of the Gap might logically suspect, “Christianity and Western morality!” not really democracy and the Internet.

And then there’s that map. It needs to go. In addition to placing virtually the entire Muslim world prominently into the Gap, the Pentagon’s new “expeditionary theater,” as he calls it, it is also wrong. Israel and Dubai, for example, are in the Gap, while North Korea lies in the Functioning Core. Hello? His explanation is that he wanted to make the map simple to draw.

My recommendations:

There is a lot in this book not to like. At 426 pages, it seems long, maybe because Barnett regales us with story after story about his glorious career as a Pentagon briefer and how he charms skeptics around the globe. The tone can turn priggish and sometimes even arrogant. “I see the future worth creating and I choose to embrace it.” he announces at one point. Osama bin Laden could make the same statement—such moral certitude makes it difficult for the rest of the Core to trust that we will use our power wisely, an essential condition for success as Barnett notes many times. And his attempt to retrofit Iraq into his scheme, when it is more properly seen as verification of what happens when we do not operate according to his paradigm, may lead many to write him off as garden variety neocon.

You can, however, ignore his endorsements of both himself and of Iraq, or not, as you wish and disagree with every one of his conclusions about the composition of the Leviathan intervention force and still stand in awe of the power of his fundamental thesis: Perturb and integrate the Gap. This is the first work since Boyd to offer a coherent vision for action from national goal to grand strategy and down to strategy, operations, and even tactics. It is breathtaking in scope and in hope for the human race. If there is a significant shortcoming in the book, it may be that Barnett is seriously underestimating the effort needed to perturb a system as large as a country, much less the entire Gap. As he notes, “For a System Perturbation to be triggered, peoples' worlds need to seem turned upside down.” Remember, we're talking some two billion people whose worlds need to be upended. The real work of this perturbation is not done by the military component, the Leviathan Force, but by the System Administrators. Leviathan just puts Sys Admin in position to get started. So how big should the Sys Admin force be?

If there are indeed two billion people in the Gap, one could envision the need for an international Core Sys Admin force of some 20 million members [applying Shinseki's ratio, which in light of recent events may be conservative] trained and funded to take control of failed societies and rebuild them not as Western, Christian democracies but as connecting members of the World Core in all its myriad forms, each respecting all the others as long as they continue to connect. Although a force this size may seem impractical, it is only marginally more than the 16 million Americans who served in WW II. The entire modern Core holds around 4 billion people, and eliminating the Gap is the most critical factor in their, that is, our continued well being and perhaps of our continuing to exist at all.

COMMENTARY: I don't know where to go with this review. I guess I have to put it down as one of those Chinese reviews where you're "70 percent great and 30 percent horrible." Richards gets the main point of the book so well (in some ways, better than I do—meaning I learned some interesting things about my own book by reading his description), and then offers some truly lame criticism of the sort that just makes my jaw drop (e.g., map isn't perfect so it "must go," I mention my faith and therefore I zero out all my logic to anyone who's not Catholic, and then this bizarrely literal interpretation of troop levels for the SysAdmin). I mean, how can you buy the main thesis so well and then carp so loudly on the map, which is just a visual representation? As for the religion angle, that's just goofy. I read people of all faiths all the time, and I always appreciate hearing their expressions of that faith, not feeling myself automatically excluded from understanding their thinking simply because of that distinction. As for the 20 million calculation, that's just sophomoric. What's so weird about these weird criticisms is the otherwise highly sophisticated capture of the whole Core-Gap and SysAdmin arguments. I guess this is what you'd call a Jeckyl and Hyde review: brilliant one minute and oddly stupid the next. Then again, I guess that's how he views PNM, so perhaps turnabout is fair play.

For an additional bit of analysis on Richard's "20 million" force argument, click here for a later post.

Here's today's catch based on papers I could grab at the airport:

And then there was two . . .

UNSC gets up close and personal on Sudan

Just when you thought there was no more good/depressing news on Iraq/Afghanistan

A trademark worth infringing


And then there was two . . .

"Bush Confronts New Challenge On Issue of Iran: Ominous Disclosures on a Nuclear Program," by Steven R. Weisman, , 19 November 2004, p. A1.

"Powell Presses for Nuclear Talks With North Korea," by Steven R. Weisman, New York Times, 19 November 2004, p. A10.

Here's where the lack of competing outlooks within the second Bush Administration may get dangerous. Are we so locked in on Iran that we can't imagine any possibility other than going to the mattresses? The mullahs aren't dropping any time soon, and no amount of huffing and puffing is going to blow their house down. We go all the way on Iran during this term and who exactly is going to be with us on that one? We've got no local ownership on the situation in Iraq and we're losing our out-of-area friends on the subject. Eventually, somebody other than the House of Saud has to become part of our imagined solution set in the Middle East.

"You can't call yourself a revolutionary regime and also negotiate with the Great Satan," said an administration official.

Yes, exactly. So which part is more distasteful and which part is more desired: holding our nose for the negotiations or ending Iran's claim to being a revolutionary regime?

Think about that one.

Meanwhile, out in Asia there may be a truly wobbly regime (where are all those official portraits going?) surrounded by a load of countries that either are already our friends or should logically be our friends. What's our answer there?

Explain the logic to me on this one …

UNSC gets up close and personal on Sudan

"U.N. Council, in Nairobi, Again Warns Sudan: Bringing diplomacy closer doesn't always make it more effective," by Marc Lacey, New York Times, 19 November 2004, p. A6.

The UN Security Council hits the road and has a meeting right next door to Sudan in Kenya. Ooooh, that is impressive!

The result? Same toothless declaration specifying unspecified actions against those who do not cease and desist in Darfur.

As always, the UN is right on top of things, administering the global security system.

Just when you thought there was no more good/depressing news on Iraq/Afghanistan

"A Bit of Wall St. on the Tigris: Iraq Stock Exchange Isn't Waiting for the War to End," by Don Kirk, New York Times, 19 November 2004, p. W1.

"Afghan Poppy Growing Reaches Record Level, U.N. Says," by Carlotta Gall, New York Times, 19 November 2004, p. A3.

Neat story about the small-but-still humming stock exchange in Baghdad. Focus for now is on banks (no surprise there), but the amount of money changing hands each day is minor ($2m or so) in an Iraqi economy of roughly $25B/year. Of course, that economy is overwhelmingly based on oil right now, but having a stock exchange is all about trying to change that. What's missing in the equation? Traders give the obvious answer: foreign investments. Why? Lack of security—plain and simple.

But at least Iraq has somebody dreaming about a better future. All Afghanistan has is a near record heroin crop. Guess what that gets you? A countryside where drug lords rule and farmers do as they're told. When you don't make the SysAdmin effort in Afghanistan, toppling the terrorist regime gets you the makings of a narco-state. When that happens, all the "savings" from your transformed Leviathan's victory are essentially dissipated, setting you up for another drive-by regime change down the road.

A trademark worth infringing

"W.T.O. Said to Weigh In on Product Names," by Paul Meller, New York Times, 19 November 2004, p. W1.

Interesting article on how WTO has to work through issues with companies that share very similar names but want to operate in each other’s traditional markets.

Why of interest to me?

A while back I seek trademark protection for the phrase, “A Future Worth Creating.”

Yesterday I get a letter from a Hawaii attorney representing a Everett W. James, who markets Neuro Linguistic Programming under the trademark, “Creating your future.” What’s NLP? Basically subliminal therapy. The letter is your basic “back off buddy!”

Is my phrase close enough? At least you might have an argument there, but it’s a weak one, grammatically speaking.

How about the second big test for trademark protection: that I might steal some of this guy’s business?

Hmmm. Let’s say I’m the government of India and I want to contract Thomas Barnett’s consulting company for global strategic thinking.

Oh . . . what the hell! How about some self-help tapes instead!

[cut to the PM of India lying in bed with headphones on]

“I’m big enough militarily, and I’m smart enough in information technology and . . . damn it! Great powers like me!”

Thing is, this guy’s claim covers books as well. Sounds like a job for G.P. Putnam . . . and Sons!

November 19, 2004

Tom Slear's "A Future Worth Creating" profile in MS&T magazine

Dateline: Kansas City International Airport Hilton, Kansas City MO, 18 November 2004

Spoke this morning at TRADOC's Analysis Center, aka TRAC. TRADOC is the Army's famous Training and Doctrine Command at Fort Leavenworth in Leavenworth KS (also the site of the infamous military penitentiary). Got there a tad late (map they sent me was . . . hmmm . . . not so good), and so I got a bit lost in the rather rural countryside around Leavenworth (pretty, but not much to steer by, except the always pretty Missouri River). Spoke for two hours and did 15 minutes of Q&A. Nice facility and interesting to present to such a Army-dominated crowd (don't think I saw any other service represented). Audience seemed very appreciative in the end, and I had a nice personal conversation with young officer gearing up for adoption trip to China following my talk. Got a nice TRAC medallion from director as thanks. This one I plan on making sure I get back to my office, unlike the trio I lost from the AFCEA conference (nifty Intelligence Community medallion) and the two I lost from Montgomery AL (Air War College and Air Command Staff College). I'm still so pissed about that, that I may go ahead and buy them myself at Pentagon next time I'm in town.

Then later today I gave the talk at the University of Saint Mary, as described in the previous posting from the Kansas City Star. Good audience there and better-than average-Q&A, which I always appreciate. Also fun was simply having a couple of friends from our August China trip in the audience—Janet and Michael Fitzgerald of Kansas.

Here's the text from Tom Slear's profile of me ("A Future Worth Creating"—just so happens to be the working title of my next book with Putnam, slated for the fall of '05) that appears in the current issue of MS&T, which stands for Military Simulation and Training. Why write about me in such a journal? I don't know. My commentary follows the text. After that is today's catch.

A Future Worth Creating

Trouncing the enemy is fine—But what about winning the peace? Tom Slear attended a brief by the US Naval War College's Thomas Barnett to explain how the new world order will affect military operations—and training

It's hard not to listen to this guy. Harder still not to like him. Anybody within America's defense establishment who writes nearly every Pentagon and CIA projection about future threats has come to the same distressing and unhelpful conclusion—since anything is possible, eventually everything will happen—can't be all bad.

Anyone who lands a roundhouse punch on Congress by pointing out the political pattern of one moment highlighting the dangerous and unpredictable world that we live in and the next moment belittling on C-SPAN the intelligence community for failing to predict 9/11, tells you he's willing to color outside the lines.

"Who are these people kidding?" he writes.

And anyone who can take the big leap, one so large and perilous that no one else dare even approach the edge, has to earn your respect.

"To me, 9/11 was an amazing gift," Thomas Barnett wrote in The Pentagon's New Map (G.P. Putnam's Sons, 2004), "as twisted and cruel as that sounds."

Barnett is a cross between Albert Einstein and Jay Leno. He's theoretical almost to a fault, but at the same time humorous and engaging. You like what he says almost as much for the way he says it as for what he says. But there's substance to the new world order that Barnett, a professor at the U.S. Naval War College in Newport, Rhode Island, is espousing. His book connects the dots between the disparate terrorist events of the last several years, and his conclusions have profound implications for military trainers.

RULE SETS

It's July in Rosslyn, Virginia. The weather is unseasonably cool. Barnett is speaking to a small group of military strategists in a room just across the Potomac River from the nation's capital. Admittance to the room is controlled by magnetic lock. The listeners are typical of those who comprise the bulk of the think tanks that author America's military strategies—early forties, relatively low in rank (colonel and lieutenant colonel), motivated, and incredibly fit.

Barnett has never served a day in the military. He has made a career of evaluating soldiers and general from the sidelines. His speaking style is flippant and sarcastic, conveying hints of intellectual snobbery. A safe bet would have been that Barnett and his audience would have mixed about as well as a vegan and a meat processor.

In fact, the audience is engaged almost from the start. Barnett builds a case for his view of the world military situation by logical point. It's all about rule sets, he says. After World War II, the rule sets were established by the bleak reality of a two-superpower world—both armed to the teeth with nuclear weapons. If one stepped too far out of line, the other would start firing and we all would be introduced to the Stone Age. The doctrine was dubbed mutually assured destruction.

While Barnett laughs at the name, he applauds the approach. Simply stated, it worked. Governments had fixed parameters within which to operate, the overriding one of which was that the United States and Russia could never fight each other directly. That outcome was too horrible to contemplate. Consequently, the Korean War stayed in Korea, the Cuban Missile Crisis prompted the Soviet Union to meekly back down, and the Cold War never went hot.

For sure, the two countries engaged each other through proxies at the fringes, but both sides knew the limits. They didn't dare put their finger near the button.

For the United States and the rest of the free world, mutually assured destruction brought about a strategy of containment. Russia and communism would be contained rather than confronted. While it worked for 50 years, Barnett worries that it might hang around for another 50 with the U.S. military steadfastly clinging to the mindset of fighting the big one—tanks against tanks on the plains of Germany. Even today, Barnett said, the strategists in the Pentagon long for a Russian surrogate, an enemy to justify tank-heavy formations loaded with firepower. When none surfaced after the fall of the Berlin Wall in 1989, one was created. First it was China. When that didn't suffice, the notion of fighting two wars at once came to the forefront—something akin to half of Russian one place (Iraq, perhaps) and the other half some place else (North Korea).

The benefit from all of this single-minded focus was that the American military became invincible, at least in the traditional sense. When it comes to set-piece battles fought between nation-states, America owns the franchise.

"All of this disappeared with 9/11," Barnett said to an agreeable audience. Question is, what type of mind-set will fill the void?

CONNECTED vs. DISCONNECTED

At this point Barnett was only too happy to offer his theory. His presentation was polished, using well crafted slides and accompanied by phrases perfected over the course of many similar briefings. Barnett has been a hot commodity since his book hit the streets early this year. However, his popularity has also brought a considerable amount of consternation. The U.S. military might be technologically advanced, yet it handles change no better than any other Washington bureaucracy. What Barnett proposes means change on an enormous scale. He envisions a military that can win the war and the peace, one that efficiently takes care of the business of killing the enemy and another one that effectively rebuilds the society of the conquered. The victor doesn't have to return, because it never really leaves. The nation-builders stay for the long haul.

Barnett's proposal flows from his view of the world—his rule set, if you will. The fault line is now between connected and disconnected countries, much as it was between communist and non-communist countries during the Cold War. The connected countries, as the name implies, benefit greatly from globalization and have an abiding interest in seeing it spread and prosper. These countries also tend to foster open societies with sophisticated legal systems and democratic governments. The core members of this group make up what Barnett called the "functioning area" of the world—United States, Europe, Japan, Australia.

The non-functioning group, the globalization black hole, includes Africa, the Middle East and the northern part of South America. Countries within these areas have little interaction with the rest of the world and are content to keep it that way. Governments restrict trade and the information flow. To open their borders would mean calls for accountability and, God forbid, democracy.

When it comes to military matters, the countries in the functioning area have an established rule set. They won't fight each other because there is no value to it.

"The struggle is now between the core globalization countries and the gap globalization countries," Barnett said. "What do the gap countries get us? Pandemics, drugs, and terrorism."

At this point, most of the members of the audience shift uneasily in their chairs. They have heard black-and-white-scenarios before. In fact, Barnett is proposing the same simplistic view that he deplored in the 1980s and 1990s. Substitute Russia and its satellite countries for gap countries and Barnett could be speaking in 1975. But then Barnett inserts his caveat. Gap countries don't fight like nation states of old. In fact, they don't fight at all. Rather, it's the groups within these countries that bring about the mayhem.

The world is "suffering a significant amount of sub-national violence," he wrote in The Pentagon's New Map, "overwhelmingly concentrated in the states with the least connectivity to the globalization process."

No doubt the connected world's firepower can overwhelm its adversaries in the disconnected world, but then what? What will be left behind? Most likely an impoverished country that will breed not connectivity, but violence and terrorism. As America has discovered in Iraq, countries conquered geographically are a long way from being conquered philosophically. In fact, the former takes much less time and resources than the latter. Nevertheless, as Barnett pointed out to the agreement of his audience, the American military is organized just the opposite, with a force equipped to trounce an enemy with little left over to rebuild what's left behind. Barnett's concern is summarized neatly by an e-mail he received from an officer who served in Iraq with a construction battalion. He claimed he was doing more shooting that building.

SORE TEETH

To deal with this new reality, Barnett foresees a military organized with a Leviathan fighting force and a system administrator rebuilding force. The former will do the fighting and the latter will do the stabilizing.

Barnett's audience nodded politely. Counterinsurgency and peacekeeping is to the American military what sore teeth are to each one of us—the more we touch them, the more they hurt. As Barnett himself admitted, "For years we in DoD said, 'We don't do operations other than war. We only kill people. We don't do follow-up. We go in with an exit strategy.' The problem, of course, is when we have a situation like we have in Iraq. What do we do when no exit strategy exists? If we leave, the situation will be worse than if we hadn't gone in at all."

The Leviathan force would be light, stealthy, and above all, fast. It would consist of submarines, bombers, jet fighters, and special operations forces. Its members would be straight off recruiting posters, or as Barnett says, "young, unmarried, and more than a little pissed off."

The system administrator force would use the Marine Corps as protection (that will go down with great difficulty) and make use of more senior members of the military as well as officials from State, Justice and Commerce departments as well as agencies such as the U.S. Agency for International Development. Whereas the Leviathan force's stay will be intense and relatively short, the system administrators will be in for the long haul. Their mission will be to bring the militarily conquered nation into the connected world.

Five years ago, Barnett would have been shown the door at any gathering of U.S. military officers. 9/11 and more particularly, Iraq, has changed the reception nearly 180 degrees. The Powell doctrine of public support, overwhelming force, and a quick exit doesn't seem to apply in a world where suicide bombers and tape recorded beheadings are every bit as effective as tanks and jet fighters.

Barnett believes his idea will gain traction if for no other reason than financial. As he travels the world explaining his theories (Norway, the Netherlands this fall; China earlier this year), the feedback indicates that many countries want to play a part in spreading globalization, but they don't have the money or the inclination to maintain a Leviathan force. They see their role as system administrators. The Leviathan force will be almost exclusively the domain of the United States.

"America will export security," Barnett said. "We always have, but it will become more pronounced."

The problems with Barnett's view are both political and technical. Rebuilding countries expends the patience of democracies, particularly when the commitment is long and the friendly casualties accrue.

ORDERS OF MAGNITUDE MORE DIFFICULT

But system administration also means a revolution in training. Just as combat forces have devised sophisticated ways to replicate battlefields, particularly with the help of simulation, along comes a whole new way of operating that does not lend itself to firing ranges and flight simulators. Some would argue that the American army has kept counterinsurgency and nation building at arm's length because neither offers a training scenario. In this regard, it's not the lingering mind-set of the Cold War that's the problem, but the bitter memories of Vietnam.

When first asked about training, even Barnett himself was brought up short. The question had never been raised, he said. He then offered some notions off the top of his head, such as massive, multiplayer, on-line gaming.

For sure, Barnett is on to something. The militaries of the connected world will certainly embark on as much building as destroying in the coming years. The conflicts in Iraq and Afghanistan have demonstrated how interwoven the two are.

The question is: Will training keep up with this new challenge? When I visited Fort Knox, the American Army's armor center, two years ago, I heard repeatedly that training had become so advanced that it had evolved into combat without the casualties. Reaching that level of fidelity with system administration will be just as necessary . . .and orders of magnitude more difficult.

Editor's note: Find out more about Thomas Barnett and The Pentagon's New Map at http://www.thomaspmbarnett.com/

COMMENTARY: Very briefly, I think Slear does a better job than anybody to date capturing the sense of what it's like to be briefed by me. He also does a good job of describing my fine line between being overbearing and just engaging enough. Does he go too far in making me seem the anti-military stereotype? Sure, but that's just the tendency to confuse the actor with the act. Since he doesn't know me personally, he goes off the briefing completely. And there, his tendency to sort of get his quotes right is a bit annoying, but that's the price I pay for my high bit-rate of transmission. Overall, I'm very happy with this piece and think Slear did a great job, even as I don't like or agree with everything he said. In reality, I get along with military folks far better than he imagines. I and my family have lived and worked among military families for 15 years. To be honest, I like them better than the local civilians—by a ways.

One final point: the picture of me talking in front of military officers is not from the July brief that Slear attended. I can tell because I'm wearing the tweed jacket that I wore for my author's photo (the same one that found it's way into the Wall Street Journal's dimpled image of me that's all over this site). I junked all my old suits when I got the check from my second Esquire, as my wife told me to update my wardrobe or else. The picture was actually taken in the spring during a student conference here at the Naval War College. The public affairs people just shot a bunch of pictures of me to have in advance so that when the press asked for them, they'd have some good ones.

Here's today's mishmash catch from USA Today (I am in lost in the Red portion of the country, mind you) and other sources:

TM Lutas' more sophisticate take on the GIG as a cornerstone for the SysAdmin force

Anthony Cordesman's deconstruction of the destruction of Falluja

Highlights from DoE's annual World Energy Outlook 2004

Scary nucular happenings (Oops, I did it again!)

Goss to CIA: Get your asses into the Gap!

Europe foresees a SysAdmin force of its own

TM Lutas' more sophisticated take on the GIG as a cornerstone for the SysAdmin force

"Battlefield 'Net X," by TM Lutas, as blogger Flit(tm), 18 November 2004, http://www.snappingturtle.net/jmc/tmblog/archives/004995.html.

I cross-post TM Lutas on the same story I did yesterday regarding the Global Information Grid, or GIG. Here's his take, which I like a lot:

The Pentagon is planning to create own kind of Internet 2, a battlefield network capable of seeing everything, knowing everything. Now I can see a practical reason for the Army's insistence on IPv6 starting in 2009. IPv6 is a new addressing system that has the address space needed to handle all those new network nodes this new military net will have.

This isn't just of interest to the military but will likely drive the entire civilian worldwide Internet to convert over to IPv6. Even if this new milnet is hermetically sealed away from the Internet, the Army has made it clear that it wants to contract with ISPs who provide IPv6 and those ISPs will, in turn, have that service for their civilian clients as well.

But contrary to the warfighting concentration (to the point of exclusivity) in the NYT article, this will be revolutionary for nation building/peacekeeping as well. Crack off a segment of addresses, create a DMZ zone and you end up with the network backbone for a civilian networking infrastructure. Add language appropriate simputers and you're in Sys admin heaven.

You want to change people's psychological connectivity with the world? Give them an instrument that gives them vital information like how to get a job, where to get food or medical aid, curfew rules so they won't get shot, and alongside that education in how to become a free citizen and not a subject, ways to register their needs and wants and structural aids in how to organize to get them, connectivity to military intelligence, news from around the world, the possibilities are broad and far ranging.

By the time that the GIG starts rolling out, chances are that simputers will have both significantly advanced in capability (they're currently being built on top of a 206Mhz ARM chip running GNU/Linux) and drop in price. You can get 1 unit at retail for $240. No doubt bulk purchase gets you a better price though a solar charger (4.5 volts) and wireless net connector drive costs right back up. If 5 years from now the platform can handle voice, we've got a real winner.

HT: Thomas PM Barnett:: Weblog

Posted by TMLutas at November 18, 2004 12:59 PM | TrackBack

As I wrote back to TM in an email, I have told IT audiences for a while now that there's even more spin-offs and commercial money to be made in SysAdmin work than in Leviathan stuff. SysAdmin work allows IT companies to get back into driver's seat with regard to technology transfer. It puts the Pentagon back in the business of leading technologies.

Anthony Cordesman's deconstruction of the destruction of Falluja

"Winning or Losing the Sunnis: Fallujah and Its Aftermath Are No Tipping Point and Don't Break the Insurgent's Back," by Anthony H. Cordesman, email to listserv, 18 November 2004, 1900 words approx..

Cordesman's as good as ever on this piece. Here's the key bits:

It is far from clear what the US “victory” in Fallujah really means in a military, political, and economic sense. There are, however, good reasons to question whether the tactical victory will have a positive strategic effect …

In military terms, there seem to have been some 2,000-3,500 dedicated insurgents in Fallujah before the US campaign began and preliminary interrogations of detainees indicate that some 95% of them were Iraqi Sunnis. US spokesmen has since claimed over 1,000 casualties and equally large numbers of detainees - with some estimates of casualties going as high as 1,500-2,000- but all such casualty data are a pure guesstimate and many of the detainees seem to be local recruits rather than hard core insurgents.

Most reports indicate that large numbers of insurgents left Fallujah before the fighting, and significant numbers escaped …

As a rough guess, however, it seems unlikely that the killed and detainees made up more than 10% of the hard core insurgents, and that the attack did not kill or capture large numbers of key leadership cadres -- although some do seem to have been affected.

The US has recently talked about a total of some 12,000-16,000 core insurgents, but has never defined what this means . . .

As of the summer, some 75-85% of all Iraqis indicated they distrusted Coalition forces. In short, the Sunni insurgents had a very large recruiting base before Fallujah, and it is likely to be much larger now. Experienced cadres can draw on this for high-risk action, saving themselves to maintain the overall level of activity …

It is scarcely surprising, therefore, that Sunni insurgents were able to react to the US attack on Fallujah with a wave of attacks and incidents throughout Iraq. These attacks were particularly effective in Mosul, but hit Baghdad and virtually every city that is largely Sunni Arab …

This scarcely makes the Coalition victory in Fallujah unimportant, but it does clearly show that it is part of a campaign that has only begun …

Iraq also presents the unique problem that insurgents already have massive stockpiles of arms and weapons, and seem to have more than adequate funds. They do not need major outside support or volunteers, and it is unclear that they need sanctuaries or fixed bases to maintain a high level of activity, recruiting, and training …

Insurgent HUMINT is excellent and US forces, Iraqi forces, and Iraqi government areas are heavily penetrated by insurgent sympathizers who have shown over the last few months that they provide excellent tactical intelligence …

It seems unlikely that the Sunni insurgents will ever be able to directly challenge Coalition forces in military terms, but they also have only limited incentive to do so …

The political problem is complex. There has never been a meaningful ethnic census in Iraq, and the estimates that Arab Sunnis make up 20% of the population versus 60% for Arab Shi'ites are guesstimates that also are decades old. It does seem likely, however, that there are over 5 million Sunnis in Iraq. Most do not live in Al Anbar or any part of the so-called Sunni triangle, and live in Baghdad, Mosul, and other cities. They may be angry at the US, but anger does not mean they are opposed to the Interim Iraqi Government or will not participate in the coming series of elections if they feel they can benefit.

The Arab Sunnis are scarcely monolithic. Many are intermarried with Shi'ites, most did not benefit under the Ba'ath and Saddam, and many think if themselves in terms of family, tribe, and nation - not religion …

There as yet have been no reliable public opinion surveys that can show how serious Fallujah was in alienating Sunnis in given areas, but it seems likely that it has had a serious impact …

So far, therefore, Fallujah has been a political victory for the insurgents. It has further polarized the Arab Sunnis, weakened Sunni participation in the interim government, and raised more questions about the independence and legitimacy of the Allawi government …

Initial anger fades, and Sunnis may come to see participation in the elections as a better alternative that open ended insurgency and the creation of a Shi'ite-Kurdish government. As long as Al Sadr and any other Shi'ite groups do not join the insurgency, it is at least possible that the Sunnis may see an “endless insurgency” and sacrifice as the worst alternative …

The broader question is also whether any credible amount of aid can deal with the economic problems the Sunnis face in time to be politically effective; whether the Iraqi government has the number of trained and competent people to secure Sunni areas and govern effectively, and whether the Sunnis will be grateful given the damage done in Fallujah, the ongoing clashes with US forces, and the fact that no government can credibly promise to given the Sunni elite the same privileges it had under Saddam Hussein …

Pretty sage analysis, methinks. I don't see anything here that stops me from saying what I wrote for the February issue of Esquire, as much as that piece may end up pissing off an even larger portion of the Pentagon than I usually do.

Can't say anything more, or Mark Warren's promised to kick my ass.

God, it's so demeaning to be a pawn of the gigantic Hearst corporation!

Highlights from DoE's annual World Energy Outlook 2004

"Executive Summary," by , World Energy Outlook 2004, Department of Energy, available online at http://www.worldenergyoutlook.org/.

Here are the main points as presented:

The Earth's energy resources are more than adequate to meet demand until 2030 and well beyond. Less certain is how much it will cost to extract them and deliver them to consumers …

But serious concerns about energy security emerge from the market trends projected here. The world's vulnerability to supply disruptions will increase as international trade expands . . .

A central message of this Outlook is that short-term risks to energy security will grow . . .

Converting the world's resources into available supplies will require massive investments. In some cases, financing for new infrastructure will be hard to come by. Meeting projected demand will entail cumulative investment of some $16 trillion from 2003 to 2030, or $568 billion per hear. The electricity sector will absorb the majority of this investment. Developing countries, where production and demand are set to increase most, will require about half of global energy investment . . .

Reducing energy poverty is an urgent necessity . . . Developing countries are unlke to see their incomes and living standards increase without improved access to modern energy services . . .

It is clear from our analysis that achieving a truly sustainable energy system will call for technological breakthrough that radically alter how we produce and use energy . . .

Analysis such as this is why I always say that energy starts everything in terms of both security and development. For any of you who've forgotten, here's my "10 Commandments" of globalization, or what I often refer to as the Military-Market Nexus:

1. Look for resources and ye shall find, but …

2. No stability, no markets

3. No growth, no stability

4. No resources, no growth

5. No infrastructure, no resources

6. No money, no infrastructure

7. No rules, no money

8. No security, no rules

9. No Leviathan, no security

10. No will, no Leviathan.

Again, it all starts with energy in something akin to Maslow's hierarchy of needs. You wanna shrink the Gap? Then you have to account for energy security first and foremost. What about food security? Frankly, in its that Decalogue if you look closely enough.

If you read only one government report every year, this is the one to read. It's that good and that important. Read it and the world's events will become a whole lot clearer to you. Plus, you'll never swallow Michael Moore's comically myopic bullshit ever again.

Scary nucular happenings (Oops, I did it again!)

"Iran looking to build usuable nuclear weapons, Powell says," by "wire services," USA Today, 18 November 2004, p. 14A.

"Russia claims advances in nuclear arms," by Smita P. Nordwall," USA Today, 18 November 2004, p. 14A.

Can't resist misspelling nuclear. After all, it’s the goal of the blogger to write as he speaks, and as viewers and listeners the world over remind me, I constantly mispronounce that word!

First off, on the way out the door, Colin Powell admits that he believes Iran is well on their way to weaponizing nuclear bombs via missiles. As many have suspected, the warhead design probably came to Tehran via Pakistan. What Powell seemed to be saying was that Tehran apparently is making that design work with its existing missiles, which would suggest that Iran basically has all the pieces in place to unveil their counter to Israel long-held nuclear monopoly in the region.

Some see great danger in this. I see a strategic opportunity.

As for Putin's claim that Russia has developed some fab new nuclear weapon technology. Don't be surprised if it's not that fab but simply Russia reminding the world that it still matters in terms of defense technology. Having a technology is one thing, weaponizing it and manufacturing it and testing it and fielding it and maintaining it and working in into your defense doctrine and training your troops to employ it and . . . are all other things.

Goss to CIA: Get your asses into the Gap!

"CIA plans riskier, more aggressive espionage: Campaign would send undercover officers to get 'close-in access' to hostile groups, nations," by John Diamond, USA Today, 18 November 2004, p. 8A.

Porter Goss intends to jumpstart the CIA humint capabilities, reorienting them radically from the Core, where they tended to operate under "flimsy cover as diplomats in U.S. embassies" to effective undercover cops working the giant nasty precinct that is the Gap by infiltrating terror networks and rogue regimes. Why riskier approach? That's how you access the bad guys where the U.S. doesn't have embassies—and that's exclusively inside the Gap (and outlier North Korea).

In short, Goss "wants to train and field more officers as 'NOCs'—meaning they would work under 'non-official cover' to give them more options for penetrating an adversary," but of course, when they get caught, they won't be tossed out of the country as some persona non grata—they be killed.

Seem radical? Seems about right if we're going to get serious about infiltrating the truly dark spots inside the Gap.

Europe foresees a SysAdmin force of its own

"A Human Security Doctrine for Europe," by Study Group on Europe's Security Capabilities, , 18 November 2004, found at http://www.lse.ac.uk/Depts/global/Human%20Security%20Report%20Full.pdf.

Alerted by a reader to this interesting report by the Study Group on Europe's Security Capabilities called, "A Human Security Doctrine for Europe." It was presented to the EU's High Representative for Common Foreign and Security Policy, Javier Solana.

The report consists of three elements: 1) principles for operations in support of human security around the world (although all the examples cited are inside the Gap); 2) a description of a Human Security Response Force; and 3) enunciation of a new legal rule set on how this force will be deployed.

The seven guiding principles are: the primacy of human rights, clear political authority, multilateralism, a bottom-up approach, regional focus, the use of legal instruments, and appropriate use of force. All pretty standard in that Mom and apple pie sort of way (as opposed to the degradation of human rights, muddled political authority, etc.).

The description of the force is more interesting:

… a 'Human Security Response Force,' comprised of 15,000 men and women, of whome at least one-third would be civilian (police, human rights monitors, development and humanitarian specialists, administrators, etc.). The Force would be drawn from dedicated troops and civilian capabilities already made available by member states as well as a proposed 'Human Security Volunterr Force.'
Do ya think Europe's ready to sign up for the SysAdmin force?

November 18, 2004

Speaking tonight in Leavenworth KS (open to the public)

Dateline: Kansas City International Airport Hilton, Kansas City MO, 18 November 2004

Thanks to local friend and weekend host Steffany Hedenkamp, I went on KBMZ News Radio this morning at 0640 for a 7-minute interview. She set that up to plug a local public brief I'll give tonight at the University of Saint Mary, in addition to the official brief I'll give at Fort Leavenworth to an Army school.

Here's the coverage in the local press (Kansas City Star) based on a phone interview I gave yesterday before flying out of Providence.

Posted on Thu, Nov. 18, 2004

Naval War College professor to speak

Thomas P.M. Barnett describes the world in two parts.

The professor at the Naval War College sees global “core” countries — the United States, Europe, India, China — as too entwined economically to fight each other. He visualizes “gap” countries — much of Latin America, sub-Saharan Africa, Central Asia, the Middle East — as disconnected from the rest of the world either culturally or economically.

That isolation, he argues, poses an ongoing threat to the rest of the world.

He supported the invasion of Iraq, less because he believed that Saddam Hussein posed a pressing threat to America, and more because he thinks a success there will start a shift of the Middle East from a nondemocratic and dangerous gap region to an area integrated into the modern global core.

Yet Barnett sees the Pentagon's cultural reluctance to prepare for post-combat missions as severely complicating the task.

In his new book, The Pentagon's New Map: War and Peace in the Twenty-First Century, he explores diplomatic and military challenges.

This week he answered a few questions for The Star's national correspondent Scott Canon:

You've been an advocate of the so-called military transformation pushed by Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld that calls for a smaller and fleeter military. What do you think of the results so far?

I would argue that we have a first-half team, and the score that counts comes at the end of the game. … No one can match us in terms of war fighting. …

Now we're dealing with the reality of what comes after that, what happens in the second half, and it's not going well. … The occupation shows you don't have that second-half force.

You write about the United States as a source of “security exports” What do you mean by the phrase?

In terms of our wealth as a nation, it's relatively easy for us to spend 2 to 3 percent of our GDP on our military. … Compared to other countries, we have a very robust security system. We don't need our military to protect America. It's been half a century since we've fought a war against a direct enemy. We've got a military that's been optimized to project power around the world. …

We export security. We have military-to-military relations that no other country has. We train other military leaders the way no other military does. The U.S. military does eight to 10 crisis responses every year. …

You support the war in Iraq, but say the Bush team has done a poor job of explaining the strategy. What's the point the White House isn't getting across?

Osama bin Laden is trying to drive the West out of the Middle East so he can disconnect the Middle East from the rest of the world. Now we've got to connect the Middle East to the rest of the world and make that connection about something other than oil.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Tonight in Leavenworth

Thomas P.M. Barnett's speech to the public at the University of St. Mary is set to begin at 7:30 p.m. at Mabee Auditorium, 4100 S. FourthSt.

Public's welcome to come, so if you're in the area, please do.

November 17, 2004

Kansas City . . . Kansas City, Here I Come!

Dateline: SWA Flight 85 from BWI to KC, 17 November 2004

Vonne Mei Ling Barnett officially became a Rhody today at around 9:45 in the Newport County Courthouse in downtown Newport, just one room over from where Klaus Von Bulow went on trial those many years ago. We celebrated later (Vonne, me and the baby) by stopping by our favorite bakery in the world, the Mad Hatter bakery on Broadway. I bought a couple of nice things to munch on during my two flights down from Providence to Kansas City later in the day, only to grab the wrong bag running out the door (I am always dashing to the airport at the last minute), so I got Vonne Mei's half-eaten scone instead of the lemon bar and poppyseed muffin I picked out.

That wasn't my only screw-up on this trip so far: I forgot to pack a dress shirt with my suit. So I got to see a bit of Kansas City MO tonight upon landing and checking in—specifically the JCPenney on Barry Road. I found it just before it closed and picked up a very special $15 white shirt with pointed collar. That, and a bag of chips with salsa at the sip-n-gas on the way back and I had just enough energy to finish all the article blogging I needed to accomplish in order to bring me back up to date.

Tomorrow is Leavenworth and the Army, so enough said as I need a decent night's sleep.

Oh, one interesting thing today: it looks like I've found a venue that C-SPAN is interested in taping. More miraculous, the venue in question proved willing to let the cameras into the session, so it looks like there will be a second DVD in the works. This brief will be somewhere short of the NDU almost-3-hour extravaganza and the tight, Pop!Tech version of 35 minutes. It also looks more and more like it will be shown in the first week of December, meaning the night of the same day as the taped talk in DC. If so, I would follow the prime-time broadcast with a live, in-studio, period of talking calls from viewers. Should be interesting if we get all the details worked out—many, many cellphones calls from now.

Here's the delayed catch going back quite a ways:

Rice to State: same as it never was

The unspoken reality of "Iraq's future"

There are many roads leading to Jerusalem

Iran's latest deal with EU on nuclear arms—don't bet on it

How secure is Kim Jong Il?

The oil boom buys time for states facing change

China's economy is an experiment for the entire world

How the war on terror transforms the notion of giving—on both sides

Smart dust for a smart world

The hi-lo mix of tomorrow's U.S. military

Putin's straight talk on taxes and property rights

In ten years, globalization won't feel like Americanization—thanks to the movies!

Strutting their stuff in Asia, to the delight of war-planners inside DoD

Rice to State: same as it never was

"New Bush Cabinet Seen as Move For More Harmony and Control: Trusted Advisers Are Placed in Important Posts," by David E. Sanger and Steven R. Weisman, New York Times, 17 November 2004, p. A1.

"Bush's Tutor and Disciple: Condoleezza Rice," by Elisabeth Bumiller, New York Times, 17 November 2004, p. A1.

"Chief of C.I.A. Tells His Staff To Back Bush," by Douglas Jehl, New York Times, 17 November 2004, p. A1.

"From Colin to Condoleezza: A baton is passed at State, but will things get any better?" op-ed by Eliot A. Cohen, Wall Street Journal, 17 November 2004, p. A16.

"Bush Taps Loyalists for Cabinet: Nominations Suggest White House Seeks Even Tighter Reins," by Carla Anne Robbins and Greg Hitt, Wall Street Journal, 17 November 2004, p. A4.

"From Behind the Scenes to Stage Front: A Wider Role Ahead For a Loyal Confidante," by Todd S. Purdum, New York Times, 16 November 2004, p. A1.

"President Signals No Major Shift In Foreign Policy," by Glenn Kessler, Washington Post, 7 November 2004, p. A1.

All the news coming out of the White House since the election speaks to a steady-the-course approach on foreign policy. Maybe some better stylistics, but those are likely to involve everyone singing off the same sheet of music in greater synchronization than anything else.

Condi Rice brings nothing to the post of Secretary of Defense that Powell didn't have, except the president's ear. But if she runs State like she ran NSC (and as it will continue to be run under her replacement and former deputy Stephen Hadley), then State, much liked the purged CIA, will simply be more responsive to Bush's vision. That's not a bad thing in and of itself, it just means don't expect a lot of internal debate on things.

Bush knows what he wants on his watch: a transformed Middle East. My question is (and it’s the basic query that animates my upcoming Esquire piece): what is he willing to pay for that goal? Cause just putting forth a clear and consistent message front to all the allies who distrust us and dislike us probably won't be enough of a stylistic change, and we won't be moving off that dime in Iraq fast enough over the next four years without some allied help to do anything more than flap our gums on Iran and North Korea. So if Bush is serious about transforming the Middle East, he'll need to start considering which deals he can stomach and which ones he cannot, cause he sure as hell isn't going to be able to unilateral his way through the entire cast of the Axis of Evil by the end of his second term.

Don't get me wrong, I think its great we'll now have a SECSTATE that the rest of the world can interact with, confident that when she speaks, it's actually the President talking and not just some personal dissembling. But if we're not prepared to make deals, we get the same no's from allies and foes alike, even if they're offered more politely to our new, no-nonsense Secretary.

Bush needs to decide how successful he wants to be in his second term, of if he's just carrying water for the next GOP president, having burned too many bridges over, and lost too many lives in, the Iraq takedown and subsequently botched occupation.

Oh, and who does virtually all of Washington blame for the botched occupation? That would be the National Security Council for its gross inability to manage the interagency planning process. Good thing we swapped out that job.

The unspoken reality of "Iraq's future"

"A Victory, But Little Is Gained: Falluja aside, the U.S. must lower its goals in Iraq," op-ed by Daryl G. Press and Benjamin Valentino, New York Times, 17 November 2004, p. A29.

"The Sunni Angle: Iraq's elections mustn't bypass an embittered and radicalized minority," op-ed by Noah Feldman, Wall Street Journal, 16 November 2004, p. A24.

"Armored Forces Blast Their Way Into Rebel Nest: Last Falluja Stronghold; American Troops Are Also Facing Fresh Unrest Elsewhere in Iraq," by Dexter Filkins and Robert F. Worth, New York Times, 14 November 2004, p. A1.

"Calling All Troops, And Then Some, in Iraq," by Eric Schmitt, New York Times, 14 November 2004, p. WK4.

"Fallujah's lesson: Don't be fooled by quick win: Battle's nearly over, but war's end not in sight," by John Diamond, Steve Komarow and Tom Squitieri, USA Today, 12-14 November 2004, p. A1.

"Ethnic Rivalries Still Bitter in Balkans: Kosovo, Bosnia Sharply Divided; Macedonians Fear Vote May Spark Violence," by Daniel Williams, Washington Post, 6 November 2004, p. A18.

Our brave troops prevail in Falluja, but what do we win exactly? The insurgency shifts its efforts elsewhere, although it remains fundamentally a creature of the Sunni Triangle. So as the elections draw near, what should be our goals?

I was asked by Alex Steffens of WorldChanging about the future of Iraq. I replied that it was probably as bright as Yugoslavia's future. He got my point. There isn't any Yugoslavia any more, and there probably shouldn't be an Iraq anymore.

To me, that's not lowering our goals in Iraq, but rewarding those portions of Iraq that are ready to embrace the future. Noah Feldman may disagree, but I think the whole point of the elections should be to benefit those parts of Iraq that have embraced the notion of federalism, while punishing those that do not. Remember our Civil War. Well, that's how it worked then too, until the South gave up.

That isn't going to happen in the Sunni Triangle any time soon, and that's why the triangle is where the vast bulk of our troops are now. Check out the maps on troop employment across Iraq: we are thin in the north and thinner still in the south, with the large majority crammed into the deadly triangle. I say, reward those areas that can police their own better and work together, while not pretending that this election can function as anything real for those parts of Iraq lost to non-stop violence right now.

The anger and violence that now grips the Triangle won't disappear overnight, any more than it did in Bosnia or Kosovo. It takes a long time for that enmity to die away (remember how strong the KKK was in the south for all those decades following the Civil War?). We need to be realistic. That's not betraying the Iraqi people, because there are no Iraqi people—just three tribes living in the Yugoslavia of the Middle East.

There are many roads leading to Jerusalem

"Arafat is Gone, but Hamas Remains," op-ed by George Melloan, Wall Street Journal, 16 November 2004, p. A25.

"After Death, Tests for Mideast and World," by Steven Erlanger, New York Times, 12 November 2004, p. A1.

"A Middle East Opening," op-ed by Brent Scowcroft, Washington Post, 12 November 2004, p. A25.

"Beyond Arafat," by Jim Hoagland, Washington Post, 7 November 2004, p. B7.

Before we went into Iraq, it was said that maybe the road to peace in Jerusalem went through Baghdad. Now, it's said to be the other way around.

I say, if Bush has any real capital with Ariel Sharon, now's the time to use it. Hoagland of the Post says he should name Sam Nunn or James Baker as a special envoy to the situation. I like the idea of Baker, whom I consider to be the last good Secretary of State we had (present nominee included). But I'm not so sure I'd send Baker to Jerusalem. To me, America needs to create local ownership of that problem, as well as the situation in Iraq. Iran's a big player in both (see the U.S. News cover-story this week on Iran's "connections" to the insurgency in Iraq), plus there's a decent case to be made that Iran is the country behind much of Hezbollah's and Hamas' struggle against Israel.

I'm with Brent Scowcroft on this one: we need dialogue with Tehran that's about more than enriched uranium.

Iran's latest deal with EU on nuclear arms—don't bet on it

"Iran's New Alliance With China Could Cost U.S. Leverage," by Robin Wright, Washington Post, 17 November 2004, p. A21.

"Nuclear Deal With Iranians Has Angered Hard-Liners," by Nazila Fathi, New York Times, 17 November 2004, p. A4.

"Group Says Iran Has Secret Nuclear Arms Program," by Douglas Jehl, New York Times, 16 November 2004, p. A4.

"Iran, EU Differ on Nuclear Suspension," by Marc Champion, Wall Street Journal, 16 November 2004, p. A22.

"Europeans Say Iran Agrees to Freeze Uranium Enrichment: An accord is hailed in Europe, but greeted cautiously in the U.S.," by Elaine Sciolino, New York Times, 16 November 2004, p. A3.

How good is this deal between the EU and Iran? Probably as solid as the paper it's printed on. Iran has played word games before, and will do so as long as it can, because the more it delays, the more time it has to develop the bomb. Plus the deal seems to have pissed off plenty of Iran's political hard-liners in its parliament.

But the worse reality is that Iran is probably pulling the old Saddam trick: agree to suspension on facility A, only to proceed with facility B ("Oh, you didn't say anything about facility B!"). This is going to go on and on until Iran announces suddenly one day that it has the bomb.

And you know what? There wont' be much we can do about it, especially as Tehran cleverly draws China more and more to its side. China needs Iranian oil and gas, and we need China economically. It's that simple and that complex.

Washington needs to get real ASAP on Iran. Calling them names is one thing, dealing with the reality of their power in the region that we now find ourselves deeply embedded within militarily is another.

Get used to Iran having the bomb.

How secure is Kim Jong Il?

"Where Kim's Portrait Hung in Pyongyang, a Baffling Blankness," by James Brooke, New York Times, 17 November 2004, p. A3.

It's weird, but Kim Jong Il's official portraits seem to be disappearing around Pyongyang. Not in the countryside, just in the capital, mind you, but it's weird.

And then Lil' Kim hasn't been seen for a while. Hmmmmm.

Of course, North Korean diplomats counter sagely with incredulity at the suggestion that the Dear Leader might be removed from power by others around him: "Can the sun be removed from the sky? It is not possible."

Hmm. Let's think on that one a while. Are we sure it's not possible?

The oil boom buys time for states facing change

"Russia Is Flush—for Now: Oil Revenue Bolsters Finances, but Restructuring Is Neglected," by Guy Chazan, Wall Street Journal, 17 November 2004, p. A14.

"An Oil Binge in Latin America: Revenue Windfall Relieves Pressure for Structural Economic Change," by John Lyons, Wall Street Journal, 16 November 2004, p. A22.

"Oil Buys Time for Saudis: Prosperity, While It Lasts, Blunts Demands for Faster Change," by Hugh Pope, Wall Street Journal, 15 November 2004, p. A20.

"Panel Pegs Illicit Iraq Earnings at $21.3 Billion," by Judith Miller, New York Times, 16 November 2004, p. A11.

"Looming Oversupply of Crude Oil Could Mean a Decline in Prices," by Karen Matusic, Wall Street Journal, 17 November 2004, p. B3C.

"Global Surge in Use of Coal Alters Energy Equation: Shift Offers a Way to Slow Rise in Demand for Oil; Worries on Global Warming," by Patrick Barta and Rebecca Smith, Wall Street Journal, 16 November 2004, p. A1.

The oil boom affects politics all over the dial. Structural reforms that should be happening in Latin America and Russia are being put off. Political reforms that should be moving ahead in Saudi Arabia are likewise being fudged (why do anything difficult today that you can put off until tomorrow?).

It's this sort of fundamental reality that always makes me bemused whenever I'm confronted with "alternative global futures" that speak to either everything working out or everything going to hell in a handbasket. The reality is that one country/region's bad news is another country/region's good news.

Being a rainy-day type myself, you'd like to think that country's would take advantage of windfalls to do the heavy economic and political lifting when it comes to reforms, but that's not how the world works. Regimes experiment with their legitimacy only when they're really scared about the pathway they're apparently on. Otherwise it's muddle though and let the next guy deal with it.

So Ecuador bribes retirees with extra payments now when it should be revamping its pension system. Russia, at least, is credited with stashing away some of its windfall and paying down its external debt, to the delight of the IMF. By while Putin's balancing the books nicely, he's not pushing ahead on structural reforms in the banking sector, liberalizing the energy sector (where monopolies persist) or cutting back on state meddling in the private sector. In Saudi Arabia, having all that extra dough means the House of Saud's absolute rule tends to escape the kind of public scrutiny that it suffered during the budgetary cutbacks of the last decade, when oil prices were low. This time around, though, thanks to the creeping impact of the info revolution in the kingdom, more of the ordinary citizens are a whole lot less ignorant of what goes on inside the royal family. As one industrialist says, "Popular economic expectations are extremely high. If [the boom] stumbles, there will be social unrest, protests."

Of course, you don't need a oil boom to reap all sorts of windfalls from oil. Look at how well Saddam did under all those years of the UN's oil-for-food program, which constituted—we now guess—a nifty transfer of $21B to the dictator's coffers.

But even this oil boom is showing signs of aging. Inventories held by downstream companies (refining and distribution, as opposed to upstream exploration and production) in the U.S. and elsewhere are swelling, meaning we're looking at an oversupply of crude in response to market prices rising (damn those markets!).

So the clock is already ticking, and a good thing too. All this high-priced oil is pushing countries like India and China to substitute as much as possible with coal, and you know what that gets you: much higher CO2 emissions from those non-signatories to the Kyoto Protocol.

Ah yes, what goes around comes around—thanks to global wind patterns. . .

China's economy is an experiment for the entire world

"A New Pattern Is Cut for Global Textile Trade: China Likely to Dominate as Quotas Expire," by Peter S. Goodman and Paul Blustein, Washington Post, 17 November 2004, p. A1.

"China Unlikely to Float Currency Soon, Official Says," by Jill Dutt, Washington Post, 13 November 2004, p. E1.

"Zhou's Theories Clash With China's Realities: Scholarly Central Bank Head Finds Market-Based Tactics Hit Local Political Obstacles," by Andrew Browne, Wall Street Journal, 15 November 2004, p. C1.

China's growing influence over the shape and tone of not just the global economy but the very essence of globalization itself receives a boost with the new rule set coming to the global textile trade thanks to the World Trade Organization. This vast revision of the rule set, which hits factories worldwide on 1 January 2005, is "expected to jeopardize as many as 30 million jobs in some of the world's poorest places as the textile industry uproots and begins consolidating in a country that has become the world's acknowledged low-cost producer: China."

We're talking about $400 billion in trade, so this new rule set's impact will be huge. Maybe now people will stop describing globalization as an American-led multinational corporation plot to rule the world and start understanding the process as being so much bigger than just the U.S. economy. Increasingly, the purveyor of both pain and delight will be China.

And they seem to know that more and more, hence their growing willingness to discuss the eventual floating of the yuan (talking is one thing, actually doing is another). I remember the people back at Cantor Fitzgerald (during the NewRuleSets.Project I describe in PNM) talking about how, someday, when China was forced by global economic circumstances to finally float the yuan, that that alone would be its own new rule set.

Everyone agrees (and the US especially argues) that the yuan is set too low at 8.3 to the dollar, thus making Chinese goods seem cheaper on global markets than they should be. But you have to be careful what you wish for, given China's now great prominence as a source of global economic growth. A floating currency is one thing when you have Alan Greenspan armed with all his tools of manipulation, but as the article on the Chinese "Alan Greenspan"notes, Zhou Xiaochuan lacks many of those controls (even as Chinese newspapers praise him as a "good student of Alan Greenspan."

Here's Mr. Zhou's problem in a nutshell:

But unlike Mr. Greenspan, Mr. Zhou doesn't decide interest rates. The central bank has a voice in monetary policy, and a growing voice under Mr. Zhou, but final decisions are taken by the Communist Party's Politburo.

Although Mr. Zhou has a long way to go to match Mr. Greenspan's power, just the fact that he wields the influence he does is a big step forward for China. Yes, the guy survives now and then on his personal connections (former leader Jiang Jemin was a patron), but he's also bringing in a lot of foreign-trained talent—so-called sea turtles. "Sea turtles" is a Chinese pun (as much of Chinese humor is, due to the great variety of ways one can pronounce individual words in Mandarin) that refers to people in China who travel abroad for study and later return. So one of the jibes against Mr. Zhou is that he is "too fond of sea turtles," packing his staff, as he does, with U.S.-trained economists.

Probably a Chicago Boy or two in that mix.

Let's hope they give him sound advice, for like Mr. Greenspan, Mr. Zhou holds a big chunk of the world's collective economic future in his decision-making hands.

How the war on terror transforms the notion of giving—on both sides

"Driven From Iraq, Aid Groups Reflect on Work Half Begun," by Daniel B. Schneider, , 15 November 2004, p. A13.

"Australian Says 'Stomachs and Pockets' Are Key in Iraq," by Nora Boustany, Washington Post, 5 November 2004, p. A15.

"Since 9/11, Muslims Look Closer To Home," by Laurie Goodstein, New York Times, 15 November 2004, p. E1.

Here's the essential truth of the matter in Iraq:

As Baghdad fell to American troops in April 2003, a number of international relief agencies had already gathered near Iraq's borders, eager, even without on-the-ground assessments or local partners, to speed workers and supplies along.

A year and a half later, aid groups report that they have made progress in restoring basic social services and the rudiments of a civil society. But faced by an oppressive succession of assaults, kidnappings and bombings, they are withdrawing their remaining foreign staff, with only a handful of non-Iraqi relief workers left.

Those aid efforts that have not ended have taken on a vastly different shape: smaller, concentrated in areas that are safer, but less in need of immediate help, and overwhelmingly in the hands of Iraqis, directed outside the country.

Security concerns prevent most relief officials from discussing their Iraqi operations publicly.

The notion of a SysAdmin force doesn't seem so crazy after you read something like that, huh? Makes you think there needs to be a new nexus between the military and relief organizations if we're really going to secure lasting victories in this global war on terrorism. Also makes you realize that, in the end, the military only starts the show and cannot possibly end it on its own.

Another lesson we need to take away from Iraq is to keep our initial goals simple and direct. You want to win "hearts and minds?" Well, focus on "stomachs and pockets" first, according to Peter Khalil, an Australian who spent 9 months at Paul Bremer's side in the Green Zone.

As Khalil put it, "After security, the most important concerns of Iraqis are stomachs and pockets."

You just know an Australian would be so direct, right?

So we're all learning some new/old lessons on how to rehab a political bankrupt state (I say "old," because we learned most of these same lessons in Somalia and Haiti in the early/mid 1990s and then chose to forget them immediately—at least inside the Pentagon).

Probably the strangest news I've come across regarding charity work since 9/11 is that Muslims in America, wary of giving to overseas groups for fear of supporting terrorism, are now redirecting much of that money to Muslim charities that deal with issues right in their own neighborhoods and cities. They feel the same old religious obligation; they just chose now to do it closer to home.

That is a very good trend in terms of Muslims in America connecting to the country in which they now live, and yet, we need to make sure that good Islamic charities around the world don't go starving as a result. That outcome would do nothing positive for us in this Global War on Terrorism.

Smart dust for a smart world

"Tiny Antennas To Keep Tabs On U.S. Drugs," by Gardiner Harris, New York Times, 15 November 2004, p. A1.

We are just beginning to realize the potential of tiny sensors, or what some call "smart dust." The Food and Drug Administration has got drug manufacturers to agree to put tiny transmitters into the labels of gajillions of medicine bottles as part of an effort to combat counterfeiting.

This is just the beginning of this technology, which most of us have already bumped into thanks to cell phones (have you checked your settings regarding your phone's ability to display its/your whereabouts at all times when on?).

This whole smart dust thing is going to be the technology that allows America to remain an open society while remaining a safe society. You want to track visitors to the U.S.? Here is your method that's at once somewhat annoying and a bit frightening. But you know what, it'll be a good thing. We need ways to allow maximum connectivity with the outside world while not feeling totally vulnerable to all sorts of things we can't track, trace, follow, or prevent.

As with all technologies that enable freedom and convenience, a loss of privacy seems inevitable. But that's not necessarily true. It just means we need new rule sets to deal with this additional form of connectivity/transparency.

So as a great man once said, "trust, but verify."

The hi-lo mix of tomorrow's U.S. military

"Pentagon Envisioning a Costly Internet for War: Arsenal of the Future," by Tim Weiner, New York Times, 13 November 2004, p. A1.

"For the First Time Since Vietnam, the Army Prints a Guide to Fighting Insurgents: An acknowledgment that the war on terror may require a new kind of doctrine," by Douglas Jehl and Thom Shanker, New York Times, 13 November 2004, p. A12.

When I first saw the top article, I got all spooked: what is this new war internet and why hadn't I heard anything about it? OMYGOD! It's like a new Star Wars or something! How could I be so out of the loop?

Then I read the article and found out it was just a rather hyperbolic description of the GIG, or Global Information Grid, which is an acronym I've seen bandied about in Pentagon briefings for . . . oh . . . say . . . a decade.

As for it being the "Internet in the sky" or the "war internet," hmmmm. I guess that's descriptive in the same way that Star Wars serves as shorthand for the collective self-delusions of the missile defense crowd.

What happens with something like GIG is that, as part of its overarching sales job to Congress, the description of the whole thing gets blown hugely out of proportion, making it sound like this gigantic monster of a network that someone, someday will flip one big ol' switch on. This is pure chimera. The GIG is being put together much like any vast network gets put together—in bits and pieces over the years. Some of it exists now and has so for years. More is always "just around the corner," and "new, improved capabilities" are always "coming online any day now."

In short, the GIG is going to unfold like Microsoft's operating system global empire unfolds: in successive waves or versions. It will never be complete, and it will always endure constant upkeep and improvement. This article makes it seem like some binary possibility of the future: It could work, or fail dramatically! Stay tuned!I

In truth, the GIG will always muddle by and it will always constitute a dramatic improvement over whatever what in our inventory five years earlier. It will cost billions, but it will largely be worth it, because staying ahead on big-time war is a great thing for the U.S. military to do. And yes, it will suffer loads of failures and set-backs, but unlike that Star Wars bullshit, this thing will actually work and serve a real function.

Meanwhile, however, the SysAdmin force will receive new hard-copy manuals on how to conduct anti-insurgency ops, thanks to Iraq. Not exactly a "God's eye view of the battlefield," but you know what, you don't get to be God in SysAdmin work. You just get to walk that nasty beat 24/7, banging your nightstick against lamp posts (light 'em if you've got 'em!)

Putin's straight talk on taxes and property rights

"Putin Tells Business to Get Used to Paying Taxes," by Erin E. Arvedlund, New York Times, 17 November 2004, p. W1.

Putin is preaching a new sort of quid pro quo. In the last decades of socialism in the Soviet Union, it was said among the masses that "we pretend to work and the state pretends to pay us." I like to describe late Brezhnevism as "the state pretends to rule over us and we pretend to obey."

Well, Putin's proposing something better, something along the lines of "you pay taxes and the state will respect your property rights." Sounds pretty good, huh? Not exactly the return of authoritarianism.

This is my notion on Russia's "progress": so long as Putin doesn't reinstitute vertical control over the economy, life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness will improve over time. His recent reinstitution of vertical control over the political system tells us little of Russia's potential future evolutions, other than Moscow believes in a Go Slow approach on politics, much like Beijing does.

This is not a bad thing. In fact, it's probably a very good thing. As Putin declares, "Fear in unproductive." To which I add, business likes transparency and certainty.

Putin is moving hard to make both happen in the economic and legal realms, and he needs to hoard a certain amount of political power to push all that change through over the long haul.

As always, we need to be patient—and largely ignore the panicked cries of former Soviet experts on the former Soviet Union, for, as a great leader once said, "We have nothing to fear but fear itself."

Just think of Putin's version as a Globalization Era updating of that classic phrase.

In ten years, globalization won't feel like Americanization—thanks to the movies!

"What Is a Foreign Movie Now?" by A.O. Scott, New York Times Magazine, 14 November 2004, p. 79.

This is a big theme of mine: in ten years time it will be impossible for the world to keep pretending that globalization equates to forced Americanization (otherwise known as that dumbass McWorld theory—as is the case of most diagnoses, it arrives on scene just as it becomes obsolete). Our cultural content dominated Globalization II (1945-1980) because we were number 1 without a doubt in the scrawny West that existed through that time period. Our cultural content still seems dominant through Globalization III (1980-2001), because the biggest players were still getting their acts together in terms of internal integration (Europe) and joining the global economy (e.g., China, India).

But in Globalization IV (2001 and counting), we will witness the rise of numerous key cultural content pillars, such as the European lifestyle (or dream, as Jeremy Rifkin calls it), Japanese cool (check out what your kids all seem naturally drawn to, and you'll find it's overwhelmingly Japanese in origin), and Chinese hipness (isn't China becoming the center of damn near everything on the go-go?).

Hollywood supposedly dominates the global marketplace for movies, just like the NBA dominates global basketball (and yet seems to be full of more foreigners than you can count), but that chimera is rapidly disappearing thanks to rising competition from the world over. Today, it's getting really hard to define exactly what is a foreign film?:

It is not hard to imagine a future n which an American suburban marquee will boast a Chinese martial-arts picture, a Korean action thriller, a Mexican cop drama and a French romantic comedy.

Actually, that future is pretty much already here, depending on the taste of the movie house you may frequent.

Among the harbingers of that future are the domestic box-office successes of movies like "Crouching Tiger, Hidden Dragon," "Amelie," and last summer's "Hero." Of course, if you count remakes, homages and rip-offs—retooled versions of Japanese pictures like "The Ring" and "The Grudge," say, or even Quentin Tarantino's "Kill Bill" movies—then that future has long since arrived.

And yes, I do count all these films, most of which we already own on DVD.

What is the emerging theme of this global cinema?

A defining modern mood—one that is often evoked but hasn't been adequately been named—is the anxious, melancholy feeling of being simultaneously connected and adrift. In a recent essay in Salon, the film critic Charles Taylor identified this condition—"being in a world where the only sense of home is to be found in a state of constant flux"—as a central motif in movies ranging from "Lost in Translation" to the films of cinephile cult figures like Tsai and Wong Kar-wai [two up-and-coming Asian filmmakers].

To me, these are the movies that ask the question, "How fast is too fast or not fast enough?" The answer to that question is what will constitute the emerging "third way" between America's Go Fast ideology on globalization and Europe's Go Slow.

I look forward to all the movies still to be made on this subject.

Strutting their stuff in Asia, to the delight of war-planners inside DoD

"China Now Test-Flying Homemade AWACS: Radar Planes Intended For Use in Taiwan Strait," by Edward Cody, Washington Post, 13 November 2004, p. A19.

"Japan Protests To China Over Incursion by Nuclear Sub," by Associated Press, Washington Post, 13 November 2004, p. A19.

"Exercise Displays Japan's Ambitions: Seeking New International Stature, Government Steps Away From Pacifist Past," by Anthony Faiola, Washington Post, 7 November 2004, p. A21.

The U.S. Navy has long presented itself as the "glue" of Asia, meaning the "presence" force whose constant loitering in-area and persistent efforts at building up military-to-military ties on a bilateral basis with every possible navy in the region have served to decrease local ambitions for military power, obviated local arms races, and kept a lid on inter-state rivalries. And while that perspective is maintained out there in the field (meaning Pacific Command in Honolulu), let me tell you, the Navy back home seems to take increasing delight in hyping what they believe is the growing threat of war in Asia.

Is there a growing threat? I think there is a Japan and a China that are both committed to having a bigger military role in both the region and the world at large—ones befitting their mature (Japan) and emerging (China) economic clout. I think both militaries, having nothing better to do, tend to get overly excited about one another out of boredom. Other than the threat which is Taiwan's bid for independence, these two states basically have nothing to fight over, unless you're stupid enough to believe one side's navy is going to be able to enforce some claim over undersea oil reserves believed to lie between the two states. Why the two countries would bother fighting over these reserves instead of simply exploiting them jointly, is apparently beyond the military strategists on both sides (clear proof that military strategists the world over tend to plan for war solely in the context of war instead of taking into account the context of everything else—here, the growing economic integration of the two states).

Japan is becoming highly dependent on China as a target for production outsourcing as well as a market for exports (China's domestic demand was basically THE reason why Japan emerged out of its long-term economic recession). Meanwhile, China becomes dependent on Japanese investments.

Meanwhile, however, their two militaries seem to delight in dicking with one another like two bored cats with nothing else to do but grab each other's tails. Where is this going? Absolutely nowhere, but it does warm the hearts of national insecurity experts within the naval community, who delight in recounting each and every tail, reminding us all unceasingly, that if we'd just give them the chance, we could find ourselves involved in some really cool wars in Asia.

What can America do to end this shadow boxing? We can involve both militaries in larger means, not to mention better ends. The answer is we need to grab both countries and stick them into an East Asian NATO. We need to harness their energy toward goals beyond just dreaming of idiotic wars with one another.

Until then, naval experts back here will continue to wax poetic about the "possibilities"!

November 16, 2004

Many articles blogged tomorrow--promise!

Dateline: Portsmouth RI, 16 November 2004

Collected a slew over the weekend, and have a bunch of papers to go through tonight before bed, so I'll be posting a bunch over the next couple of days, along with another PNM review, another profile in a magazine, and the December blurb in Esquire--which included the cover art from the book!

Tomorrow morning is big day in the family (as if the new puppy wasn't straining us already): at 0900 in Newport County Courthouse Vonne and Thomas Barnett re-adopt Vonne Mei Ling Barnett in the state of Rhode Island and the Providence Plantations (yes, that's the state's official name!).

The Pilgrimage to Lambeau

Dateline: Portsmouth RI, 16 November 2004

God I love my my new cell phone! Getting the old one stolen worked out pretty well. The ability to always have a camera with you, plus the opportunity to immediately email a photo file to anyone anywhere is really cool. Mark Warren and I were snapping shots around Lambeau and sending them back to our spouses virtually in real time, which is a neat form of connectivity for someone who can't/doesn't make the trip with you.

Here's a selection from the trip:


Outside the main entrance to Lambeau (into the atrium), Mark Warren stands next to the big statue of Vince Lombardi.



Inside the Packer Hall of Fame, they have a life-size recreation (with statues) of the final play in the famous 1968 Ice Bowl Game between the Packers and the Cowboys (1967 season NFL Championship); this is the line of scrimmage recreated (in portion) just before the final play when QB Bart Starr does his famous sneak behind the block of right guard Jerry Kramer.



Here's the same famous play recreated, with the view being right over the shoulder of QB Bart Starr, a childhood hero of mine.



In a fans section (alright, it's designed primarily for kids!), visitors can re-enact the Lambeau Leap by diving into a pretend stand full of cushion people (Mark Warren snapped this "action photo," as he put it); I say, nice vertical!



My grandfather's plaque in the Packer Hall of Fame, describing him (Jerry Clifford) as "Legal Counsel" and a "Hungry Five Member" who kept the Packers in Green Bay during the lean years and the close calls; he was inducted in 1991.


The view of the opening kickoff from my seats in Section 342, Rows 1&2, Seat 11. I missed the first kick-off, but both teams were kind enough to commit off-setting penalties so I could get a good shot on the second try.



University of Wisconsin marching band at halftime; they played in the stands in roving bands throughout the rest of the game--very nostalgic for this Badger alumni.



Mark holding our new Chesapeake Bay Retriever just as we picked Stormy up at the kennel outside Manitowoc and about 30 miles from my birthplace of Chilton WI.


All in all, a very cool trip. It was great to spend so much time F2F with Mark and to have such long uninterrupted conversations (okay, there were 8 passing TDs in the game . . .). My throat is almost recovered from the screaming . . . at the Vikings, of course!

Checking in after the long weekend

Dateline: Portsmouth RI, 16 November 2004

Had a fabulous weekend in Wisconsin. Started tough with impromptu snowstorm that had me driving to Providence airport in near-whiteout conditions at 5am Saturday morning (wrecks all over the place as cars slide out of control). I missed my flight and didn't get to O'Hare until 2pm.

Mark Warren waiting for me there, a bit sleepy himself, so we drive up to Oshkosh in lazy fashion, not trying to make Lambeau that day. Instead we chow down at Culver's and I intro Mark to the joys of custard malts.

After a masterful ten hours each of snoring, we hit the road early on Sunday and draw within two blocks of Lambeau by 10am. We park in impromptu lot at strip mall for $10 and make our way to Lambeau. They let us into atrium portion at 11am and Mark and I spend 2 hours at Packer Hall of Fame. Then up to 3rd deck of atrium for beers at bar overlooking the masses while we plot Books #3 and #4, plus discuss article for Feb issue of Esquire.

Game was great. Brett throws first 50-yard-bomb right in our corner to Javon Walker. In all, Brett throws four, as does Daunte. We win with FG as time expires in game--naturally in our "historic south end zone" (remember the Ice Bowl?).

After game we listen to a bit of "5th Quarter" music from U of Wisconsin band (there for game), and then we shop for a bit at Packer Pro Shop. We end our 10 hours at Lambeau by having nice leisurely meal at Curly's Pub up on second deck off Atrium. Get back to hotel about 10pm exhausted and really sore of throat.

Next day up and we drive past my birthplace of Chilton WI on way to pick up our Chesapeake Bay Retriever at breeder's just outside Manitowoc. Then long drive to O'Hare. My plane leaves late, so I don't get Stormy home to the kids in Portmouth until 11pm.

Today at work I had too much to do in catching up to pursue much in terms of reading. I will catch up on news stories tomorrow from road (I head to Fort Leavenworth, KS), but I will post pix from weekend in a bit.

FYI: made the current issue of Esquire (December) in "where are they now?" look at past Best & Brightest selectees. Current issue puts out new slate.

November 12, 2004

PNM: An Amazon "Top 10 Editors' Pick" for "Current Events 2004"

Dateline: in the basement in Portsmouth RI, 12 November 2004

Finished the Esquire article for Mark Warren today. It rang in at just over 4,000 words—by design. Five hundred to open, roughly a thousand per the three main sections (Iraq/Middle East, China/Taiwan, and North Korea), and then 500 to finish. Looking at the piece this morning, I ended up cutting out a lot of parenthetical expressions (something I'm almost compulsive about in first drafts!) that were either too cute (recently, I can't resist jokes about the American Civil War for some reason) or just plain too rude (never make a crack about another person's kids).

Having done the opening, plus the sections on Iraq/Middle East and China/Taiwan, today I wrote the final section on North Korea and the closer. All in all the piece emerged without much effort or angst, which for me is usually a good sign, but I’ll await Mark's verdict tomorrow at O'Hare (we both arrive around 0830). My guess is the usual will happen: he'll cut about 25% and ask me to add in that much new stuff plus another 25% above that. He often rearranges the big pieces in ways that amaze me in the logic revealed (I don't pretend that I "get" myself better than anyone else, only that I write the first draft).

Today was a weird mix at work. First a meeting with representatives from the Office of Naval Research concerning possible collaborations. It was an interesting exchange and then I signed a copy of PNM for one of the visitors, a lady who had arranged my keynote to ONR's 2002 conference, a tale I relate in PNM—by the way.

Then I went out to lunch with a couple of energy experts representing a South African company that's pushing a new form of nuclear technology called Pebble Bed Modular Reactors (a very interesting tale all its own, that I will relate in the future once I peruse the material they left me). They had come all the way up from Washington just to brief me on the company and its work, which was very flattering and a bit bewildering. Their explanation, however, made me feel pretty good: they saw PNM as an overarching strategic concept that helped them link their argument for this new energy technology to sustainable economic development in the Gap, so the book had become a strange sort of marketing tool for them. I mean, if you can use PNM to help sell a new energy technology, then it really is "reproducible strategic concept."

Last up was an almost two-hour phone interview with Alex Steffen of WorldChanging.com, which should result in a substantial posting on their well-traveled site that explores new issues in global economic development.

I will sign off for the weekend now, as I'm not taking my laptop with me to Wisconsin for my Packer weekend trip with Mark Warren. Tomorrow we drive to Green Bay from Chicago and hit the Packer Hall of Fame, plus have dinner at Curly's Pub in the stadium. The game on Sunday doesn't start until 3pm, which is nice. Monday, on the way starting back, we pick up our new Chesapeake Bay Retriever female puppy at a kennel just south of Green Bay, quite close to where I was born in 1962 in a modest town called Chilton. Since my family moved from Chilton only a few months after my birth, I don't have any memory of the place, and yet it will be nice to return once again. I'll have to take a picture with my phone!

Here's the happy news I got from Putnam this week: every November Amazon posts a host of Editors' Picks of best books for the year as part of their marketing for the holiday season (ka-ching!). There's a general Top 50 and then a slew of Top 10 for a variety of genres. PNM made the Top 10 list for Current Events, which was, as you might imagine, a hotly contested group in the news-intensive year.

Here's what Amazon said in their posting found here:

Best Books of 2004 Top 10 Editors' Picks: Current Events

Current events in 2004 meant one thing more than anything else, and our list of the year's ten best is full of accounts of what led up to the Iraq War, the war itself, and its aftermath. At the top is the most authoritative of these, Bob Woodward's Plan of Attack, in which the legendary investigate reporter used his unprecedented access to the tight-lipped Bush White House to paint a picture of the preparations for war so balanced that Republicans and Democrats were each claiming it for their own cause. See more editors' picks and customers' favorites in our Best of 2004 Store.

Actually, the fact that my book's not exactly about the Iraq War (although I do talk about it at some length) makes it's inclusion a bit more impressive, but as you glance down the list, really only about half the books center on Iraq. I tell you what, though, I dare you not to name PNM as the most optimistic and forward-looking of the ten books on this list!

Here's the list in full:

1. Plan of Attack, by Bob Woodward

2. Ghost Wars, by Steve Coll

3. The Sorrows of Empire, by Chalmers Johnson

4. The Fall of Baghdad, by Jon Lee Anderson

5. A Pretext for War, by James Bamford

6. The Pentagon's New Map, by Thomas P.M. Barnett

7. The End of Oil, by Paul Roberts

8. The Outlaw Sea, by William Langewiesche

9. Power, Terror, Peace, and War, by Walter Russell Mead

10. Nuclear Terrorism, by Graham Allison

Of course, when you look at such a list, the first thing you notice are all the books that didn't make it, but somehow managed to get reviews in the New York Times or Washington Post, neither of which occurred for PNM. In fact, I'd almost bet that PNM is the only book on that list not to be reviewed by both papers, which makes its inclusion here all the more important for sales.

After C-SPAN, I guess I'd have to say I like Amazon a whole helluva lot!

Speaking of C-SPAN, it looks like they may run either the BookNotes or the American Perspectives taping of the brief again sometime before Xmas. We are negotiating the idea of a live, in-studio call-in effort involving me immediately after the prime-time broadcast. Since I'll only be in DC on the evenings of the 5th, 6th, and 7th of December between now and Xmas, one of those nights may well be the date. Then again, a special trip may be in order, although I hope not, since I am rather sick of traveling.

Hmm, that reminds me. I need to go upstairs and pack for my Packer weekend. Up early for the plane.

Wish me luck. I am on a two-game losing streak at Lambeau (Eagles last year on MNF game I attended with brother-in-law Todd and Sunday Giants game this year that I attended with my Kevin). Warren better be the charm!

See you Tuesday.

November 11, 2004

When it rains, it pours

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI, 11 November 2004

Halfway through writing the Esquire piece and it's turning out better than I had hoped. Mark Warren and I spoke about it at length last night before I dived in this moring. Will get most done today before return engagement with kids at "The Incredibles" (yes, it's that good). I had no idea on how to structure piece, but just like when I wrote the book, I started with a long shower until an opening line crept into my brain.

Then I ran to the office above the garage, banged it out, and followed where it took me. Three sections soon revealed themselves (after a 500-word opening), so it's a matter of banging them out one by one (one down, two to go). The big thing for me is: it's unfolding just as I imagined it would. I can tell I was getting pysched for something big, because I kept having trouble falling asleep before 1am all week, even as I continue to pop out of bed at 6 or 7am. Whenever that happens, I can tell a big chunk of writing is trying to escape.

I'm moving, I'm grooving, I'm dancing to the beat . . ..

That's just one thing on the plate this holiday. Others include negotiating with a cable news network program about an upcoming series on the future of war. Apparently the reporter in charge of that one really digs PNM, so we plan on making beautiful video together.

Then there's my plot to return to C-SPAN!

Then it looks like I might have found myself the right speaker's bureau to represent me.

Then there's Amazon picking PNM as one of the top-ten "current events" books of 2004 (more on that one tomorrow).

Then there's the possibility of the Packers beating Minnesota on Sunday in Lambert (oops!) . . . I mean Lambeau Field (with me and Mark Warren in attendance) and perhaps finishing their leap-frog into a first-place tie with the Vi-Queens!

Then there's picking up the new puppy on Monday south of Green Bay.

Then there's my son Kevin who wants to surf his favorite comic strip sites, so I'm outta here.

November 10, 2004

My first experience giving testimony

Dateline: Hyatt Crystal City, Arlington VA, seguing into a SWA flight from BWI to PVD, 9 & 10 November 2004

The testimony went well yesterday. You have the text already. I pretty much stuck to it, giving the effort my best Dick Cheney imitation (there's just something about reading a text while sitting down instead of my usual walking-around-with-no-notes style that brings out the scary, deep voice in me). I easily surpassed the ten-minute rule (we were warned by lights), but the chairman of the commission told us to ignore them.

I went first out of a panel of three experts. I had the highest data bit flow, and probably made the most unusual statements, but I decided, as I always do, to just do my thing and not worry about trying to sound like the accomplished expert on the topic at hand (exactly, who are basing realignment experts, anyway?).

The Overseas Basing Commission is made up of six members, one being the chairman. After the three panelists all talked their respective 15 minutes, it was on to the questions. Each commissioner asked 1 to 2 questions, and we all took a whack at answering each. I love the Q&A time, because that's when I like to try out my newest material. A total of 8 questioners later and we were done 120 minutes after we started. I snapped some photos of the neat, wood-paneled hearing room in the Dirksen Senate office building (an oldie but goodie) as a keepsake, using my new cell phone, and then I was off.

This morning I spent some time at the Cato Institute with Brink Lindsey, who is the new VP in charge of research. He's a fan of PNM, gave me a copy of his most recent book, and we discussed the possibility of future collaboration. Felt a bit weird to be at Cato for the first time, but I can get used to libertarians.

So, I survived my first time testifying. I wasn't under oath, because this wasn't a congressional or senate hearing, but only one conducted by a congressionally-mandated commission. Still, it felt good to get my feet wet, and I was pretty sure I didn't make an ass out of myself. So I was happy to get the experience under my belt.

Here's the catch that catches me up on a host of papers stretching back a week or more, plus some stuff readers sent me:

What comes next for the second Bush Administration

The solution set on Iraq

What Iran will not be denied

The opportunity presented by Arafat's demise

Why do we let Pyongyang and Taipei run America's relationship with China?

The Core needs good news on both Turkey and Pakistan

China: every which way but down

India: almost too high-tech for its own good

The Old Core will redefine old age

The best allies are incentivized allies

The right and wrong ways to build connectivity

A man who dreams big

Hernando de Soto would be proud, Brazil!

Planning the SysAdmin follow-on from the start


What comes next for the second Bush Administration

"Early Betting Is Bush's Foreign Policy Will Remain Hard-Line: New Faces in Top Positions Could Be Early Indicator Of Second Term's Direction," by Carla Anne Robbins, Wall Street Journal, 5 November 2004, p. A4.

"The Antiwar Right Is Ready to Rumble," by David D. Kirkpatrick, New York Times, 7 November 2004, p. WK5.

"President Feels Emboldened, Not Accidental, After Victory," by Elisabeth Bumiller, New York Times, 8 November 2004, p. A1.

The big question is: More of 43 or more like 41? Does George Bush continue in his perceived (and real) unilateralism)? Or does he go more like his father and work to gain broad international acceptance of the slew of new rule he's proposed for international security (preemption being the most radical)?

The reason why I supported Kerry in the election was because I thought he would be better in gaining broad, Core-wide acceptance of the new security rule sets that emerged—along with this administration's strategic vision—out of the ashes of 9/11. Now we'll never know, so it's really up to Bush to decide what his second term is going to be all about. I don't think he can get very far in the Middle East without internationalizing that effort and creating local ownership of the solution set, which means America would need to find a way to work with Iran and make the Palestinian-Israeli situation calm down dramatically. Otherwise, expect his second term to be consumed with the Middle East.

That would be too bad, because there's better opportunity to pursue lasting change and important, new strategic relationship in Asia—so long as you see Kim's removal from power as an opportunity and not just a danger to be dealt with. But America is unlikely to get anywhere in Asia without showing a different face in the Middle East, so the two are intimately linked—not just in terms of Asia's rising strategic interests there but in terms of how the rest of the Core views the goals and strategies of the Bush administration.

A United States that is perceived as being bogged down in the Middle East won't find the deals it needs to make in Asia to lock-in either India or China into solid strategic partnerships—at today's prices. No, they'll simply starting waiting this administration out, knowing that time is much on their side as their economies become more important to the West as a whole and the U.S. in particular.

Bush is said to be uninterested in the notion of legacy, but he should be, because the discounting on his second term is already beginning in the Republican party. He can either display the zeal required to seal the deal in the Middle East (many deals in fact) or he'll be attacked from within his own party for leading down a pathway with no clear exits but clear long-term dangers for the party beyond his second term.

Bush is right to feel emboldened about his victory, because it was an amazing one, given the sour turn of events in Iraq. He needs to hit the ground running. He needs to secure—early in his second term—the things worth securing in the international security environment right now. He's got a good 30 months and then the political process begins to move beyond him, so I hope he's got more ambition in his head than just making sure Iraq doesn't end up looking like a world-class mistake and an international tar-baby he begets subsequent administration.

The solution set on Iraq

"Bickering Iraqis Strive to Build Voting Coalition: Factions Among Shiites; Top Cleric Moves to Head Off Any Weakening of Majority's Power," by Edward Wong, New York Times, 7 November 2004, p. A1.

"Evolving Nature of Al Qaeda Is Misunderstood, Critic Says: The administration is accused of not respecting the threat," by James Risen, New York Times, 8 November 2004, p. A18.

"More Troops for Iraq," editorial, New York Times, 8 November 2004, p. A24.

"U.S. and Iraqi Troops Push Into Fallujah: Insurgents Dig In; Armored Vehicles Scale Dirt Barriers," by Jackie Spinner and Karl Vick, Washington Post, 9 November 2004, p. A1.

"In Hideout, Foreign Arabs Share Vision of 'Martyrdom,'" by Ghaith Abdul-Ahad, Washington Post, 9 November 2004, p. A1.

"Freedom squelches terrorist violence: KSG associate professor researches freedom-terrorism link," by Alvin Powell, Harvard New Office, 9 November 2004.

The Shiite majority knows it has a good thing going in a united Iraq, and the Kurds know there isn't that much they can do about it, except take confidence in their own self-rule of more than a decade. Meanwhile, the Sunni triangle will burn so long as there are any Saddam loyalists still dreaming of power and the U.S. is unable to stop the steady flow of outside terrorist and would-be martyrs.

Local ownership is the key to making Iraq work, not more American troops. We've got to get local players to stand up for the solution sets they really want to see happen, and the keys players in this drama are clear: Turkey and Iran, followed by Syria and Israel.

Michael Scheuer, aka Anonymous, is right about one thing: we'll never be able to kill enough terrorists to rid ourselves of the problem. Islamic terrorism, as represented by al Qaeda is a global insurgency that will die only when it's clear that its aims for the regions of the Gap (it does not pretend to have any goals for the Core, because its leaders are smart enough to know they won't be able to turn back the clock on any states there) are effectively rendered moot by the spread of the global economy and all of the connectivity and individual freedom it offers

Martyrs can only make a statement when their course of action can be argued to be no worse than submission to "Westoxification" and globalization's "evil" embrace. So long as the Middle East remains poorly connected—through a combination of poverty, missing rule sets and bad governance—the martyrs will have a reasonably believable story: namely, "our fate is no worse than yours, and ours bring us honor while yours bring only degradation and dishonor."

Countries making the transition from the Gap to the Core, or from authoritarianism to democracy, are most vulnerable to a host of bad security issues. War is more likely, but so is terrorism. But once connectivity is deeply achieved and individuals find themselves confronted with enough options to rule out a sense of diminishing expectations, terrorism's appeal, as well as that of martyrdom, naturally decreases. In fact, it starts to be viewed much like mental illness, as in, "Why would any rational person behave in that fashion?"

It's hard for some to admit but not me: the solution set on Iraq will likely be accepting successes where we can find them and letting those success stories become attractors in the same way that violence today in Iraq seems to attract more of those people willing to engage in it at all cost. The Kurds in the north can succeed, as they've proven in the past, and the Shiites in the south appear to see the opportunity their numbers provide them, so expect them to accommodate themselves to the possibilities of life beyond Saddam. But don't expect anything similar from the Iraqi Sunnis any time soon. Their downward spiral of diminished expectations is common for any ruling elite that's suffered an absolute loss of power (much like the submarine community inside the U.S. Navy), and it won't end until they exhaust themselves in violence to the point where they accept the notion that their only redemption will come through reinvention.

But the rest of Iraq need not wait that long, and the U.S.—frankly—can't afford to wait that long. The trifurcation of Iraq is coming, and deals are to be made. This is the wiggle room the Bush people have been looking for (if they're smart enough to recognize it) on a host of thorny issues across the region that need to be dealt with in concert with one another. Iraq is the key alright, or should I say the Former Republic of Iraq?

Former Republic of . . . where have I heard that one before? Oh yes, Yugoslavia.

What Iran will not be denied

"Will Iran Be Next: Soldiers, spies, and diplomats conduct a classic Pentagon war game—with sobering results," by James Fallows, Atlantic Monthly, December 2004, p. 99.

"What the Mullahs Learned From The Neighbors: To deal with Iran, learn from the mistakes in Iraq," by Kenneth M. Pollack, New York Times, 9 November 2004, p. A23.

"Iran, India Reach Accord to Work On Gas Deposits," by John Larkin, Wall Street Journal, 3 November 2004, p. A12.

"Iran Claims Draft Accord With Europe On Uranium," by Elaine Sciolino, New York Times, 9 November 2004, p. A6.

All the smart look-aheads on Iran suggest that we've effectively created a pathway dependency: by doing Afghanistan on its right and Iraq on its left we basically okayed Iran's rush for the bomb, whether we want to own up to that or not.

The question now is not how we stop Iran's bomb, but how we make it work for us.

The separate peace's are already being concluded between Iran and Europe, Iran and India, and Iran and China. By giving off the impression that the Iraq takedown was a zero-sum game launched by the U.S for the U.S., we effectively set in motion the hedging strategies by the rest of the Core's main pillars vis-à-vis Iran. No one to blame but ourselves on that one, so no finger pointing.

But no crying over this spilt milk either. Iran will get the bomb. What we need to ask is: What will Iran having the bomb get us?

Use your imagination. I will, when I write my next article for Esquire tomorrow morning.

It'll be in the February issue, hitting stands just before the inauguration.

My guess is that the title will start with "Mr, President, Here's How to . . ."

The opportunity presented by Arafat's demise

"Arafat's No. 2 Is Set to Assume Palestinian Leadership: A former prime minister is seen as a hopeful sign for peace in the Middle East," by Steven Erlanger, New York Times, 7 November 2004, p. A15.

"Israel, the U.S. and the Age of Terror: An old alliance reaches a critical moment as Arafat passes from the scene," by Roger Cohen, New York Times, 7 November 2004, p. WK1.

Yassir Arafat's desperate hold on life reminds me of the old SNL skits by Chevy Chase where he declared "Francisco Franco is still dead!"

Arafat is dead, and he will remain so, for all practical purposes from here on out—no matter what the condition of the physical body, the political body is dead.

The man who looks like he's locking as Yassir's replacement is almost too good to be true, given his past willingness to entertain the notion that Israel is not the source of all evil and can actually be dealt with.

The opportunity for both Israel and the U.S. could not be greater. Things are up in the air all over the dial in the Middle East, thanks to the Iraq takedown and subsequently messy occupation. There is as much or more opportunity as danger in this environment, and if the U.S. is going to forge a serious solution set for the region as a whole (involving Israel-Palestine, Syria, Iran and Iraq), then our relationship with Israel is going to redefined, because the nature of Israel's security needs to be redefined, as well as our role as its ultimate guarantor.

As with Asia, there are big deals to be cut, if only the second Bush administration displays the same willingness and courage to toss out outdated security rule sets as required.

Why do we let Pyongyang and Taipei run America's relationship with China?

"S. Korea Joins China in Criticizing U.S. on N. Korea," by Glenn Kessler, Washington Post, 27 October 2004, p. A18.

"U.S. North Korea Policy Faces Strains: As Diplomats Look to Revive Talks, Hard-Liners Weigh More-Coercive Options," by Gordon Fairclough, Wall Street Journal, 8 November 2004, p. A13.

"Powell's Comments in China Rile Taiwan: In Apparently Unintended Remarks, Secretary Says Island Is Not Independent," by Edward Cody, Washington Post, 28 October 2004, p. A18.

"On Bush, the Communists and Their Foes Can Agree," by Philip P. Pan, Washington Post, 24 October 2004, p. B3.

"Strait-jacket: December elections could edge Taiwan closer to a symbolic declaration of independence—and the United States toward military conflict with China," by Trevor Corson, Atlantic Monthly, December 2004, p. 54.

North Korea will be a focus of the second Bush administration—bet on it. But the neocons need to get far more imaginative in their approach—not with North Korea but with China. Rather than having Beijing talk to us about what we need to do to placate that nutcase Kim Jong Il, we need to be talking to Beijing about what they need to okay his takedown—either by an "offer he can't refuse" or a coup engineered by those around him through the promise of golden parachutes or a quick-strike invasion designed to get the man himself, along with his WMD.

The U.S. needs to stop trying to work this issue through Seoul, which will never get over its fears on the subject, and instead make the deal through Pyongyang's sole remaining backer—China. We need to figure out their price and display a firm willingness to pay it in spades. The relationship that needs to be built over Kim's grave is between America and China, with the end result being an East Asia NATO-like entity that locks-in a strategic relationship between us and China at today's relatively low prices.

The carrot-and-stick bullshit is never going to work with Kim, and the conversation with Seoul and Beijing never seems to get beyond their legitimate fears about North Korea's collapse in the face of heightened U.S. pressure. We need to move the conversation to where it needs to be: asking both countries but especially China what it wants on the far side of a Kim takedown and figuring out how best to deliver. Everyone knows what the likely asking prices are. The only question is, How much do we value Kim's removal?

For now, that crazy little man is running the show not just in Pyongyang but frankly in capitals all over the six-nation dial (the six countries that come together over this issue are South and North Korea, U.S., Japan, Russia and China). We are ceding all the initiative to him, as is he's the real issue here, when he's not. The real issue is the future of U.S.-Chinese relations.

We do the same thing with Taiwan: we cede control of the situation to that island and whatever leader it happens to elect. Because of our "defense guarantee" offered decades ago in an entirely different strategic environment, Taipei gets to drive U.S. national security policy toward China on this issue, which is just plain nuts.

The notion that America would sacrifice thousands and thousands of its troops to defend Taiwan from China after Taipei decided that it just couldn't live anymore without the word "Taiwan" appearing in parentheses behind its official name of Republic of China (a notion some experts fear will be explored following the coming December elections) is bizarre beyond belief. Taiwan isn't going anywhere economically except into China's orbit, as is the rest of Asia. That's an historical reality that's unfolding whether Taipei likes it or not. China isn't interested in torpedoing its economic juggernaut in order to militarily threaten—much less conquer—Taiwan. All it wants is to maintain the illusion that someday the two countries will be joined, even if they maintain completely separate governments and militaries. In short, China wants only to prevent the sense that reunification is impossible, and if that's the price for locking the Chinese into a strategic relationship at today's prices, I say we pay it.

The reality is, when push comes to shove on Taiwan, the U.S. won't be willing to come through on that defense guarantee. We decide when we go to war with other countries. We don't leave that decision to some politician in Taiwan whose dream of national self-actualization could easily end up costing America a huge number of casualties. It just ain't going to happen, and when you slap that operational reality up against the long-term strategic background of our emerging partnership with China on a host of global issues, even entertaining that notion seems rather incredible.

The Chinese leadership (not the people) are happy Bush won, because they see a guy they believe they can deal with him on economic issues effectively. The neocons have shown a willingness in the past to make difficult calls when the time called for it. They better be ready for one over Taiwan, because the scheduling of that call won't be ours to make under the current set of "guarantees."

The Core needs good news on both Turkey and Pakistan

"At the Gates of Brussels: If Recep Tayyip Erdogan gets his way, Turkey will be more Islamic and Europe will be more Turkish. Both would be good news," by Robert D. Kaplan, Atlantic Monthly, December 2004, p. 44.

"As Growth Returns To Pakistan, Hopes Rise on Terror Front: Exports, Malls Enjoy Boom, As West Ramps Up Aid; But Will Militants Notice? 'Economics Isn't Everything,'" by Jay Solomon, Zahid Hussain and Saeed Azhar, Wall Street Journal, 9 November 2004, p. A1.

In the first piece, Robert Kaplan does a quick tour of Turkish history and explains why the current prime minister Recep Tayyip Erdogan's moderate Islamic bent, coupled with his Western-style management degree, promises Europe exactly the type of non-radical Islamization it must inevitably undergo:

This December a hesitant European Union will decide whether to open negotiations for Turkey to join. Its hesitancy has legitimate and illegitimate reasons. The legitimate ones center on the difficulty of digesting a country of 70 million people—one that is far poorer and more populous than many of the Central and Eastern European nations recently admitted to the EU. The illegitimate ones center on the fact that—well, Turkey is Muslim. Does Europe want that many Muslims within its community?

The answer should be that Europe has no choice. It is becoming Muslim anyway, in a demographic equivalent of the Islamic conquest of the early Middle Ages, when the Ottoman Empire reached the gates of Vienna. More to the point, Turkey is not only contiguous to Europe but also is already economically intertwined with it. The only issue that remains is whether Europe will encourage Islamic moderation through economic development in Turkey. Though American troops are fighting and dying in Iraq, ultimately the Europeans, because of geography and their own demographic patterns, have more at stake in the stabilization of the region. And the surest way to advance that stabilization is to make Turkey part of Europe.

Never before has the West been so lucky in Turkey as now. The re-Islamization of Turkey through the rejuvenation of the country's Ottoman roots was going to happen anyway: Ataturk's republican-minded secularization had simply gone too far. The only question was whether this retrenchment from Kemalism would take a radical or a moderate path. Erdogan's political leaning suggest the latter. Europe should seize the opportunity.

If I were Bush, I would twist some Europeans arms until they fell off on this issue. But I would make clear to Turkey the quid pro quo: we need them to accept some serious ownership for the Kurdish portion of Iraq. Turkey needs to be the protector and mentor for that territory and its people. The Kurds have a long and very successful economic history within the Ottoman Empire and Turkey, and there is an historic responsibility for Turkey that goes with all that, as well as a real opportunity for Turkey to be recognized as not just part of Europe, but a security stalwart in the Middle East.

Iraq has been and always was a pretend country built by the British, much like Yugoslavia. Forcing the Kurds (20% of the population) and the Shiites (60%) to continue their abusive marriage to old Saddam's Sunnis (20%) isn't going to work—unless the U.S. encourages some serious local ownership of this issue by Turkey to the north and Iran to the South. Entrance into the EU is Turkey's legitimate price tag on this issue. It must be paid.

Over in Pakistan, all that special attention paid by the U.S. (bilateral free trade agreement, tons of military aid and cooperation, rescheduling of debt, quick flows of substantial economic aid) is paying off, as the economy there is booming at more than double the growth rate prior to 9/11. Its exports have doubled over the past six years and its reserves are up four-fold from before 9/11. With U.S. blessing, Pakistan is getting access to international credit in exchange for cracking down hard on the terrorist funding networks and the black markets they leached off of prior to 9/11. All this seems very good:

To U.S. officials, Pakistan is emerging as a laboratory for how Western economic orthodoxy can contribute to stability in countries fighting Islamic extremism. They hope that economic development and structural reforms will sap the appeal of militant groups in the Islamic world's third most-populous country.

The downside is typical of most globalizing situations: cities are booming but the countryside seems to be left behind, political reforms aren't keeping pace (but they're not backsliding either) and there is a vocal and determined minority of radicals that wants to tank all this budding connectivity with the outside world cause it's "evil." But the telecom industry is taking off like a rocket, attracting foreign direct investment in droves, and there's a rising consumer culture that's attracting a lot of global business attention.

But in the end, what threatens the hard-core Islamic population in Pakistan is neither connectivity nor economic development, but the content flows from the outside world that come with all those transactions. It's the social values, stupid! The sophisticated urban elite don't have any trouble with this, but the traditional countryside does. To them, no amount of rapid economic development is going to do the trick if it's seen as challenging their lifestyles too dramatically too fast. And yet we know that not globalizing its economy certainly won't get Pakistan anywhere it wants to go either, so it's all a question of pace.

Pakistan has been given a golden opportunity with 9/11, oddly enough because it has so many terrorists obviously living within its borders. If not for the strong military-to-military ties between Pakistan and the U.S., built over many years, there would have been an overwhelming argument to invade that country more than Iraq. After all, Pakistan is a major exporter of WMD, narcotics and terrorists, effectively checking all the major boxes of a rogue regime. But if the U.S. can continue to do it, we'd rather outsource the military intervention role to the Pakistani military itself, because it's easier and cheaper right now.

But mark my words: America suffers a WMD attack in the U.S. and we hear bin Laden crowing about it from some lair in NW Pakistan, and we'll be in there militarily big-time in seconds flat. So we need lots of good news from Pakistan—lots.

China: every which way but down

"China Sees Rise of a New Middle-Class Profession: Landlord," by Kathy Chen, Wall Street Journal, 3 November 2004, p. B1.

"China Prepares Rules on Direct Sales," by Leslie T. Chang, Wall Street Journal, 9 November 2004, p. A17.

"At 18, Min Finds A Path to Success In Migration Wave: Like Millions of Others, She Left Country for the City, Ill-Prepared for Life There," by Leslie T. Chang, Wall Street Journal, 8 November 2004, p. A1.

"China Faces Rash of Protests: Officials' Abuses of Power and Social Inequities Provoke Unrest," by Kathy Chen, Wall Street Journal, 5 November 2004, p. A10.

When I was in China, the photo I wanted to snap most of all, but never got, was the picture of the huge billboard showing this ultra modern high-rise complex that would soon appear on a site that—at the moment we were passing through—looked like some typical Third World bit of nothing. The juxtaposition of the image with the reality reminded me of booming America coming right out of WWII. The ambition and confidence were just that stunning.

What's so different about that scene today in China and what the gap between rhetoric and reality was both there and in the Soviet bloc during the bad old days is, in the bad old days, that gap was never closed, whereas today it's being closed at a stunningly fast rate all over China. There's such a boom in both real estate and rental markets that China's witnessing the rapid rise of a profession that really hasn't existed in that society for more than half a century: landlord.

Is there a risk of a real estate bubble? Sure, and like China's inevitable banking crisis, it will someday come. If were lucky on both, those System Perturbations will be limited to China alone, triggering a huge influx of new rules to deal with the consequences and prevent their reoccurrence. But have no doubt: that burgeoning middle class will be served.

Serving that middle class' needs is something China was seeking to do when it joined the World Trade Organization, which has mandated, for example, that the government "must allow direct-marketing companies to operate." But China has its own rules: you have to have registered capital of $10m in China, total sales of over $60m over the last three years, substantial bank deposits there, plus be members of the International Federation of Direct Marketing Associations.

Ah yes, very Maoist, the old IFDMA!

Amway and Avon . . . start your engines!

It's that kind of roaring opportunities that have triggered such huge migrations within China, where upwards of 100 million workers are considered "floating population," meaning they are economic migrants—typically from the countryside to the cities. These "migrant workers" aren't the underclass—far from it. Instead, they tend to be the most educated and ambitious young women who prefer not to be left "down on the farm" when that agricultural world has mechanized to the point where their labor is not wanted there.

You want a nutshell of the essential triggers of the Second Industrial Revolution in New England? You just heard 'em. That's where China is right now, right along with the labor unrest that we had here during those decades surrounding the end of the 19th Century and the beginning of the 20th.

I know, I know, many analysts in my business are always keen to hype this rural unrest, citing it as clear proof that China must either fall apart in massive civil war or revert to authoritarianism. There's no inherent need for such pessimism. We got through those decades, and so can China. It will force them to alter their political system significantly, certainly more than we did. Then again, they're moving through history at a much faster speed.

That's why how we mentor them in this scenario pathway may prove essential, although I suspect Japan will become the far more important mentor. Our job will be essentially to hold Beijing to the promise of its Theory of Peacefully Rising China.

India: almost too high-tech for its own good

"General Electric Sells 60% Of Indian Back-Office Unit," by Saritha Rai, New York Times, 9 November 2004, p. W1.

"Indian Economy Leaves Workers Behind," by John Lancaster, Washington Post, 3 November 2004, p. A8.

India's service economy has matured to the point where major corporations like G.E. are selling off the units they once created there to handle their "off-shoring" in-house. That says that big American companies no longer feel the need to own their back offices on site (called "captives" in the industry), instead preferring now to deal with independent local Indian companies. That's a sign of trust in what India has become over the last generation. It's a sign that India's really in the Core.

But the service economy can only account for so much growth and no more:

Notwithstanding the recent growth in industrial output, manufacturing companies in India employ just 7 million people, a tiny share of the country's estimated 406 million workers, according to the World Bank. Software and other information-based services account for fewer than 2 million additional jobs. More than 90 percent of Indian workers are employed as farm laborers and in other menial, mostly unregulated jobs, such as brick-making and rickshaw-pulling.

The situation contrasts with that of China, where foreign investment has given rise to thousands of new factories churning out such consumer goods as toys and clothes for overseas markets. China's manufacturing boom has provided jobs for tens of millions of semi-literate peasants and has created a middle class that is growing as fast as any in the world.

Many economists predict that India will not achieve similar success in manufacturing, or in alleviating poverty, until it becomes more hospitable to foreign investors. They say that achieving those goals would require scrapping a 1947 law requiring medium-size and larger companies to seek government permission before firing workers. It also would require major improvements in such infrastructure as roads and power, which is so unreliable that many companies are forced to generate their own.

"We're a couple of major reform steps away," from a manufacturing boom, said Subir Gokarn, chief economist of Crisil, an Indian credit-rating and research agency.

Hell, just having an Indian credit-rating and research agency tells you how close they are to making India the next China.

Think Ethiopia has one of those? No point in having a rule-set enforcer unless you got the rules.

The Old Core will redefine old age

"Old, But Not Retiring: Japan's Astoundingly Healthy Seniors Climb Peaks, Cross Deserts, Sail Seas," by Anthony Faiola, Washington Post, 27 October 2004, p. A1.

"America, Wake Up to the European Dream," by Jeremy Rifkin, Washington Post, 31 October 2004, p. B4.

The first article is about how a burgeoning population of relatively healthy seniors in Japan is redefining what can still be done physically by a nation's oldest citizens. Expect this trend to be replicated here in the States, right down to coming up with new phrases and terms to describe this far more vigorous lifestyle following retirement. Redefining the far end of life will inevitably redefine the middle and everything that comes before it, and this new focus on self-fulfillment (always the great skill set of the Boomers) will help balance life here in the States considerably, I believe. It will become a major source of the new Go-Slow Ideology that will soften the edges of both the American model of capitalism and the current era of globalization on which it's based.

But Europe will be the other great source of this Go-Slow Ideology inside the Old Core. Rifkin, in his new book, claims that the hoped-for United States of Europe will be "the first transnational political entity in history." This is complete nonsense. The United States of America was the first. We're just so much further along in that historical process that we don't even recognize it anymore as a multinational union.

Rifkin rhapsodizes about how the new generation of Europeans think of themselves primarily as—gasp!—Europeans rather than members of individual national states. Can you imagine such a thing?

Here's the real point of his book, which any European could have told you on their own: Americans live to work while Europeans work to live. I'm sure Rifkin's book is good, just like Robert Kagan's book recent book was, but when you can summarize the whole thing with one line, like "Europeans are from Venus, Americans from Mars," you're treading fairly familiar ground. But Rifkin's book seems to promise more. Here's a good clip from this book-hawking piece:

The American Dream depends on assimilation, but the European Dream is based on nations' preserving their cultural identity and coming together in a multi-cultural universe. The EU's inhabitants break down into 100 or more different languages and dialects, making the region one of the most culturally diverse in the world.

The American Dream is wedded to love of country and patriotism; the European Dream is more cosmopolitan and outward-reaching. Europeans now provide 47 percent of all humanitarian assistance in the world. (The United States contributes 36 percent.) While Americans are willing to use military force to protect our self-interests, Europeans favor diplomacy and economic aid to avert conflict.

Actually, the first paragraph I'm willing to buy, although my guess is that it will be magnificently less true 50 years from now. The second paragraph misses the point that there needs to be both balance and complimentarity within the Core: as it grows, the Core needs both the Go-Slow Ideology of Europe and the willingness to do the tough jobs like America has long displayed. A Core completely made of European-like attitudes would simply try to bribe the Gap into staying away, and would remain largely uninterested in trying to shrink it. But a Core made up too much of American-style anger management in security policies would end up keeping too much of the Gap in a tumult by using too much stick and not enough carrot.

Because Europe and the US are on such differing sides of the equation, we need a third pole to balance us both, and that's where the New Core comes in. China and India both get balance—that whole yin and yang thing. That's why they get PNM so well: they see the need for both realism and idealism. The New Core will balance America's Go-Fast with Europe's Go-Slow, yielding what should be Just-Fast-Enough in our efforts to shrink the Gap.

The best allies are incentivized allies

"Georgia Bolsters Iraq Troop Commitment; Country Increases Forces Five-Fold," by Irakli Jgenti, Georgian Embassy press release, 8 November 2004.

"Eastern Europe Eclipses Eastern Germany: Fifteen Years After the Berlin Wall Fell, Economic Situations Are Reverse of Expectations," by Marcus Walker and Matthew Karnitschnig, , 9 November 2004, p. A16.

Why does little old embattled Georgia decide to up its military contingent in Iraq from 159 to 850, making it one of the biggest per capita players in the U.S.-led coalition?

Because "Georgians have felt the pain of terrorism, so we truly understand the importance of this global effort. Our young democracy is proud to help the Iraqis taste true freedom," according to the country's ambassador to Washington.

No surprise. The U.S. is kicking a new military assistance program to help Georgia make this effort—in short, our capital and their labor combined. Get used to this deal and get used to it being concluded time and time again with states along the seam between the Core and Gap, because therein we find the newest and youngest parts of what eventually must become the Core. The Seam States are like the volcanic soil of globalization: the richest material coming right out of the most tumultuous experiences. They want to advance the Core and shrink the Gap because they want to move that seam as far away from their shores as possible.

Sound familiar? It's basically our national security strategy since 9/11, and it's knee-jerk as hell. But that sort of knee-jerk reaction is okay so long as it leads to the desired result, and away from the opposite knee-jerk reaction, which is to firewall off America as much as possible from the outside world.

Nothing wrong with being incentivized.

The reason why Eastern Europe has taken off economically while the former Eastern Germany—pulled into the loving embrace of its rich sister state—has clearly not, is because those states were incentivized in a way the former GDR was not. Eastern Europe had to swim or sink. It had to change rule sets like crazy because it needed foreign investment like crazy. Meanwhile, Eastern Germany was sucked into the labor regulations of Western Germany and had high expectations of a intra-country bailout.

So guess where the U.S. is drawing down its military presence and guess where it's plussing it up?

New Europe is incentivized.

The right and wrong ways to build connectivity

"Mobile phones take over in India: Indian mobile phone users have outnumbered fixed-line customers for the first time, according to the Telecom Regulatory Authority of India," by staff, BBC News World Edition, 9 November 2004, http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/business/3994761.stm.

"No bids for Algeria phone permits: Algerian regulators say there have been no bids for two fixed-line telephone permits which required $1bn-worth of investment," by staff, BBC News World Edition, 9 November 2004, http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/business/3670691.stm.

This pair of articles is about connectivity personified: telephones. David Ray of VA sent me the pair, thinking they were a great juxtaposition illustrating my vision.

In the first article, we're told something that—frankly—if someone had written it in a futuristic book 25 years ago, everyone simply would have scoffed at the notion: India's cell phone numbers (44m) have surpassed its landline numbers (43m). That's a bizarre notion from the perspective of conventional wisdom that long dominated thinking about the economic development of the Gap: supposedly you needed all that infrastructure to move ahead. But the info rev's "big push" allows you to leapfrog in that most socialist sense (the commies were always scheming ways to leapfrog ahead of the capitalists). What made it happen in India? The lowest cell phone tariffs in the world. That's it. Just lowering the taxes to make it profitable and bingo! You've got 44m cell phone users.

That's only a 5% penetration rate for now, compared to 50% or better in Europe and—one would expect—far higher rates in the US.

Meanwhile, check out Algeria's recent attempt to lure $1b in foreign direct investment to upgrade its creaky landline infrastructure. They put out two big fixed-line permits and no one made an offer. No one.

Why? Algeria's rigidly fixes its call prices at artificially low levels (the better to spur development in an egalitarian fashion!). Algeria prices its call at about one-tenth of its neighbors, and as a result, it remains far more disconnected that it needs to be, as telephone usage in Algeria is pretty limited (to the tune of 1 out of every 16 residents).

If you price a good like it's worth nothing, then it will be treated that way. Tell me this isn't bad government yielding bad connectivity.

A man who dreams big

"Spend $150 Billion Per Year To Cure World Poverty," by Daphne Eviatar, New York Times Magazine, 7 November 2004, p. 42.

"Roads Lead to a New Way of Life for Rural Ethiopia," by Celia W. Dugger, New York Times, 8 November 2004, p. A3.

I have heard a lot about Jeffrey Sachs from my friend Mark Warren, the executive editor of Esquire, because the magazine picked him as one of their Best & Brightest last year, plus he wrote a piece for them soon after, just like I did, so Mark got to know him somewhat, and came away awfully impressed. I've always heard good things about him, and the bad stuff tended to be criticisms I've often heard about myself, so I tended to cut the guy a break. His talent is legendary, and he's been a figure on the global stage for most of his career, so it's hard to come across a profile on him that has much new to say about his storied career.

This one does, but primarily because it tells the story of Sachs' latest global gambit, which is essentially convincing the Core to come up with a ton of money pronto to shrink the Gap once and for all:

In his version, Africa, through no fault of its own, is trapped. Held back by geographical impediments like climate, disease and isolation, it cannot lift itself out of poverty. What Africa needs, then, is not more scolding from the West. It needs a "big push"—a flood of foreign aid—to boost its prospects and carry it into the developed world.

To say this is controversial is a vast understatement: countries that get the most aid in the world today are at the very bottom of the growth ladder, whereas countries that attract foreign direct investment are at the very top. So why does Sachs think more aid will achieve a tipping point?

This article really doesn't say. Rather it suggests that Sachs is an opportunist who's arguing for a new view of development economics now because leaders across the Core are listening for ways to shrink the Gap out of fear of the terrorism that is breed there. Id don't say that disapprovingly, for I too am one helluva opportunist. As I wrote in PNM, it's one thing to have a great idea, but quite another to get in front of the right decision-makers at the right time. That's the difference between necessary and sufficient.

Then the article goes on to declare him a genius on several levels, but also suggests that he's making atonement now for all his years of pushing free markets in the former Soviet bloc.

So right now he's running around the Core trying to get leaders to sign up to the plan by giving them plenty of detailed plans about how the money would be spent. Logically, for him it starts first with food sufficiency. Why? You can't conquer traditional communal rule sets until you solve the food issue. Until then, it'll make sense for any backward country to stick with what they know and what's got them through the hard times in the past.

But having worked with the US Agency for International Development's Africa Bureau for a while, I know there are plenty of economic policies across Africa that—unless changed—will blunt the impact of money tossed in this direction. If anything, what USAID has learned in past decades is that the most important aid they deliver focuses on changing rules, rather than simply pumping money into bad systems.

Sachs wants the Core to cancel all of Africa's past debts, which isn't a bad idea, but again, how much does that change if nothing else really does? Sachs' reply? "The idea that African failure is due to African poor governance is one of the great myths of our time."

If it is, there are a lot of educated Africans themselves who believe it most of all. Sachs counters that when you control for income level, African governments are no worse than those anywhere else—an interesting argument. But the question still begs, How does giving a ton of money quickly to such governments lead to a positive outcome? Windfalls have a way of corrupting even the best people—witness the lives of lottery winners.

But the article goes on to say that Sachs has left the building as far as data is concerned. He's just into preaching now, and his new book next spring will describe the "end of poverty" through the "big push" he's advocating.

What should we make of his faith? Well, he had a lot of faith in "shock therapy" for Russia and Poland, which was his "big push" in the 1990s. A lot of people there, the article claims, still blame him for all the looting. In the end, people behaved an awful lot like people, instead of whatever Sachs believes them to be.

And yet, Sachs remains eminently respected, even if a lot of experts in his field think his current "big push" is no better than the last one he pulled. He's just that effective of a visionary: he gets the subject on the table and does what he can with it while it's there. And he's smart enough to know that there is a huge rethink on the nexus of security and development right now due to the Global War on Terrorism, so push while you can.

Me, I don't see a huge push of aid as the answer, but aid that focuses on connectivity first and foremost. In the beginning, that's simple stuff, like transportation connectivity, and you move from there. But in my mind, your rule set on foreign aid is simply, Does it leave the country more connected either internally and/or externally with the world at large? If you can answer yes to one or both aspects, it's good foreign aid. If you can't, it's probably a waste of money.

Road building is back in favor at the World Bank and it tends to do great things when it's applied in places like Africa, but here's the rub I've heard from experts in the field: the World Bank will pay for the building of a road, but not its maintenance, which it leaves to the state to figure out. That kind of attitude gets you roads that look great the minute they're laid, but deteriorate at high speed. To me, that's a corollary to the Pentagon's tendency to budget only for acquisition and training and never for actual operations.

In the end, you still need good governments to be able to keep up the roads, otherwise you end up with one big Rhode Island.

Hernando de Soto would be proud, Brazil!

"Cable Pirates Thrive in Brazil: Rather Than Fight Them, the Government May Legalize Them," by Todd Benson, New York Times, 10 November 2004, p. W1.

Cable piracy is huge in Brazil, but all that effort at connectivity—however illegal—represents a serious capital outlay when it's all added up.

So what's a government to do? Tear it all down and throw ordinary citizens in jail?

Or maybe just accept the idea and start charging people for the service, forgiving them the past transgression? After all, that's a lot of effort that would have gone wasted, pissing off a lot of voters, and just bypassing the chance at revenue.

This is pure Hernando de Soto stuff (making you wonder if he wasn't in on it, because he advises Brazil): accept the informal economy where you find, credentializing the assets accrued and allowing the system to take advantage of the taxes/revenues.

Here's how one Brazilian TV official put it:

"The cable companies are well aware that the problem of pirate television isn't going to be solved through police repression," he said. "We have to be intelligent. And that means letting a market that is already thriving continue to thrive by giving it the legal means to do so."

In other words, better to switch than fight!

Planning the SysAdmin follow-on from the start

"Rebuilding What the Assault Turns to Rubble: Seabees, Other Units Began Planning Early for the Reconstruction of Fallujah," by Jackie Spinner, Washington Post, 10 November 2004, p. A20.

We went into Fallujah with several thousand Marines and Army personnel, but also with $90 million in planned reconstruction efforts.

This Seabee says it all:


"A lot of trigger-pullers and pilots, they can do just about anything with their weapons," said Merola, 38, a reservist with the 7th Naval Construction Regiment, based in Newport, R.I. "But you don't want to give people a piece of flat earth to start over with when you're done."

Well said, Commander, well said.

November 9, 2004

Testimony to the Congressional Overseas Basing Commission

Dateline: Office of Force Transformation, Rosslyn VA, 9 November 2004

Just on my way out the door here after nice long talk with Art Cebrowksi. Heading to testimony on Hill to Overseas Basing Commission.

Below is the text of my opening statement submitted for the record both here and there:

TESTIMONY SUBMITTED TO THE OVERSEAS BASING COMMISSION BY DR. THOMAS P.M. BARNETT PROFESSOR, NAVAL WAR COLLEGE [9 November 2004]


First, let me thank the Commission on Overseas Basing for inviting me to testify here today.

Second, let me emphasize right from the start that I'm not an expert per se on the U.S. military's global basing structure. I am essentially a grand strategist who spends his time contemplating the long-term objectives of U.S. foreign policy with a particular focus on how the employment of military force around the world can bring about not just increased security for our country, but improve the global security environment as a whole. I have written extensively on this subject, and I know that it is primarily on the basis of my recent book, The Pentagon's New Map, that I was asked to testify today, so many of my comments here will involve describing how I think this new map informs future planning for U.S. overseas basing realignment.

The concept of the new map began with a simple geographic display of where America sent its military forces since the end of the Cold War. In my view, this distribution represents the natural demand pattern for U.S. security exports since the Soviet Union departed the scene. By the exporting of security, I refer to the time and attention spent by the U.S. military on any particular region's actual—or potential for—incidences of armed conflict or mass violence—either between states or within them. By my calculation, U.S. military crisis response activity over the past 15 years represents a roughly four-fold increase compared to the 15 years following the end of the Vietnam War. I come to that conclusion by adding up the combined total of the four major services' cumulative days of operations in these responses. It was not only that America conducted more operations over the last decade and a half, but also that these operations grew tremendously in length and complexity.

How did America deal with this tremendous growth in the world's demand for our exporting of security? Especially as the Pentagon itself was engaged in a long-term downward glide path in terms of personnel and resources? We essentially mounted five major responses:

1) We denied the existence of this rising demand, by adhering as strictly as possible to the tenets of the Powell Doctrine, which said in effect, "pull out of any situation as quickly as feasible"

2) We denigrated the importance and utility of the bulk of these responses, dubbing them Military Operations Other Than War, thereby justifying the Pentagon's well-demonstrated tendency to under-fund, under-prioritize, and under-man the skill sets associated with post-conflict stabilization operations

3) We tried to technologize the problem away, but unfortunately we spent the vast bulk of our money on the warfighting side of the house, effectively providing to America what it has today: a first-half team that plays in a league that insists on keeping score until the end of the game

4) We outsourced as many non-combat functions as possible, pushing them on to both allied militaries and private contractors, and

5) We ran significant portions of the Reserve Component ragged by turning them into de facto active duty.

In my opinion, the Defense Department has effectively run out the string on all of these responses: the Powell Doctrine has been overtaken by the events of this Global War on Terrorism; Military Operations Other Than War can no longer be counted upon to remain in the category of "lesser includeds," unless drive-by regime change is considered enough to constitute "mission accomplished"; the occupation of Iraq will invariably transform transformation, shifting its focus from the "first-half," or warfighting portion of the force, to the "second-half," or peacekeeping and nation-building portions of the force; this global war has clearly strained the ability of our traditional allies to mount sustained operations in support of U.S.-led interventions; and there is already credible discussion of the possibility of reinstituting a draft in order to meet the pressing needs of rotating our ground forces into and out of the current theaters of operations. In short, we have picked all the low-hanging fruit in our increasingly desperate responses to this burgeoning demand curve, to include our relatively understated drawdown of military installations across the United States in the 1990s.

If America is going to continue to pursue a Global War on Terrorism that many experts have logically argued will extend for not just years, but decades, then we must be willing to dramatically reshape both the structure of our forces (rebalancing them extensively in the direction of Military Operations Other Than War) and their positioning around the planet (the subject of this commission). I believe these two change processes are highly interrelated, and here I present what I think are the clarifying strategic concepts embedded within this "new map" for the Pentagon.


The Non-Integrating Gap (shaded) and Functioning Core (un-shaded) of globalization [from The Pentagon's New Map (Putnam, 2004)]

Included in my submitted testimony is a graphic of a global map (see above) whose shaded portions encompass what I have dubbed globalization's Non-Integrating Gap, or those regions that are both least connected to the global economy in a broadband fashion and have accounted for approximately 95 percent of crisis responses by the U.S. military since the end of the Cold War. Within this Non-Integrating Gap, I can locate basically all the wars, all the civil wars, all the ethnic cleansing, all the genocide, all the incidences of mass rape as a tool of terror, all the situations where children are lured or forced into combat units, all the active UN peacekeeping missions, and the centers of gravity for all the transnational terrorist networks we're targeting in this Global War on Terrorism. This Non-Integrating Gap marks both the effective limits of the spread of globalization in terms of deep social, political, economic connectivity and associated content flows, as well as the spread of stable governance that defines the lack of mass violence and armed conflict throughout what I call the Functioning Core of globalization, or those countries and regions not shaded on this map that have enjoyed both collective peace and the rapid integration of their national economies since the end of the Cold War.

It should come as no surprise to this Commission that the U.S. military has closed over 150 major bases across the Core since the end of the Cold War, while adding more than two dozen—and counting—inside the Gap. The U.S. military is the world's largest security consulting force, and like any consultancy, it needs to be as close as possible to where the client lives. Since the end of the Cold War, our clients are found almost exclusively inside the Gap, and hence our Defense Department has slowly but surely adjusted to that defining strategic reality of our age.

Now, the current-and-future administration proposes a further and far more dramatic overhauling of that global basing structure, and if you check the contours of my Non-Integrating Gap, you will see that this plan greatly conforms to the strategic security environment depicted here: in effect, all this administration is proposing is to move as many fixed bases as possible closer-in toward the Gap, while experimenting with a host of smaller, temporary-style installations (the so-called lily pads) sprinkled throughout the deeper, interior reaches of this Gap—most specifically in sub-Saharan Africa.

As a whole, I heartily approve of all of these moves to relocate the U.S. military's fixed presence and operational centers of gravity away from the past successes of the Cold War and nearer to the future challenges of this Global War on Terrorism, because I see this geographic rebalancing of the force to be a prime prerequisite for my declared strategy of "shrinking the Gap" by exporting security to the worst pockets of instability and rogue regime activity found therein. Without such a long-term commitment on our part, I would find it impossible to contemplate how many of these disconnected countries and regions would someday enjoy sufficient stability to count themselves members of a deeply integrating and secure global economy. And in my mind, that is what America's grand strategy for this century should be all about: making globalization truly global and ending the disconnectedness that defines the world's chronic sources of mass violence and armed conflicts, which--in turn-- breed transnational terrorists. If there is to be a finish line in this Global War on Terrorism, our progress toward it will be marked by a succession of basing realignments in the decades ahead.

That last statement constitutes the first of my caveats regarding this administration's current plans for realigning base structure globally: because I do not believe this historic round of proposed realignments will be our last, I caution national security planners to think as flexibly as possible about the nature of the new, seemingly long-term relationships we're currently building as we move bases from western Europe to eastern Europe, and from east Asia to west Asia.

Let me explain why I think such flexibility in planning is in order, and—by doing so—describe what I believe is truly flawed about the U.S. military's current Unified Command Plan. Specifically, let me describe what I think are the three key boundary conditions that limit Central Command's ability to conduct its share of the operations in this Global War on Terrorism.

First, CENTCOM’s "tactical seam" lies to its south, meaning that as the U.S. and its coalition partners are successful in driving transnational terrorism out of the Middle East, that fight—fueled as it is by a fundamentalist Islamic response to the "Westoxification" imposed upon traditional societies by globalization's creeping embrace—will head out of the Persian Gulf and into sub-Saharan Africa, where we already see the beginnings of such violent conflicts being repeated. So whatever realignments we pursue in coming years must take into account the possibility of that success in order to take advantage of its unfolding. In my mind that means that when we construct bases both around and inside the region of the Persian Gulf, we should view those facilities less as permanent features of the strategic landscape and more as the first step in what will be a long-term progression of military fronts deeper inside the Gap. What complicates this likely scenario pathway is—of course—the reality that CENTCOM's area of responsibility does not encompass sub-Saharan Africa (at least at this time).

Second, CENTCOM's "operational seam" lies to its north, meaning that a key indicator of our success in going on the offensive in this Global War on Terrorism is seen in the return today of the same pattern of operational reach for Middle East terror networks that we once witnessed in the 1970s and early 1980s—namely, they can strike at will across the Middle East and extend themselves with significant effort into the southern reaches of the European continent (expanding now to include the “near abroad” of the former Soviet Union—to Russia's significant distress). As in the case of sub-Saharan Africa, it can be said that CENTCOM simply does not talk nearly enough with these affected countries lying outside its area of responsibility. But, of course, many of these same countries are ones the U.S. is counting upon to supply it the "close-in" bases of the future. Over time, CENTCOM's area of responsibility will become the "near abroad" of virtually all of what I call the Functioning Core of globalization, so this war will be far less distant than we might imagine, even as we continue to be successful in our attempts to keep it far from our own shores. Thus, in our efforts to move bases closer in to the action of the Middle East, we'll need to be careful to avoid the impression that we're luring unsuspecting new partners into the fray, in effect causing them to draw fire.

Finally, CENTCOM's "strategic seam" clearly lies to its east. Already, Asia as a whole takes the lion's share of the energy coming out of the Persian Gulf, dwarfing what this country imports from the region. Our energy requirements will rise by less than a third over the next two decades, whereas Asia's will roughly double over the same time span. In short, we can expect India, China, a united Korea, and Japan to all come militarily to the Middle East in a much bigger way than their miniscule efforts to date. They will come either to join the growing security alliances our current efforts in the region will hopefully someday beget, or they will come to salvage what security relationships they can out of the strategic disaster we have generated by our mistakes. Either way, these Asian powers will be coming, because their economic interests will eventually compel it. My point is this: nothing we should do in this realignment process should be construed by any of these states as constituting a zero-sum strategy on our part to deny them military—much less economic—access to the region. If anything, our base realignment process should not only encourage stronger military ties with all of these states, but do so in such a way as to facilitate their eventual entry into the region under the conditions most conducive to our long-range objectives of transforming states there into stable members of a larger security community that will be—by definition of both geography and economic transactions—more Asian in character than Western.

Let me end with two final caveats: one general and one specific.

In my book I argue for a “back to the future” outcome in U.S. force structure planning, one that admits we already have a transformed warfighting force without peer, or what I call the Leviathan force, but also sees the need to invest in and transform what I call the “everything else” force, or a major portion of the U.S. military that is optimized progressively to conduct peacekeeping, low-level crisis response, humanitarian and disaster relief, nation-building and other postconflict stabilization operations. I dub this latter force the System Administrator force. Short-handing these two forces in terms of service components, I would describe the Leviathan force as coming primarily from the Air Force and Navy (our fundamental hedges against the resurrected possibility of great power war) and the SysAdmin force coming primarily from the Army and the Marines. My caveat regarding this natural bifurcation of the U.S. military is this: the bases we position around the Gap, but still inside the Core, should be optimized for the projection of warfighting power. In effect, they should serve the needs of the Leviathan force. Conversely, the bases we generate within the Gap should be optimized for the long-term presence of largely ground troops whose main activity will be centered around peacekeeping and nation-building.

This is an important point in my mind, because it’s counterintuitive to most analysts, who would prefer to see our bases circling the Gap serve as permanent forward deployments of massed combat force, whereas any bases we’d generate inside the Gap would remain largely empty store fronts, or Spartan-style facilities designed merely to enable the throughput of overwhelming force that would be employed only sporadically and always leave the scene as quickly as possible. In effect, I am arguing for the complete opposite: I think our forward bases surrounding the Gap should be the empty shells designed for the rapid throughput of warfighting assets, whereas the bases we build inside the Gap should give off the impression that we’re in it for the long haul. In my vernacular, the Leviathan force comes and goes as required, but the SysAdmin force represents those “boys” who never “come home.” If we are serious in committing ourselves to the long-term defeat of transnational terrorism, these are the strategic signals we should send in our global basing realignment process.

Finally, a more specific caveat: any efforts to move our forces closer-in toward the Gap will necessarily remain geographically uneven so long as two great insecurities grip East Asia—namely, the continued existence of the Kim Jong Il regime in North Korea and the potential for conflict between the United States and China over Taiwan's potential moves toward "independence" from the mainland. There is a huge Cold War victory to be advantaged in Europe, basically represented by the existence of NATO. No similar peace dividend exists in Asia, meaning that the Achilles' heel of this realignment plan is—in my opinion—that it leaves far too much strategic decision-making power in the hands of actors in both Pyongyang and Taipei, neither of which should be trusted to act rationally regarding their own interests—much less ours.

I'll end my comments on that frightening note, leaving any others for our subsequent question-and-answer period.


November 8, 2004

Okay, so the Danes aren't the Dutch!

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI, 8 November 2004

So stop the emails!

You know, people should be a little more tolerant. I think it was Nigel Powers (father of international man of mystery Austin Powers), who said once: "There are only two things I can't stand in this world. People who are intolerant of other people's cultures. . . and the Dutch."

So maybe I just let it slip once! (or three times).

Easy, peasy, lemon-squeezy . . .

Review here! Getcher Barnett Review here!

Hey Folks. . . Critt here. . . we're making progress on the Review (The Barnett Review.)

T.M. Lutas. . . no, that's not right. . . I mean Lexington Green. . . no, that's not it either. Wait a minute! Maybe it's the Danes (I'm pretty sure it's not the Dutch.) D'oh!

Ok, I got it now. The first set of subscribers -- everyone who stuck up their hand by this morning -- have begun self-organizing as an informal Advisory/Editorial Board. They'll help decide the content, format and delivery, and how best to offset costs for the first edition.

Next week, we'll announce a contest to name the Review*. The rules -- yeah, we
gotta have a rule set for this gig -- will be simple and easy to follow. We'll post the details Sunday night, November 14th.

The publication date for the Review's first edition is November 24, 2004.

Be there, Aloha! (or something to that effect.)

Subscribe, suggest, or comment by sending an email to review@thomaspmbarnett.com

* know anything that rhymes with blogozine?

Testifying in front of Congress' Overseas Basing Commission

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI, 8 November 2004

Here's the press release:

FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE FOR MORE INFORMATION: Wade Nelson, 708-204-0711

OVERSEAS BASING COMMISSION HEARING SET FOR NOVEMBER 9

Commission’s third public session will receive testimony from military leaders and Defense policy experts

WASHINGTON, D.C., November 2, 2004 -- The Commission on the Review of Overseas Military Facility Structure of the United States (Overseas Basing Commission) will hear testimony from former military leaders, diplomats and defense policy experts at a hearing to be held beginning at 9:00 a.m , Tuesday, November 9, 2004, in room 138, Dirksen Senate Office Building, 1st and C Streets, N.E., Washington, D.C.

This will be the third meeting held by the Commission, which was established by Public Law 108-132 to provide Congress and the President with a thorough study and review of matters relating to U.S. military facility structure overseas. The law requires the Commission’s report to include a proposal for an overseas basing strategy to meet current and future Department of Defense (DoD) missions.

The Commission’s task is to assess independently whether the current overseas basing structure is adequate to execute current missions, and to assess the feasibility of closures, realignments, or establishment of new installations overseas to meet emerging defense requirements. The Commission’s report will serve as another data point to assist the Congressional Committees in performing their oversight responsibilities for the DoD’s basing strategy, future military construction appropriations, and the 2005 Base Realignment and Closure Commission determinations.

At the November 9th hearing, the Commission will receive testimony from three panels of experts:

Panel One: Begins at 9 a.m.

Dr. John J. Hamre, Former Deputy Secretary of Defense and Under Secretary of Defense (Comptroller);

Ambassador Robert E. Hunter, former U.S. Ambassador to NATO and U.S. Representative to Western European Union.


Panel Two: Begins at 10:30 a.m.

General Charles A. Horner, former Combatant Commander of North American Aerospace Defense Command and U.S. Space Command, as well as the Commander of 9h Air Force and U.S. Central Command Air Force during operations Desert Shield and Desert Storm;

General Montgomery C. Meigs, former Commanding General, U.S. Army, Europe and 7th Army, and Commander of Multinational Stabilization Force in Bosnia-Herzegovina;

General Charles T.“Tony” Robertson, Jr. former Combatant Commander for U.S. Transportation Command and Air Mobility Command;

General John H. Tilelli, Jr. former Combatant Commander of the United Nations Command, Republic of Korea/United States Combined Forces Korea and President of USO Worldwide Operations, as well as Vice Chief of Staff the Army and Deputy Chief of Army Operations.


Panel Three: Begins at 1:30 p.m.

Prof. Thomas P.M. Barnett, Senior Strategic Researcher, U.S. Naval War College;

Marcus Corbin, Senior Analyst at the Center for Defense Information;

Michael Noonan, research fellow (defense policy) and the National Security program director for the Foreign Policy Research Institute.


The OSBC began its operations in May, 2004. Public Law 108-324, the Fiscal Year 2005 Military Construction Appropriations Act, extended the Commission’s reporting period until August 15, 2005.



HTML Version of interview with Raeson

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI, 8 November 2004

Gonna be busy today writing up testimony to Congress' Overseas Basing Commission, where I am testifying tomorrow on an afternoon panel with two other experts.

Here is the HTML version of the interview with Raeson:

A Hammer Looking for Nails: The Gap, The Core and The Final Frontier


“The tumult created by globalization’s creeping in on the Middle East was going to create anger and violence and terrorism. When 9/11 comes along, and the connections are clear to us--at least for an instant--the United States (frankly, nobody else has the firepower to do it) decides it has got to change the Middle East in a big, big way, looks around and says: “who can I start with?” It decides on Iraq, and I say “that’s as good as anybody.” So are we going to kick his ass militarily in the war? Yes, absolutely: supreme confidence there. Are we going to screw up the occupation? Absolutely! Why would you advocate going even if that is going to happen? Because this military is not going to change unless it experiences failure on that far side.”


An interview with Thomas Barnett by Henrik Ø. Breitenbauch, co-editor of RÆSON

Thomas P.M. Barnett is an unusual and influential strategist in the American defense environment. A special element in Barnett’s work is a widening of what ‘strategy’ consists of--its conceptual space is extended from purely military perspectives to include not least economic, social and political development.

He is Senior Strategic Researcher and Professor at the Warfare Analysis & Research Department, Center for Naval Warfare Studies at the American Navy’s university, the U.S. Naval War College. From November 2001 to June 2003 he held the temporary assignment of Assistant for Strategic Futures in the centrally important office, Office of Force Transformation under Secretary of Defense Rumsfeld, which is dedicated to the strategic transformation of the American military in response to the changed security agenda after 9/11. Barnett has given a wide-range of important briefings in the US defense community; he is the author of a number of articles about the strategic concepts he has been developing since the late 1990’s; and recently he published the book The Pentagon’s New Map: War and Peace in the Twenty-first Century. Articles and other material is available from his website: www.thomaspmbarnett.com.

The starting point for Barnett’s thinking is that the combination of globalization’s economic integration and the state of nuclear deterrence means that war between advanced states, who participate actively in the functional integration, will soon be practically irrelevant. Therefore, we ought therefore to focus on the non-integrating parts of the world, both because this is where the real threats stem from, but also because addressing those threats properly means helping the regions to catch up. Based on an analysis of US interventions since the end of the Cold War, Barnett constructed the Pentagon’s “new map,” where we can distinguish the integrating Core from the Non-Integrating Gap. His basic policy recommendation is simple: ”shrink the Gap.”

In this interview Barnett talks among other things about how it would be possible to construct a more efficient solution model for deciding how and when the Core should use force with regard to the catastrophes of the Gap.

(1) Connectivity, not democracy

(2) The terrorists are those who do know better

(3) You do not have to become a bad Moslem to live a good life

(4) A hammer looking for nails

(5) Iraq: The Yugoslavia of the Middle East

(6) The final frontier


1. Connectivity, not democracy

HOB: Let us start with the Gap-Core distinction: how clear is it that either the global situation or America’s challenges can be adequately summarized in the Gap-Core logic? There seems still to be some issues with the new Core-members like India, Russia China--might “old security” concerns not return at some point?

BARNETT: The point in making the distinction between the Core and the Gap is not that I am saying that there is not any possibility of security issues re-arising within the Core. But simply that with the connectivity of an expanding, ever deepening, enmeshing global economy; with that kind of interdependence naturally arising among the old Core--between the United States, the Europeans, Japan, Canada and Australia--there is not really any danger of anything happening other than name-calling. Between us and what I call the New Core, there is and will be for quite some time, the possibility for more than name-calling: that integration process requires new rules to emerge.

You cannot bring Russia sort of into NATO without changing NATO, and not as a result make that a different Rule Set. Look at China buying up our US Treasury Bonds and becoming the biggest source of the US trade deficit; or India supplying all the IT-workers and doctors to the United States plus remitting such sums of money back to India in terms of non-residential Indians who work and live in the United States. That kind of integration processes cannot help but create new Rule Sets. They always tend to come in the economic realm first.

Typically, political understanding lags greatly behind it: it can be summed up with phrases like “nationalism,” “protectionism” or that natural tendency--when you start bumping up against one another and you have not done that in the past--to assume bad things about each other. The unfamiliarity of this new interaction means that there are dangerous possibilities. So there are a lot of things that we are going to learn and adjust to as, for example, India becomes a much bigger part of not just the U.S.'s but the whole world’s economy. To understand what it is to have Russia actively involved in world affairs, when for several decades it was always on the other side of the fence. To have China develop this tremendous integration with the outside world. All that forces us into all sorts of questions and issues that have been dwelling and lingering for decades that are not easy for us to answer. There are a lot of adjustments when you open up to the outside world: America thinks we have adjustments as the global economy expands. We talk about sending jobs overseas and think it is a tough adjustment for the US workers who may have a assumed that a good economy would have allowed them to stay in the same jobs for their entire life, never have to go back to school, never switch careers: that whole ideal that we cling to comes from the 1950s, and it's very unrealistic. And we think that is a big adjustment in terms of globalization.

But having just spent three weeks in China, I can tell you: that country is undergoing so much more adjustment, so much more change, so much more synchronization of its internal Rule Sets with those of the world’s (which is what the global market economy demands from it) that it seems like such a jumping-the-gun phenomenon for us to always be looking for slippage, always be putting the worst sort of perspective on the motivations behind anything that Russia, India or China do as they deal with some significant changes. They have in recent years changed from economic policies that were very state-heavy for many decades and moved towards the embrace of markets in a very profound way. You would think we would be happier but it is almost like we look for every opportunity to say: “you are not going fast enough and far enough, and--aha!--that means you, secretly, deep down, inside, must be a threat!”

We have wished for this to happen for so many years and when it does happen we cannot believe it: we have such great suspicion towards these three big countries. I think about them a lot because they hold such a big chunk of the world’s population and if you can remove that kind fear factor within the Core a lot of things will work out pretty dramatically.

____________________

On Russia, India and China: We have wished for this to happen for so many years and when it does happen we cannot believe it: we have such great suspicion towards these three big countries.

____________________


But India and China do not feel like they have been invited into the corridors of power. They are part of G20, but they are not part of G8. They kind of wonder how the G8 gets to figure out what happens in Iraq. The G8 had this meeting in Sea Island [G8 Summit, June 8-10, 2004] and there decided what they were going to do about the future of the Middle East--and there was no China there.

HOB: So there is a homology between the global situation with the three big countries and the post-cold war challenge with the eastern European countries. In Europe, the Partnership for Peace was a way of letting the East in: an example of how we have to find ways to be receptive?

BARNETT: Right, the PfP is sort of a microcosm of what I am talking about with Russia, China and India--because they are such vast countries, and the cultural distance is stronger, so the distrust is stronger. We keep complaining about our change: but we have so little understanding of the kind of change that it requires for them to make this great journey. We do not signal ways that “we can make you feel comfortable about your security situation, for you to feel confident enough to deal with these wrenching, internal social changes.”

One of the reasons why I think the Core-Gap distinction is important--and which always stuns these Cold War types when they see it--is that my Core is basically what we used to call the First and the Second World together. And now it is finally time to deal with the Third World in some way other than hospice care through official development aid and selling them arms so that they can kill each other.

HOB: This is an extremely interesting thing about your analysis: the European left has been saying for 30-40 years that the North-South relation is the more important, and here comes someone from the Pentagon policy making environment saying something akin to it?

BARNETT: Right, I agree with that to a certain extent, even though I studiously avoid the “North-South” concept since I have my ABC’s in South America [Argentina, Brazil, Chile], like Australia and South Africa are in the South. I try to focus on: who’s connecting up? I studiously avoid “democracy” as some sort of bellwether. Instead I look at whether connectivity is growing between any specific society and the outside world, and whether its government in fact encouraging that? So I focus less on where they are in their historical development, and more on whether they are going in the right direction. I want to capture the integrating countries in the first, best behavior I can find, rather than having a huge standard: “a freely elected president for five times; and clean up everything!”--like the EU has been telling Turkey for how many years now? “Be perfect before we take you!”

2. The terrorists are those who do know better

HOB: It seems like you do not really distinguish between a material or economic globalization on the one hand and a cultural or ideational on the other? Is that distinction meaningless?

BARNETT: I really think it is. Consider the sheer physical connectivity of networks--you build networks so that you can do things, and when you do things economically the ideas and the content naturally flow. That gives such a tight synergy, and as long as that is happening I feel good about it. My argument on the political side--which is always slow--is that you have to be patient, and you have to let the local political scene evolve at a pace that it can manage. I argue for a lot of patience with Russia and China, because I watch them just leap-frog through decades a year at a time, and we are watching them race through our past history with such a sense of impatience of them getting to the “right now.”

We do not understand that the real world we now enjoy is not something they can achieve overnight: so let us get out of our way to assure them that they will not be targeted unnecessarily in the security realm; that they will not be forced to maintain large security hedges when they are scrambling for resources, when they are dealing with aging population--as even China is--and when they have huge infrastructure and resource requirements. If they are going to move in the direction that we hope they move--which will benefit us tremendously in economic terms – then all we need to do is step beyond old fears and take advantage of the successes of the cold war. That ideology was defeated. We just seem unwilling to move along that line and to claim the successes. But until you do move along and see the world in terms of who is integrating and who is not – then you are not going to get to the point where you are able to amass the resources to deal with this Gap, which is where all the violence is.

_______________________

If you do not want it to be a West versus Islam thing, then do not alienate the biggest players in the East.

_______________________

If you do not want it to be a West versus Islam thing, then do not alienate the biggest players in the East. Either they live closer to the problem, like Russia; or they see themselves as natural regional powers, like India; or they are going to have their energy requirements from the Persian Gulf doubling over the next 20 years like China. Compared to their interdependencies with that region, ours and even the Europeans’ are small. If you look strategically downstream they are the logical partners for us to be romancing. And how do you romance them? You tell them a story with a happy ending, and you say: “if you do these things, even if a lot of them will be hard, then this is where we can all go 20 years from now. It will be such a better world; you will have such a better country; and you will have done so many good things for your country…”

HOB: This positive vision, and optimism, is interesting coming from a strategist--because it clashes with both the classical war games-stuff of the military academies, and also with the widespread critiques of globalization from both left and right on both sides of the Atlantic. Pessimism seems to be more on the agenda anywhere else--how do you “dare” to just come along with a positive strategic vision?

BARNETT: Well, I am just looking at history. We have seen tremendous things happening when countries come together economically in what I call the Old Core--Europe, Japan, the United States. By 1980 that was one tenth of the world’s population controlling two-thirds of the wealth and productive power: a lot that can be done by that kind of cooperation. We have waited almost 50 years for the old socialist block to give up its pipedream and join us… I see our side gaining adherence in big, big chunks. The size of the problem set called mass violence around the world has been shrinking fairly dramatically. When I got into the business 15 years ago we were still concerned about nuclear war across the planet: people are not really concerned about that anymore, and they should not be--other than the issue of the rogue who is not part of the club. If Iran, for example, was part of the club, then their having the nukes would never be an issue--about as big an issue as Denmark having nukes. Nobody would care – they would say: “it’s the Danes, what’s the big deal?” Or the Canadians. If Canada wanted nukes tomorrow who would really care? They are read into the system and everybody trusts them, and there is a sense of familiarity and a common cause.

If the US was forced to switch territory with the Canadians, most Americans would just move to Canada: it is not the soil here that is sacred, it’s the concept. My book is constantly being accused of not understanding the irrational mind--but my response is: the irrational mind is the unconnected one. The irrational mind is the one that goes berserk because they do not have options for their talents and their ambitions.

That is the lawyer with three kids who straps a belt on with dynamite in the West Bank because that looks like the best option for him after going to law school: that is the best future he can come up with. But if you can give him a job a law firm somewhere I guarantee you, he does not get on that bus. The terrorists are not the ones who are so poor they do not know better: it is the ones who do know better, that have an education they are never going to use, and dreams they are never going to fulfill. Nothing kills people more than the sense of a dead-end life.

_______________________

That is the lawyer with three kids who straps a belt on with dynamite in the West Bank because that looks like the best option for him after going to law school: that is the best future he can come up with. But if you can give him a job a law firm somewhere I guarantee you, he does not get on that bus.

_______________________


I see such a huge opportunity with what has happened over the last 25 years with roughly half the world’s population on their way to be joining the world economy. Has it been a perfect ride for them? Absolutely not: look at Brazil or Argentina. This process is more an art than science. To join is to risk a lot: the process of connecting is such a brave act that we have to go out of our way to recognize, promote and protect it--and to do as much as possible to remove security impediments to it, and to send clear signals of transparency and security to these countries. The trajectory that Russia has been on for the last 15 years; China for the last 25; and India just for the last 10 is just stunning. Because their societies are exposed to these strong, external influences this is the perfect time to shower them with security.

We do it on one level when the US tries to deal with the big security issues in the system in a way that nobody else can because we have the world’s biggest military. But how we explain that action and how we solicit their approval and their cooperation is enormously important, convincing them that this is not a zero-sum outcome. That: “we are not going to the Middle East to grab your oil, China!” That we are going to secure the flow of that energy for another 20-25 years until we move on to hydrogen; and that in doing so there are certain things we need from, for example, China. in terms of economic and diplomatic support.

But in exchange for that we are hopefully creating an international security environment that allows China not to revert resources toward things like a blue water navy to make sure that their energy comes from the Middle East safely; or it does not force them to patron relationships with rogue regimes there out of necessity because they are scared to death they will not have access to energy over time.


3. You do not have to become a bad Moslem to live a good life

HOB: This is where you advocate a special role for the US where it supplies public goods on a global level?

BARNETT: I do not advocate a “one size fits all," as we have been doing for 15 years, saying as long as we have a big force that prevents war between the big powers then the system will work itself out, globalization will spread, connectivity will grow--that is sort of the benign Thomas Friedman vision. . .

HOB: Regarding the special role the United States must play due to the military capabilities, how would you address the ensuing division of labor? How far should the United States be able to pursue its role in terms of making decisions on behalf of the West, the “Core of the Core," including e.g. NATO?

BARNETT: The Clinton Administration put a model on the table where we go in and deal with the real nasty security stuff--and as soon as possible turn it over to the UN and everybody else, and they would do the integration process. Our niche was to be light on aid and heavy on military spending; the converse would be true for the Europeans, and the Japanese would just send money.

The problem was that the UN was not the vessel for that: it is such a Congress-like entity, a legislative branch, without a real executive function. The best you have is a group that can cite bad activity around the world, but does not have any means to deal with it. The hope is, if the UN condemns somebody that they change their ways and somehow get beyond the violence and then we can send the peacekeepers in.

But there is a huge gap between those two situations, and that gap is filled by the US, which says “Well, if you’re really serious about this we will go in, but if we do it has to be cast in such a way that we can have freedom of action, because it is our lives that are at stake. Then hopefully you will rally around once the bad guy has been taken care of.” We have been trying to negotiate those things on the fly each time the issue comes up, and it is tortuous. It took years to get anything done in Yugoslavia. That would have continued ad infinitum. Given that the global economy would have run smooth enough in its expansion then the rest would just have been scary neighborhoods far away, and we would all have talked about it, but nobody would have done anything about it. The US enabled that “we’ll do a little bit, but no more” practice across the West in the 1990s by just responding enough to crises throughout the Gap.

HOB: After Somalia, that is?

BARNETT: Well, Somalia looked like a big turning point but it really was not: we kept doing these things. But while we keep everything from boiling over in the Gap we never fix anything. There is no system for dealing with fixing these countries. The only way we could avoid getting in to some imperial nonsense was to make this rule: “As soon as we cannot find anyone to kill in a situation, we’re gone!” That is the Powell doctrine! “As soon as you cannot find anymore bad guys to kill--then leave”. The problem is that if you do not leave anything in your wake, then the bad guys will reappear and we have to go back in five years. There are some in the Pentagon who argue openly for that: “Let’s go in and kill them every once in a while: they will never change anyway.” And I keep saying: “Well, that’s not much of a solution, sir.”

_______________________

That is the Powell doctrine! “As soon as you cannot find anymore bad guys to kill – then leave”.

_______________________


That whole debate did not move along until 9/11--which was an example of what happens if you nurse it along without curing it. Eventually, and that is my larger argument, your good thing will encroach upon their bad thing. But their bad thing is traditional and goes back centuries. And your stuff comes in through cable or the internet, and you are impinging whether you realize it or not. When the violence against and rejection of the West really starts to pick up is when globalization starts to impinge on the Middle East--and why it does so in ways it does not in Africa is of course because of the energy.


_______________________

Changing US foreign policies will not change anything about the Middle East. If you stop supporting Israel: does that mean there will not be repressive regimes there that suck at globalization and do not provide for their publics? No, that is not going to change that at all.

_______________________


Globalization is happening, and the Middle East will be relevant for energy reasons for at least another 25 years. But changing US foreign policies will not change anything about the Middle East. If you stop supporting Israel: does that mean there will not be repressive regimes there that suck at globalization and do not provide for their publics? No, that is not going to change that at all. The Europeans do this even more than us: constantly blaming ourselves saying “No, it’s really my fault, it’s what I did in the past. If only I was more sensitive in a multicultural sort of way; if only I could understand why they treat their women in ways I would never stand in my country, as minors their entire lives, then….” That argument just drives me nuts!

There are all sorts of people from that region living in Europe and the United States and they like living there: they do not seem to have given up their souls to do that. You do not have to become a bad Moslem to live a good life. I reject this social Darwinist argument which to me is the real fallacy of Samuel Huntington. Thomas Friedman said some get it--globalization--and some do not; Huntington said some people are never going to get it because of who they are. I add a third pole to that argument: anybody can get it. Where the “getting it” part has not extended itself to is where all the violence is. Where they have “gotten it” there is still some concerns about mass violence--most of them overblown I would argue--but the real violence is where people have not had the chance to “get it” yet, the chance to join the world.

There is no mystery why these things do not happen easily. There are huge wrenching changes coming with it--in areas like marital relations; sex relations; family; the good life; good education; loyalty to your family, your tribe and your village; and concepts of mobility that are very threatening to traditional societies (especially ones that are built around the notions that you stick together, that women are for having babies, that you make food, and do not try radical changes because that will get you a bad harvest and that will get you dead!) They are very traditional and hard scrambling existences: they are very low on Maslow’s hierarchy of needs, still working on shelter and food in many instances. Yet we expect them to embrace the same cosmopolitan lifestyles we have achieved, where people, except for the marginalized in our society, do not worry about food anymore.


4. A hammer looking for nails

HOB: You are arguing for the convergence of our policies of security and development with regard to the Gap. To which extent will we see increased coordination or convergence of these kinds of policies in the West?

BARNETT: This is where the theme of connectivity is nice--it gets you off the norms of democracy, and just says: “You got to have the infrastructure and networks, and people have to have a certain level of security.” And we start to realize that in order to deal with these security issues we also have to deal with the infrastructure and networking issues. The notion that you send aid to some places and war fighters to others breaks down: to really defeat a Saddam is to integrate Iraq, and to do that is to do development politics. What holds up our ability to get security there is people’s inability to get electricity, water and move sewage. All of a sudden the two become incredibly merged.

We have a disparity here of capabilities: [On the one side] a US with a “Leviathan force” as I call it, able to destroy real dangerous elements inside the Gap. But it is almost a hammer looking for nails, because unless you can do the integration on the far side of the conflict, wielding that hammer is almost useless, or worse than useless. It scares people so much, that you almost risk the unity of the Core to employ it. I mean: did everyone in the Core want to see Saddam gone? Sure, he was a bad guy, and it was better for that oil to flow. And the hope is that Iraq will develop on that basis--even though the record of countries developing on the basis of oil is pretty bad.

So everyone had the same desire, but the fear was that if the Unites States was going to do it, how were they going to handle the aftermath? And there we sent all the wrong signals. We said in effect: “If you’re not tough enough to show up for the war, don’t show up for the peace: don’t expect to be cut in on anything!” That was a huge, colossal blunder on our part, a very macho view of security as if the only thing that matters is the “blowing up” part. We have learned since the occupation in May 2003 that our people get killed just as quickly in the peace keeping as in the war part. Actually, more quickly because we do it so badly.

What would it take to get Europe and other Core countries comfortable with this process? You have to define it from A to Z--and you have the pieces for such a system now, from start to finish. How do you deal with a politically bankrupt state, a regime that everybody wants gone? We do have a version for economically bankrupt states: it is called the IMF. It is a very controversial version, and there’s a lot of suspicion and anger surrounding the IMF: but a least we have a system for dealing with economically bankrupt states. As soon as Argentina or Brazil starts to default on their debt, we have a system where you go in at A and come out at Z, and you are successfully processed without any prejudice at the end. We are constantly fine-tuning that IMF Rule Set. But look at how it is done. Who runs the IMF? The biggest countries in the world--and why? Because they are the richest countries and you vote by how much money you put in, which is very fair: you put up the money, you get the say.

We do not have that system for politically bankrupt states. When they are really politically bankrupt like Mugabe or Kim Jong-Il we just say: “There is nothing for processing them; shouldn’t the UN do something about it?” The UN then debates it, and maybe they will get to the fact--usually well after the fact that many people were killed, and it becomes so obvious that the situation is a bad, bad thing that we finally have the conscience to say something about it, like Sudan today. And what can the UN do? They can indict you. It is actually a grand jury, even the UN Security Council: they cannot actually issue any warrants for your arrest. They can say: “you should stop, and if you do not stop, we will not let you sell sugar for the next ten years,” and slap some really meaningless economic sanction on you--which historically has almost never done anything of value, unless it was universal like with South Africa under Apartheid.

_______________________

People say: when are we going to make the UN stretch across that whole process? I know it is written in the Charter, but good luck with that concept: it is never going to happen.

_______________________


That is what is at the beginning of this process. People say: when are we going to make the UN stretch across that whole process? I know it is written in the Charter, but good luck with that concept: it is never going to happen. Downstream from that grand jury you have a US Leviathan military force, which operates with a few close allies--NATO, Australia, etc--and that force is able to make the takedown. But how do you connect that ability with the decision making process? This where the G20 comes in: the G20 is the star chamber of everyone who matters in the global economy. When you take the 20 biggest economies, you really get the whole package, about 90% of the wealth. The G20 is where you will find all the money and the authority, where you can locate the entirety of the Core. If just that body could evolve over time, as you see it struggling with ever since 9/11, where security issues have been dominating the G8 meetings. The Sea Island meeting was an Iraq meeting! They barely talked about the global economy. They are already aspiring to that role without saying it. If you made that G20 a package that could have an executive function, where it could say: “the UN has said these guys are bad, we all agree that they are: could we come to some understanding that the Leviathan should be used?”

Then you could have the Leviathan be put into service with the knowledge that a System Administration force on the far side--where the US has a much smaller role, and the allies around the world a much larger--will come in once the take-down (or “the correction” or “the security element”) has been dealt with. If you employ the Leviathan force inside the Gap in this manner, then there would be an upfront agreement that the SysAdmin force will come in the Leviathan force’s wake. That force, a very manpower intensive function, takes the occupation through its phases effectively.

Then you have another gap being filled on the far side of that: an international organization like the IMF but one that specializes in exactly what we are talking about--that weird mix of security and development. This is what Sebastian Mallaby of the Washington Post calls the IRF--the International Reconstruction Fund--like a perpetual Marshall Plan for politically bankrupt states designated for rehab. Who would fund that IRF? The same G20 that would make the decision upstream in the process. They would vote according to how much money they would put into it. And then you have the International Criminal Court on the far end. It is that kind of A to Z function: then you would have a real system.

If you can get that system up and running, I guarantee you that most of the dictators would leave on their own volition because as soon as they went on the list they would know that their time was up. These guys are mostly about their money and their women--given the opportunity most of them would do a Baby Doc Duvalier and get the hell out of Dodge before the sheriff comes. When you lay it all out like that it all sounds kind of dreamy: “Oh, would it be nice if it all worked out!?” but it is not that hard to work out, most of the pieces are already there.

_______________________

If you can get that system up and running, I guarantee you that most of the dictators would leave on their own volition because as soon as they went on the list they would know that their time was up.

_______________________

The UN Security Council does its thing even if it takes its time. We have a got a G20 that is moving in this direction or at least the G8 part is, as they are already having these kinds of discussions: that meeting on Sea Island was basically a meeting to bless the US decision on Iraq and get people to pony up money for the reconstruction. We are basically fumbling towards this system. We have the Leviathan force, the US military that can take down anybody that matters inside the Gap. I would argue that we do have the pieces for the SysAdmin force, but the key piece that we do not have is an understanding of the necessity of putting together the SysAdmin force--and this will not happen until the United States says it will invest in this force.

I talk to foreign militaries all the time: when the Americans put the hub down, then the rest of them are more than happy to supply the spokes. The SysAdmin force is a military that they can interact with; it is a technology they are comfortable with; it is a mission they are ideologically comfortable with: it mixes heavily with development issues, deals with things like AIDS, pandemics and the environment--all these holistic issues that people want to have dealt with. It is a wonderful package, but nobody is going to move in the direction of that kind of permanent international stabilization force unless the US shows a commitment to it. But once the US does that, I would argue that the resources that the US would have to put into would not be that large. The Europeans and the Japanese--and ultimately I think you could bring the Russians, the Chinese and the Indians into this--they are more than happy to participate in this kind of thing. This simple act of cooperation on that security effort would, I would argue, create much deeper security ties across the Core as whole. Then we would have the resources between the G20’s money and military…

5. Iraq: The Yugoslavia of the Middle East

HOB: But do you see this happening within the Pentagon? Is there a move towards this kind of stabilization force?

BARNETT: There is. The Pentagon will change according to failure.

HOB: Like most organizations?

BARNETT: Yes, but it is particularly true for the militaries. The worst thing that can happen to a military is that they win a war because then they sit on their mountain top and expect that it is going to last for ever--until somebody bonks them over the head. The best thing that can happen is that they lose a war, because then they really learn something. This is why--not cynically--I supported the Iraq War. Something was going to pull us into the Middle East, it was going to happen. There is not much that goes on between the Middle East and the world other than oil, a few nuts and terrorists: there is not a lot of economical interaction. But there is some real penetration content-wise, which can be destabilizing like mass media flows: young girls can watch TV-shows about life in Western Europe and the United States and they realize that women live in different ways in those parts of the world--and think: “I’m never gonna do that.” That creates much diminished expectations, anger, angst and unhappiness: Nothing drives people more nuts than that. Whereas before, they were happier because they so to speak did not know any better: being barefoot and pregnant all their lives. Because that was all they knew. And that was all women knew in Europe 200 years ago, and in the United States 150 years ago. So these are not alien concepts to us: they are just things we have forgotten.

I knew that the tumult created by globalization’s creeping on the Middle East was going to create anger and violence and terrorism. When 9/11 comes along, and the connections are clear to us--at least for an instant--the United States (frankly, nobody else has the firepower to do it) gets in its mind that is has got to go fix something, in the Middle East. It decides it has got to change the Middle East in a big, big way, looks around and says: “who can I start with?” It decides on Iraq, and I say “that’s as good as anybody.” Here we have a guy that nobody likes; a place that has been sanctioned for years; that we have been bombing for 12 years; and it is smack-dab in the middle--sort of a Yugoslavia of the Middle East. If I can go in there and create some change and stir things up, that’s as good a place as any, especially since I get two birds with one throw because he was a bad guy and should go anyway.

So are we going to kick his ass militarily in the war? Yes, absolutely: supreme confidence there. Are we going to screw up the occupation? Absolutely! Why would you advocate going even if that is going to happen? Because this military is not going to change unless it experiences failure on that far side. To see and experience that failure is a compelling reason to change. Because if we do not get better at that SysAdmin work then we will never have any successes in the Global War on Terrorism.

To me it is not illogical to pack Iraq, 9/11 and everything together, because I am trying to approach the problem at the system-level. Killing Osama is not the answer: it would be like curing one computer virus and believing that you have then solved your network security problems for the next 50 years. Either you fix the system as a whole--or you accept that you will have to shoot at anything that moves in certain parts of the world for the next 50 years, and I find that morally bankrupt. That would be condemning a big chunk of humanity to a horrible existence. But is it harder to go in and make that change happening? Absolutely. You are going to lose lives and kill a bunch of people in the process – but sitting back and hoping that the Middle East is going to get better in 30 years without making some sort of effort is … that will be like the last 30 years, just uglier.

_______________________

Globalization is coming to the Middle East, and we have to integrate it. If we do not go there security-wise, the Russians and the Chinese and the Indians would be coming, and eventually the Japanese too.

_______________________


To me, all these things are racing towards the inevitable. Globalization is coming to the Middle East, and we have to integrate it. That energy has to come out of there, because developing Asia needs it, and we need developing Asia. If we do not go there security-wise, the Russians and the Chinese and the Indians would be coming, and eventually the Japanese too. We can get there first, and try to make it a good thing, make it cooperative and a benefit to the region as a whole. Or we can wait until it gets really bad, and poor China gets so desperate that it starts doing something crazy or scary or intimidating. And we would go: “Hey, you shouldn’t be doing that,” and then we would have ourselves a nice cold war brewing in the Core again. We could then tell the Middle East: “Here are some arms, pick a side”--back to the joy we knew for 50 years because it is so damned comfortable. Or we can deal with this problem, which will not go away and only get worse without our attention.

As I say somewhat controversially in the book, 9/11 was sort of a gift from history: it is this trigger that allows a lot of possible, difficult processes to begin. We need some real serious discussion over this: where is globalization going; where is China going; where are the Russians going; the Europeans? Certain things are going to happen over the next 35 years--you Europeans are aging demographically, you will need more energy. When you make that kind of empirically-based argument you can have better discussions over where this situation is going, and then maybe you will avoid phrases like “exporting democracy”, or the “global war on terrorism”--and you can try to come up with something a little more benign, like “Shrink the Gap”; “connectivity”; “Globalization does not come with a ruler, it comes with rules”; and the mixing of security and development economics. These strategies require a lot of key players to put aside non-zero-sum attitudes that we have had for along time, and which we assumed would hold sway in a Balance of Power world that would naturally re-emerge after the Cold War.

But it has not: what has emerged is a much skewed form of power. The Europeans are the leaders in rule making; the Americans are the leaders in profound new technology and the ability to wage war; the Chinese have this amazing new power in making [manufacturing] everything; the Indians have this bizarrely tilted power in Information Technology; and the Japanese are sort of this new center of cool and design and fashion. There is a tremendous package of talent and resources, which is coming together on its own--and if there was no Gap we would not care about it, just go along with economic integration, and find something else to bitch about, like gay marriages or something.

But because the Gap is there, not only do we have to recognize this tremendous interdependence that we are developing in the global economy, but we also have to put it to some use. Doing that requires us to go back into the past that most of us would prefer to forget, especially the Europeans. The Americans come off as cowboys--I certainly do in some people’s eyes--for saying: “Hey, look at the violence there: it can perturb your system in a very negative way.” With just two planes two buildings are going down, excluding the Pentagon: that can change a lot of rules for you overnight. Either you can deal with that power and that anger, or not. But do not pretend it is not there. If you are willing to do it, you have to understand that you will be traveling back in history to some scary places, to some scary kinds of violence with people willing to scalp their victims and cut off their heads.

_______________________

With just two planes two buildings are going down: that can change a lot of rules for you overnight. Either you can deal with that power and that anger, or not. But do not pretend it is not there.

_______________________


Economically we are already there. Politically nowhere near. Militarily there is the US--and then everybody else standing around going:

- “What are you gonna do about it?”

- “Well, I think I am going over to kill them”, and that scares the hell out of everybody:

- “Well, we want you to go kill them but please don’t do it in a scary way!”

And we start calling each other names over who is going to pay for it. Meanwhile, the violence and the pain and the suffering go on in the Middle East--and Africa just burns. And nobody does anything about that.

I look at the package of capabilities inside the Core: we have got it all, everything we need to do this. If you can just get past your pinhead attitudes and your great power politics--elevate yourself to a strategic understanding, for just a minute: what has to be done over the next 20-30 years? This we can predict with great certainty I would argue, in terms of demographics, energy and the entire economic transformation. These are not great mysteries, even though people want to pretend that they are. The logic is of dealing with this situation in a comprehensive A to Z fashion, one that admits that you cannot foreign aid these things out of existence. Nor are you going to bomb them out of existence. You cannot kill them all, and you cannot "social work" them to death either. It has to be some very complex combination, where you will kill bad guys, and where you will nurse other people back to health. It is within the Core’s capabilities.

The political imagination, the dialogue and the language can be changed--that is why I wrote the book: to get that positive vision out there. It is sad that in democracies we have to scare ourselves so, to do something security-wise. If you make a logical argument about the exertion of security, then people will say: “Who will die for your war? You must be doing this for empire; you must be doing this so multinational corporations can go around the world and exploit labor!”

_______________________

Talk to somebody who has no multinational corporations exploiting their cheap labor: it sucks, it’s called Central Africa!

_______________________


And I say: “Your point? Yes, I am: it is called development! Talk to somebody who has no multinational corporations exploiting their cheap labor: it sucks, it’s called Central Africa!” But show me a place where they do have them do it, and yes the first generation’s life looks like England in the 1890s: they work in factories and the conditions are rotten. But their kids go to school and become something better, and then their kids' kids become something even better. That is how we did it. How do we expect everyone else to magically jump ahead? During the Cold War, I would watch Star Trek and dream of a future where we would get past the nuclear Armageddon thing, and all come together. It is basically here, now what?

6. The final frontier

HOB: So basically the mission in the Gap is to boldly go where no man has gone before?

BARNETT: It is our final frontier! It is exotic and scary and will require difficult things of us. But you are not a bad person for doing that kind of stuff: in many ways, we are moving away from paradigms of war to paradigms of police work. Across the Core we do have cops, and it is robust system. In the Gap there are no cops: you can kill 100.000 people before anyone cares. Hack them up with machetes, and throw their bodies down the river, and maybe five months later the UN will say: “that’s really bad, you should stop!” So we are talking about extending police work.

_______________________

In the Gap there are no cops: you can kill 100.000 people before anyone cares. Hack them up with machetes, and throw their bodies down the river, and maybe five months later the UN will say: “that’s really bad, you should stop!”

_______________________


China is the only one in the Core we should really worry about, and my guess is that we only have to do that for another 10 more years. Some see a scenario like: “Oh, my God, you’re gonna create a global police force, but somebody’s gonna come along like Nazi Germany, and then you won’t be ready for it because you’ll be the British Empire tending to that instead of getting ready for the Nazis!”

But I do not think the hedge required to prevent that scenario is that big. We are at a unique point of history in terms of the interconnectedness of the global economy and the fact that nuclear weapons effectively rule out major power war: we have an opportunity--if we can just enunciate certain things, and it takes more than regular political leaders to do it. That is why I, as a Democrat, actually find myself supporting Bush more than Kerry, because he speaks in terms of right and wrong, good versus evil. You need a certain amount of that to get people up to do it, because these are not easy things. You need Putin to be Putin sometimes. If you say: “Well, why don’t you negotiate with them?” then he will say: “They just killed 300 of my kids! Why don’t you go negotiate with Osama bin Laden?!” At some point you have to say: “That doesn’t work!” You don’t have to be tragically naïve, just because you’re sensitive or something like that: Sometimes bad guys need a bullet through their head. You cannot shy from that, and if you do it well you will save so many more lives.

_______________________

We have an opportunity--if we can just enunciate certain things, and it takes more than regular political leaders to do it. That is why I, as a Democrat, actually find myself supporting Bush more than Kerry, because he speaks in terms of right and wrong, good versus evil.

_______________________


When I put out my vision like this it is very black and white. Some people see only the upfront sacrifices, not the potential gain, and say that what I talk about is perpetual war. And there are others who think this is really a chance to save a lot of lives. It is something that requires us to come together, like the Europeans.

Globalization is happening, and if we can just latch on to some of these integration processes and use them in such a way as to mitigate suffering in these parts of the world that are not integrating: Then we really kill two problems at the same time, not only do we deal with that suffering, but we avail ourselves of new opportunities--for investment, and yeah: for cheap labor, and we exploit it. Then we can all really get through this stalemate that we have had for many, many decades in the third world, where we used to say: “We’ll get to you eventually”.

HOB: And eventually could be now?

_______________________

This administration is doing much of what I argue for, but I do not claim that they are following my logic--I claim it to be the logic of the world. They are employing almost a Nixonian sort of secrecy on it, as though the world would not trust them on it.

_______________________


BARNETT: Eventually should be now! I would argue that it will also be inevitable because of the demographics. The book tries to be a theory of everything, because I believe a theory of everything is required for people to understand these systems. This administration is doing much of what I argue for, but I do not claim that they are following my logic--I claim it to be the logic of the world. They are employing almost a Nixonian sort of secrecy on it, as though the world would not trust them on it. In that secrecy, which is almost pathological, many people are rushing in to fill the gap--with conspiracies, charges, accusations and labels. And then it all gets to the point where you have this “Europe is from Venus, the US is from Mars,” as if that captures where we are in history right now! I can just hear somebody from Africa say this and add ironically “I can really see the difference! You’re rich, healthy, fat, living the good life and I live in constant war! No wonder you people can’t get along!” It is hilarious the differences we continue to see among ourselves, compared to what it really means to be shut out. Go to Africa, some parts of Latin America; South East Asia or the Middle East where people are really, really shut out of the process. And it's not surprisingly that there are people who feel ripped of and sometimes want to do something about it.

It feels very fortunate that 9/11 came along to finally put thing into sharp relief. It allows me to make arguments that I think ultimately are very compassionate. That should attract Europeans with their nanny-state mentality: I’m giving you two and a half billion people to go nanny! And when they act up, the Americans will go kill them and you won't have to do the hard stuff. Or, those scary people can come kill you--and they will: they'll show up on election days and blow up their backpack bombs.

Europeans are all familiar with this sort of terrorism, by and large. You have gone through a lot of terrorism, and somehow that has deadened you to what has to be done--you have kind of made your peace with it. Americans are somewhat schizophrenic on this, since we accept 30,000 deaths a year with gun violence--but bin Laden can go commit 3,000 murders on television one day, and we will be so mad about that that we will go invade countries.

But thank God we still react violently to terrorism: that it still lights a fire under us, and it is finally lighting one under Putin. We can either deal with it or we can choose not to, but it is not going away, and this globalization process will not stop just because we stop supporting the Israelis or get off oil or something like that. The older I get the more convinced I get that life is accomplished by those rushing to embrace the bad things, because you may as well get it over as soon as possible. I learned that when my daughter got cancer at age two, which I write about in the book. It really taught me something about strategic planning: dealing with difficult things in the right fashion, not dragging them out.


November 7, 2004

The Interview with the Danish international affairs magazine Raeson

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI, 7 November 2004

Beautiful day here in Rhode Island. Kevin and I went to a fun run over in Warwick (across the bay on the mainland) that was held in this gorgeous tree-lined park along the bay. Reasonably flat course. My Kevin, age 9, started sensibly for once (9:00 first mile), then cranked a nifty 8:23 for the second, and did the remaining 1.1 miles in 8:31. He finished just out of the money in the 1-18 age group (4th), but beat his beat time of 28:18 by a whopping 2:14, coming in at 26:04, or an 8:24 mile pace. He put a huge kick at the end, catching a boy who was maybe 5 inches taller. Best of all, only two times does he stop to walk, and both times I immediately talk him out of it without any effort. Plus, no complaining about anything during the race. He's really beginning to master himself in this venue and it's a lot fun to witness. He's going be death on wheels by the time he hits high school, because he'll a very experienced racer.

But the real fun is just spending the time with him, and seeing his sense of accomplishment and self-discipline grow.

Easy week coming up (I hope): just three events in DC over a reasonably paced trip (testimony to Congressional commission, sit-down with Art Cebrowski at the Office of Force Transformation, and a meeting at the Cato Institute, which I've never visited [their invite]).

Too much house-cleaning today, so I'm tossing out an interview (the Danish version is found online at http://www.raeson.dk/tpmb011104.htm) in the Danish international politics magazine called Raeson, which I'm going to guess means "Reason" in English. The interview was conducted many weeks ago in early summer by Henrik Østergaard Breitenbauch, who is Co-editor of Ræson, a Research Assistant at the Danish Institute for International Studies, and a PhD Candidate in International Relations at Copenhagen University. I expect an invitation from one of these organizations in the next few weeks for a trip in the spring that might encompass several days and numerous speaking engagements.

But for now, all the Danes get is this interview, the English version of which can be found in PDF form here.

I'm fairly happy with the interview. I wasn't in the best mood when I gave it (I do remember that), so I just let her rip, because I find that I sound more like myself when I do that than when I try to sound all measured and academic. Østergaard, like most Europeans, conducts a pretty good interview, so it wasn't hard for me to sound all the notes I wanted to sound.

The only thing that surprised me about the interview (posted 2 November) was how much of it Raeson ended up publishing (13 pages!). Naturally, Østergaard came up with a suitably intimidating photo to go with it, and I guess I don't really care for the title, because by using a phrase that I am arguing against in terms of paradigm, it misconstrues my vision a bit, but--frankly--I hate the titles most pubs come up with anyway(except Esquire), so why should this one be any different?

As for the "Final Frontier" bit, I deserve that one simply for mentioning Star Trek, which automatically tags you as a bit spacey in some people's minds. Still, the "final frontier for globalization" is not bad: . . . where no rational actor has gone before!.

I think what I like about the interview best, is that I had a good chance to make a key point in spades: the US needs to be about spreading connectivity, not mandating content--especially in politics. That "patience" argument is crucial to avoiding the asinine-yet-inevitable "perpetual war" label.

November 6, 2004

Another month on the Foreign Affairs bestseller list!

Dateline: above the garage in Portsmouth RI, 6 November 2004

First dinner in a while with the family last night, and boy, did they let me have it for the absence! Big Chinese meal with cake from world’s best bakery, Mad Hatter of Newport, and then I took all four kids to see “The Incredibles,” which really was a great movie from stem to stern.

Today was just catch up: a bunch of work on the lawn, washing sheets, taking the three youngest for a long trail bike ride (me pulling the two youngest in a Burley buggy), then Mass, swimming at the Y and the usual DVD Saturday night date after McDonald’s.

Nothing really in the Times this morning that I wanted to blog anyway, but I am happy to cite the fact that I made the FA bestseller list for the sixth month out of seven since the book came out in April (dropped off in August, largely because I simply stopped briefing and disappeared into China the entire time).

While on the road this week, I saw the November/December issue of FA, and it had the composite bestseller list for August/September. I came in 9th on that one. In this current one (posted 2 November for the month of October, I came in at 12th, which is a drop from 6th in September, but what the hell, I’m still on the list after many books that came out with me in April and May have long since passed into the beyond, so I enjoy while I got it, like staying in the triple-digits on Amazon (#605 right now).

Here’s the entire list and see you tomorrow:

Foreign Affairs Bestseller List

The top-selling hardcover books on American foreign policy and international affairs. Rankings are based on national sales at Barnes & Noble stores and Barnes & Noble.com.

POSTED NOVEMBER 2, 2004

1 Chain of Command, by Seymour M. Hersh, HarperCollins (last month #2)

2 America's Secret War, by George Friedman, Doubleday (new)

3 9/11 Commission Report, by National Commission on Terrorist Attacks, Barnes & Noble Books (new)

4 Running on Empty, by Peter G. Peterson, Farrar, Straus & Giroux (4)

5 Imperial Hubris, by Anonymous, Brassey's (3)

6 Our Oldest Enemy, by John J. Miller and Mark Molesky, Doubleday (new)

7 The Fall of Baghdad, by Jon Lee Anderson, Penguin Press (new)

8 Nuclear Terrorism, by Graham Allison, Henry Holt (11)

9 When Presidents Lie, by Eric Alterman, Viking (new)

10 9/11 Commission Report, by National Commission on Terrorist Attacks, Norton (1)

11 The European Dream, by Jeremy Rifkin, Tarcher (5)

12 The Pentagon's New Map, by Thomas P.M. Barnett, Putnam (6)

13 Blood and Oil, by Michael T. Klare, Henry Holt (15)

14 The Missing Peace, by Dennis Ross, Farrar, Straus & Giroux (9)

15 Banking on Baghdad, by Edwin Black, John Wiley & Sons (new)

November 5, 2004

Some face time with Mark Warren

Dateline: Continental flight from Newark to Providence, 5 November 2004

"Arafat reportedly alive but in grave condition: Middle East braces for end of an era," by Paul Wiseman and Michele Chabin, USA Today, 5 November 2004, p. 1A.

"U.S. prefers diplomacy with Iran, but conflict possible: Relations continue to worse over nuclear ambitions, support of terror," by Barbara Slavin, USA Today, 5 November 2004, p. 11A.

Getting my ass home after five briefs spread over four days, with a total audience in the range of 1,750, with a neat mix of flag officers (CAPTSONE on Monday in DC), intell analysts (AFCEA on Tuesday in MD), junior and senior officers (Air War College and Air Command Staff College on Wednesday in AL), and under- and graduate students in Princeton on Thursday in NJ).

Last night's effort in Princeton was pretty good. Never been to the college before, or the Woodrow Wilson School, so it's nice to check those boxes. The audience was small (by the week's standards) but fairly intense in their concentration (you can tell when the laughter bursts out like that—almost against will). Plus it was a weird mix of earnest young faces (students) and some wizened visages (some profs, some walk-ins). So a strange interweaving of facial expressions, as young students often give you that glowing, very open-face look of absorption (with that hint of anticipating the next, toss-off line they know will be funny if they can just process the reference fast enough), whereas elders tend to give you that slightly pained, this-bit-rate-is-a-bit-high-for-me expression, which can look uncomfortably close to indigestion after a bad meal (I try not to take it personally).

I started very poorly. The fatigue factor was huge, as I almost fell asleep in a chair in my hotel's lobby prior to the talk (I begged for early access to a room as I actually contemplated a nap—something awfully rare for me). But then I got a call on my cell from some journalist writing for a Marine Corp something or other and he wanted to talk about the proposal out there to generate either a separate African Command or shift sub-Saharan Africa from European Command to Central Command. The journalist had read PNM, so it was a fairly easy conversation (my usual response: neat move, but a very downstream, minor change compared to the rebalancing of the force I advocate in my Leviathan-SysAdmin model).

Then I worked a couple of slides, adding new animation that puts on screen some verbal text that I have become so used to using each time I give the brief that it finally made sense to help the audience out and give them the visual cues on top of the language (my brief's bit rate is very similar to a Nintendo game).

Treat for me was that Mark Warren, executive editor of Esquire and my good pal and editing guru of everything significant that I've written since 9/11 (the two articles for his mag, PNM, and the to-be-penned A Future Worth Creating), was in the audience with his father-in-law, a big brain of the hard-science type (chemist). The chemist's take on the material was typical of a lot of smart people I brief: he said he would need to watch the show several times before he got it all down in his head. Some briefers would be appalled at that judgment (telling me to dial down my fire-hose delivery), but I think it's just great, because it brings them to the book and the blog—all of which are meant to be experieneced like a really dense LP you want to listen to over and over again to get it all down in your skull.

I'm not interested in competing in the usual sound bite marketplace of ideas; I'm looking to create an army of thinkers who step beyond that conversation and see the connections in the whole, who get the military-market nexus, who understand war in the context of everything else. When you try to change language and mindset as I am trying to do, you're only interested in those willing to put in the serious study time. The ones who simply glance over the material and sigh, "perpetual war!" are ones you need to dismiss out of hand, because you can't create synapses that aren't there, just muscle up the ones the natural horizontal thinkers have but tend to under-appreciate.

Is there an age component to that capacity? Sure. In general, people have that capacity for horizontal thinking (seeing the connections across fields) much better when they're younger than when they're older (same reason why it gets tougher to learn new languages as you get older; you keep trying to fit new sounds into old hearing patterns). Then again, hard scientists (surprisingly enough) are often better than soft ones (like political scientists) in horizontal vision. I know that sounds counterintuitive, but it's true. There's actually far more pinheads in my field than, say, chemistry.

Also, there's a generational aspect to it, something I see in my own kids in spades. Kids growing up today have a far greater capacity for horizontal thinking than my parents' generation, who were generally taught to color inside the lines and stay within their designated lanes. My son Kevin's displayed intelligence at age 9 tells me he'll be a difficult fit in traditional educational settings his entire life, as he's almost a pure horizontal thinker (obvious to anyone who's ever watched him play either the piano or Nintendo at warp speed), which often gets mistaken for Attention-Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD). Anyone who's ever had a dinner conversation with me will attest to how close I come to that definition (imagine Robin Williams merged with Dennis Miller and you almost capture my scattershot-yet-circular/repeating conversation flow). But frankly, that skill-set is why I can put on the show I do and—in certain circles—get paid a lot of money to do it. So when Kev says, "Dad, I wish other kids didn't think I was so weird all the time," I say, "Kev, some day people are going to pay a lot of money just for the privilege of watching you be weird for an hour or so."

Along those lines, when the orphanage director in Yongfeng handed us Vonne Mei back in August, her only exasperated advice (translated to us by guide David) was: "This one . . . only thing she sees is the new toy . . . only thing that matters." I know some parents would find that sort of exclamation sort of frightening, but I just smiled to myself as Vonne took Mei in her arms and one word popped into my head: perfect!

After the talk, I went to a dinner with about a dozen Princeton grads and undergrads, almost all of whom had more stuff to cite on their resume than I had when I was 35. I felt for one guy, because all he could say in his introduction was that he basically went to school at Princeton. I was basically that guy during my time at Harvard: had virtually nothing on my resume other than good grades, wasn't particularly articulate in settings like that (pretty quiet actually), fairly plodding writer, no connections to speak of—nada. In short, horizontal thinkers like myself tend to be late bloomers, because it takes so much longer for everything to come into focus. The good part is, we tend to stay young forever, because we're like toddlers our entire lives—always the new toy . . . only thing that matters.

After dinner with the students, which was a lot of fun and took me back to my days at Harvard, I sit down with Mark Warren in a local bar and we discuss the book. I value face time with Mark quite a bit, because despite our strong friendship and intense collaborative style over the (now) years, we've actually only spent maybe . . . 24 hours together face to face.

So we talked about the next book a lot and how the prospect of the second Bush Administration changed that. But since the AFWC is going to be about how to fix the world over the next two decades, it can't contain any analysis or projections that live or die with what the neocons are looking to achieve over the next four years.

And yet, asking that question (What's next for the neocons?) is a good one, one that helps me distinguish between what are the likely best steps toward A Future Worth Creating and what are likely missteps. I've been fielding this question everywhere this week, because that's the big question hanging out there on Bush II: Where is this all going to . . . at least next?

So, having been forced by circumstances several times already this week to posit what my advice would be to the President, I ran Mark through my basic argument right now about the two most important countries to Bush's second term: Iran and China. Since you already know my take on the utility of viewing China as a putative near-peer military competitor, you might be guessing that my advice would be: Take on Iran next!

But it would not. In fact, my advice would be pretty close to the opposite on Iran, because I've long believed that having Iran on the "rogue" side of the ledger will continue to deny us the stabilizing outcome we seek for the region as a whole (and if no one's gonna say it, then I will: Die Yassir! Die!). I want that outcome, but I want a cemented strategic relationship with China as much or more over the next four years, because I'm convinced we need to lock in that embryonic security bond as well as similar bonds with both India and Russia, and I see a strategy for Bush over the next four years that points in this direction.

So Mark and I ruminated on that line of reasoning, parsing out how that logic would set the book's narrative arc, and maybe result in something smaller in the meantime. This conversation cost a good two hours of sleep I desperately needed, but it was worth it. This book is coming magnificently into focus for me.

Good thing my confidence was high on this flight home, because it was a small commuter jet, the kind I can spread my personal wingspan across, touching both sides of the fuselage at once. Our first try at landing at TF Green at Providence was aborted somewhere around 2,000 feet altitude, when apparently the wind shear alert went off in the cockpit and the pilot sucked up the landing gear and powered his way out of his descent in one hell of a hurry. It was like that feeling when the rollercoaster hits the bottom of the big drop and you feel your body compress heavily into your seat. I have flown more times than I can count over the last 15 years, and I have never been in a jet than aborted a landing that late in the descent. No one spoke until we leveled off, waiting for the pilot to inform us what the hell just happened, but since his comm link was open during the landing (inadvertently?), we heard the whole thing. He reassured us that the low-level winds were difficult but not insurmountable. "For now," he declared, "our destination is still Providence." So we did another big loop around the city, everyone held their breath, and we repeated the descending glide path. This ride seemed just as rough, but he went all the way, and despite the bouncing touchdown (it's scary not to be level right at the very end!), everyone on the plane was rather relieved to be back on the ground. Moving around the island later, I can understand the nature of the problem: it's that kind of wind that slams the car door in your face as your trying to get out of your seat to exit the vehicle.

Needless to say, I'm happy to be home.

Here's the additional catch (working just off my USA Today, because that's all I could tap en route, plus I like the sheer challenge of trying to make sense of the world using just that lesser rag):

So it did all come down to the question of gay marriages!

Islam's moderate middle path is found in southeast Asia


So it did all come down to the question of gay marriages!

"Presidential election may have hinged on one issue: Issue 1," by Walter Shapiro, USA Today, 5 November 2004, p. 6A.

In retrospect, Ohio was the key. The Dems thought the war in Iraq plus job losses would do the trick, whereas the Republicans banked on fear of terrorism plus shared social values. The wildcard in the mix was that really only one of those four elements appeared on the ballot in addition to the two candidates: Ohio's Issue 1, which proposed a ban on gay marriages.

Here's the local political analysis:

"I always try to avoid single factor analysis," said Ohio Democratic strategist Greg Haas. "But if Issue 1 had not been on the ballot, John Kerry would have won Ohio."

Bush probably ends up winning Ohio by a mere 100,000 votes, and what we hear from the state's political activists is that "This issue drove a lot of first-time voters and new registrants to the polls." Shapiro notes the usual bit about regular churchgoers preferring Bush by a wide margin, but that margin was even larger in Ohio. Ditto for African-Americans, where Bush pulled in 16% of the vote, significantly above the national average of 11% he achieved. Many in the black community in Ohio believe the issue of gay marriages is what swung those additional votes.

A while back I made mention of the issue of gay marriages and its potential as a tipping-point wild card. Little did I expect it might be so easily tracked in its impact. People want to complain about the exit polling in terms of the rollercoaster ride Tuesday night, but that's not what exit polling is all about. It's about helping figure out subtle influences like this one.

So in the end, the Red Sox might have given old John a bit of a psychological boost, but it seems the Massachusetts state government's little tug o' war over the issue of gay marriages might have done him some real harm, meaning good association was trumped by guilt by association. The Bush camp's ability to paint Kerry as the "extreme" liberal (left of Teddy!) was a huge part of its victory. Karl Rove's no boy, but he is some political genius.

Islam's moderate middle path is found in southeast Asia

"In Malaysia, 'Islamic civilization' is promoted: Tolerance one of the tenets," by Paul Wiseman, USA Today, 5 November 2004, p. 25A.

Interesting article on Malaysia's attempt to position itself as a model of moderate Islam. It has long been my sense that the positive future of Islam comes to Southwest Asia from Southeast Asia, whereas this radical Islamic stand against globalization is clearly heading southeast from Southwest Asia to sub-Saharan Africa over time.

Here's the key segment:

This country of 23 million residents is offering itself as a progressive model to an Islamic world divided between Muslims who believe they can co-exist with the Western world and fundamentalists who say they can't and shouldn't try.

Malaysian Prime Minister Abdullah Ahmad Badawi, an Islamic scholar by training, is trying to promote what he calls Islam Hadari. Roughly translated, it is Arabic for "Islamic civilization." Abdullah's somewhat vague version of Islam emphasizes economic and technological development, social justice and tolerance for other religions.

Abdullah's ruling coalition soundly defeated its Muslim opposition in national elections in March, turning back its vision of turning Malaysia into an Islamic state, but that doesn't mean Abdullah's government doesn't go out of its way to court its roughly 60% Islamic majority, which basically correlates to the ethnic Malays, the rest being Chinese Buddhists, Indian Hindus and Christians. Given the slight majority, you can imagine how race, religion, and just-whose-country-is-this? sentiment can all get mixed up in one nasty brew, like the 1969 race riots that targeted the ethnic, typically more well-to-do Chinese (leaving hundreds dead).

What's interesting to me about the article is how basically all the examples of where the government has gone out of its way to favor Muslim Malays over other ethnic-religious groups has to do with the definitions of family, marriage, and sex. So you get the feeling that the moderation has to do more with economic and politics, whereas the "gives" to the majority Malays tend to register in the social values sphere.

Interesting no? Makes you think about this election? The conservative majority okays the Bush team on their economics and national security in return for their efforts on upholding social values. Looking on it that way, you get a sense of what it means to be more Core-like than Gap-like: you push the connectivity of free trade, free markets, collective security and transparency, but you do let yourself engage in some content control and some behavioral modification when it comes to the truly touchy stuff like family, marriage, and sex.

The "truly sophisticated" might find such a quid pro quo simply too crude for words, but I believe it’s a fundamentally (dare I use that modifier?) sound approach to trading up on connectivity while not feeling like you're trading down on social content.

November 4, 2004

Getting over myself on this election

Dateline: limo service heading from Newark to Princeton NJ, 4 November 2004

"An Industry in India Cheers Bush's Victory," by Saritha Rai, New York Times, 4 November 2004, p. W1.

"An Electoral Affirmation of Shared Values: A Clear Bush Majority In a Divided Country," by Todd S. Purdum, New York Times, 4 November 2004, p. A1.

"Two Nations Under God: Voting about nothing, and everything," op-ed by Thomas L. Friedman, New York Times, 4 November 2004, p. A31

"The Day the Enlightenment Went Out: Bush's victory signals the triumph of belief over fact," op-ed by Garry Wills, New York Times, 4 November 2004, p. A1.

"A Blue City, Amazed by a Red America: To Some New Yorkers, the Heartland Seems Like a Foreign Land," by Joseph Burger, New York Times, 4 November 2004, p. A19.

"Divided at the Polls, Americans Move Closer on Role in World: Post-9/11 Consensus Emerges On Force and Its Limits; Seeing Lessons in Iraq," by Gerald F. Seib and Carla Anne Robbins, Wall Street Journal, 2 November 2004, p. A1.

Recovering from last night's theft at warp speed, thanks to modern marvels of technology and my wife's great good will. Awfully good to be home last night and sleep in my own bed, especially since the usual little bout of night terrors meant I got to sleep with Vonne Mei in my arms as the dawn rose on her very first birthday. I am in love with this child, as I am in love with all of my children—and my wife.

Thanks to all the emails I still get on a daily basis, I only got a sloppy sort of five hours of sleep, but all time at home is quality time, so I headed out this morning feeling much better.

Getting over the election is equally easy. Would have supported President Kerry like crazy in moving this country ahead on this global war on terror, but will do the same for President Bush. The next four years will be crucial for the Core and the continued spread and health of the global economy. China will be in an entirely new era at the end of the next four years, as will both India and Russia. Not surprisingly, basically all New Core powers are fairly relieved with another four years of Bush, because they'd rather have the U.S. steady while so much is going on—on their end. Plus, Bush seems committed to both fighting global terror and growing the global economy, and those are numbers 2 and 1—respectively—for the New Core.

The simplest answer on this election comes from Todd Purdum, one of the Times' best political analysts: shared social values trumped mistakes in the steering of the global war on terror. In effect, the majority of Americans want America to remember some key things about itself as it goes about trying to reshape the global security environment in response to the new challenges revealed by 9/11. In many ways, this election reminds me of the backward-glancing social conservatism of China's 4th generation of leaders, the Congress Party's return to power in India, and Putin's tough line on capitalism run amok in Russia. Like these three leaderships, the Republicans right now are doing a better job of listening to the rural heartland, which still counts for plenty in all of these four powers. And what they are saying is what I have often said: no matter how long the train nor how fast it's moving, the engine cannot go any faster than the caboose.

China wants to integrate rapidly with the outside world and modernize its economy, but guess what? It can't leave the rural poor behind. Ditto for India's IT-driven economy. Ditto for Russia's rapidly polarizing social scene where cities leap ahead and the villages tend to get left behind. In America, which is so much further along in its development, the matter is as much about values as economics. In effect, the rural heartland says to the far more integrated and outwardly-connected big coastal urban areas: you can run ahead in your "sophisticated" view of the world and how it works, but election-wise, you won't be getting out too far ahead of what constitutes heartland values.

So yes, there is a go-slow, values-based alternative ideology born within this multinational economic and political union we call the United States, and it says: we will embrace social change and outwardly-directed integration at a pace we can manage and no faster.

I got over myself on the election as soon as I read Friedman's whiny op-ed this morning. It sounded so much like me late last night that I was immediately appalled. Garry Wills' supremely snotty piece (if you have faith, you must be a pinhead) then pushed me right over the edge. I can vote with the Dems but I can't stand so many of them.

Then again, that's much my sense of living on the East Coast for the last two decades. Reading that piece about how Manhattanites are confounded by the election reminds me of why I'd gladly live in the Midwest even as I worked primarily on the coasts: people on the coasts are often people on the fringes of everything I readily hold dear, and their arrogance about the "little minds" living in the middle is just too galling for words.

The best thing that I think comes out of this election (besides Arafat finally leaving the scene, as if on cue) is the growing sense of an American consensus about what the real threats are: catastrophic events designed to disrupt connectivity by killing indiscriminately in a new form of warfare waged by those who reject the expanding global system we call globalization. We call this enemy terrorism, and we fear its most violent capacities: weapons of mass destruction. And we're willing to do something about it up front instead of waiting around for them to strike.

Moreover, not lost in all this change is a new sense that old enemies need be old enemies no longer. This is especially true of China, which the public increasingly understands shares hugely overlapping strategic economic—and therefore security—interests in any global war on terror.

But the public was something more than the perception of US "unilateralism" in dealing with this overarching threat. They turn to the UN because they can't think of anything better, but clearly they want something better, because they are strongly in favor of preemptive strategies by coalitions of both the strong and the willing, which sounds an awful lot like my Core—both Old and New but especially the U.S. in combination with the New Core pillars.

Americans seem to want all this, and a package that spells this all out. There is a reason why PNM strikes so many readers like a revelation, and why they go so out of their way to evangelize its message to others. The book answers that mail.

So as far as I'm concerned, I'm right where I need to be in terms of message, although I'm still working out the question of the pulpit. But the task is clear: the next four years will matter greatly, so it matters that Bush be a great president. In that effort, he and his administration will have my full support, because I don't sit out games and I don't leave the court until I foul out.


Here's the additional catch:

Asia's working hard to synch up its regional rule sets with the rest of the Core

Asia's working hard to synch up its regional rule sets with the rest of the Core

"Indian Firms Step Up Data Security: As Outsourcing Increases, Protection of Information Becomes U.S. Political Issue," by Jay Solomon, Wall Street Journal, 4 November 2004, p. B6.

"India Taps China's Reserve Of Technological Talent," by Saritha Rai, New York Times, 2 November 2004, p. W1.

"Fears of pandemic prompt flu summit," by Michelle Healy, USA Today, 2 November 2004, p. 6D.

India, great back office to the United States, is finally and justly getting sucked into our burgeoning rule sets on data and information privacy. This is a hugely important rule-set export by the U.S. which will inevitably further integrate India—and by extension its new "back back office" labor pool China—deeper into the Core defined by American-coded globalization. Connectivity requires code, and code requires shared values regarding appropriate rule sets and reasonable boundary conditions, as in "your freedoms end when they begin to impinge upon mine."

IT connectivity tends to drive this rule-set synchronization process most obviously, but plenty of far more basic forms of connectivity push it as well. The simple connectivity of disease transmission and the mounting fear of the avian flu as possibly the first great pandemic of the post-9/11 era is driving unprecedented cooperation not only across Asia, but between New Core Asia and the Old Core West. This is also great stuff, because it signals a growing willingness on the part of the New Core pillars to join the Old Core is preemptively dealing with potential System Perturbations like a rapidly spreading—and decimating—flu-based pandemic.

November 3, 2004

A bittersweet ending to an otherwise rewarding trip

Dateline: TF Green Airport, Warwick RI, 3 November 2004

Just finished 4 speeches over three days: the CAPSTONE presentation at National Defense U in DC on Monday, the luncheon speech to a gathering of intell analysts and contractors in Columbia MD on Tuesday (an annual symposium of the Central Maryland chapter of the Armed Forces Communications and Electronics Association, or AFCEA), and then, today, after flying to Montgomery AL last night, I briefed the current classes of both the Air War College and the Air Command Staff College, or almost 1,000 students in all. The total audience for the four briefs was probably 1,500, as the AFCEA conference was large.

It was a three-medallion trip for me, meaning AFCEA gave me a nice (and very large) Intelligence Community medallion, and both Air Force colleges gave me their school medallions.

Alas, I return home empty-handed nonetheless. On the Delta flight from Montgomery to Atlanta, I made the mistake of taking off my waist-pack while I worked over some old blog files that I was reviewing to order my ideas for the next book, and I got so intensely focused on that, that when we landed I simply grabbed my overcoat and my PC bag and departed the small commuter plane without my waist-pack, still under the seat in front of me. I got about 40 yards in the terminal, decided to buy some newspapers for the long flight to Providence, and instantly realized my mistake. Dashing back to the plane, it was empty save for the sole attendant and a cleaning guy. No waist-pack under the seat.

I don't think the cleaning guy was holding out on me, at least I'd like not to jump to that conclusion. My guess is that someone in the back of the plane spied the pack, with its glistening silver Verizon cellphone attached, and made the quick grab.

I made all the appropriate efforts at Atlanta, but got nowhere. No one had turned anything in, and the plane was cleaned out and turned around to Dulles within an hour.

Significant losses for me: all my ID's (license, college ID, special Dept. of Navy ID), all my credit cards, my cellphone, my Blackberry, a bunch of other small items like some cuff links I bought in China that had sentimental value—and of course the three medallions from the trip).

I feel embarrassed and stupid about the whole thing. I've left things on planes before but they were always there when I ran back, so this was really disheartening. Unless the cleaning guy felt he had hit some legitimate paydirt, then it was another passenger who simply decided to take advantage, and that sort of event always leaves me feeling a bit hollow.

Luckily, I have both pairs of glasses and my keys (separately held), and didn't lose anything connected to the PC, or my notes for the book. I'll be out for the phone, getting a new license, and I'll have to go back to my wife's old Handspring instead of the Blackberry. Not sure how much trouble I get into for losing the government ID's or Blackberry, but I'll just have to live with that. In the end, probably $300 out of pocket, plus $44 in cash lost (honestly, the only thing the thief really gains unless they pawn cellphones).

Got a hold of my wife and she canceled all the cards immediately, so no damage there. Now, I'm just sitting in Green waiting for my wife to drive here late at night to give me money so I can get my Honda out of the parking lot (I have no capacity to get my hands on money).

Thank God I have a couple of spare credit cards I don't carry, plus a passport. Otherwise I don't think I could make it to Princeton tomorrow night (thankfully, no rental). But I'll be forced to get the new driver's license upon my return on Friday, otherwise, I won't be able to rent a car next week for my next DC trip.

I try not to read too much into things, but this event makes me feel like I should really stop traveling so much and get out of the talking/speeches business. Then again, they were all great talks (at least, the last three were) to large audiences.

I guess this loss just goes along with my general ennui about the election. I felt Bush would win all along, just like the Yankees always did over the Sox. I'm just glad I was on planes yesterday when all that nonsense from the exit polling got the Dems all jacked up. That would have been a bit too much to bear.

It's weird, but the election doesn't seem to settle anything for me, as I suspect is true for many Americans. I'm not dismayed Bush won, but I'm not happy either. The whole thing just strikes me as somewhat passionless. So Bush won. So we get more of the same. So nothing really decided or changed.

So what do we do now? Stay the course in Iraq? Keep telling allies to shove it? Go after Iran or North Korea?

I'm left with the question that motivated my book: Where is this whole thing going?

It just doesn't feel quite right. It doesn’t feel sustainable. It doesn't feel like a winning strategy.

So I guess I hope I get past this little personal bump with minimal cost, get a good night's sleep, have a good talk with my spouse about how our eldest son isn't doing so well in school, get a sense of whether or not Bush's victory means anything to me personally in my career (should I consider going somewhere else in this government or just get out?).

Oh, and catch a morning flight to New Jersey tomorrow in less than 12 hours and give another big talk at the Woodrow Wilson School at Princeton later in the day.

I fear I am losing track of more than just my wallet in this life, but five flights in three days can do that to you.

[Then I get home to find that someone's pinched my blog for the day!]

Announcing: The Barnett Review

[Webmaster's note: It's in addition to this blog. The blog doesn't go away. Really. ( Thanks to Adam White and Robert A. Green for the early heads up.) Whew!]

Hello. . . Critt here. . . Tom's "webmaster." (I use quotes so as not to offend webmasters whose day to day work reflects their mastery of web design skills. Mine are, at best, rudimentary.)

In March of last year Tom sent me a heads up on his about to be published Esquire 2003 article, The Pentagon's New Map. After reading it, my reply was, "Dude, you're gonna need a blog."

His response, "No time. Gotta turn it into a book now. But maybe, someday.. . . . .."

Well, "someday" came and, beginning in March of this year, we cobbled together a "weblog-centric site." Ho! Did the man ever blog -- over 1000 posts in the first 7 months, with readers coming in daily from more than 30 countries. It's great to see the global reach blogging has given to Tom's message and the enthusiastic reception by those who, likewise, work toward creating sustainable global futures. Your collective positive response has caused us to ask, "What next? What now?"

Here's what we're thinking: In addition to this blog, how about a newsletter -- a review, published monthly? We'll include a collection of previously published posts -- suggested by you, selected by Tom -- along with reader questions and comments. Tom, as always, will add new commentary. The idea seems doable to us. What I want to know is, would that work for you?

Let me know what you'd like to see. We have something in the works for those of you with a business priority, but that's for later. For now, since there are more than 400 educational organizations that have readers of this blog, we'll give questions from academia first priority.

Okay? Ok.

To make a suggestion, comment, or request the first edition of "The Barnett Review," * send an email to review@thomaspmbarnett.com.

* Hmmm. . . maybe we should have a "name Tom's review" contest? Where's Peter Durand when I need him?

November 2, 2004

Barnstorming on election day

Dateline: Holiday Day Inn, Arlington VA, 2 November 2004

Today I rush off to give keynote address over lunch to a big defense contractor conference in Columbia MD. It's all about the future of intelligence.

After that I get on two planes that take me to the vicinity of Maxwell Air Force Base in Alabama (my first trip ever to that state), where (I believe) I'll be giving two talks tomorrow (one to student body and one to academics). That means I get to spend this historic election night flying planes instead of staring at the tube like everyone else. Too bad, but part and parcel of my campaign to spread the vision

Meanwhile, make sure you vote today if you haven't already. No matter whom you choose, it is truly a sacred rite.

Here's the daily catch:

Judging the GWOT

Everybody take a deep breath and relax on election day

The Leviathan wants to keep its defense intelligence agencies


Judging the GWOT

"The Real 'October Surprise,'" op-ed by David Ignatius, Washington Post, 2 November 2004, p. A21.

"French Push Limits in Fight On Terrorism: Wide Prosecutorial Powers Draw Scant Public Dissent," by Craig Whitlock, Washington Post, 2 November 2004, p. A1.

"Ethnic Fighting Flares in China: Authorities Declare Martial Law in Rural Henan Province," by Philip P. Pan, Washington Post, 2 November 2004, p. A18.

"Bin Laden Lauds Costs Of War to U.S.: Recent Videotape Boasts of Inflicting Economic Damage," by John Mintz, Washington Post, 2 November 2004, p. A3.

On this election day, it's worth some time to think about terrorism and how successful we've been in this Global War on Terorrism and what costs we've paid, both in terms of people and lost civil liberties.

Ignatius makes a point that I've made in other posts many times before: the success of the GWOT can be seen in the lack of attacks on America's homeland since 9/11 (to include this election). The pattern of terror strikes we've seen since 9/11 is back to being very similar to the pattern we endured in the 1970s and early 1980s: they can blow things up in their own neighborhood (Middle East), and on occasion, they can reach into the areas surrounding their own—but no farther.

That pattern tell you that the GWOT is successful in keeping Al Qaeda on its heels, despite the recent boasting by Osama in the video. His most damning boasts actually aren't indicative of what he made us do, but what we ourselves decided to do: namely create the behemoth of DHS, throwing tons of money at homeland security in general (a vast overkill) and deciding to not just invade Afghanistan and Iraq in the classic Powell Doctrine manner of kill-the-bad-guys-and-then-simply-leave-the-scene but in the "transformation" of the Middle East mode that requires a huge SysAdmin follow-on effort from us (for which we were woefully unprepared).

Yes, OBL and Al Qaeda put the System Perturbation of 9/11 on us, but we decided how to run down the horizontal waves of disruption that ensued, and that's a basic rule set of System Perturbations: super-empowered individuals can trigger vertical scenarios, but only governments have the massive resources necessary to engineer long-term horizontal scenarios in response—like creating DHS or seeking to transform the Middle East. We don't get to choose the vertical scenarios, they choose us. But we do get to choose the horizontal ones we pursue in response to the vertical ones, and so long as those choices are wise, then we're really in control. My verdict is then: DHS, bad choice, transforming Middle East, good choice but so far bad execution. DHS only perverts America and wastes money, whereas transforming the Middle East is a solid, realistic, strategic choice that requires our defense establish to dramatically alter itself for the challenge.

On the up side, we remain a country of great civil liberties, unlike a far scarier France, where I think Richard Clarke would feel quite at home. Moreover, we can handle real disaster without martial law, whereas a far more fragile country like China suffers an incident very similar to one that turned NYC upside down a few years back, and they have to put a province in the penalty box to get a grip on things.

Overall then, the GWOT goes fairly well. Yes, we have lost far too many souls. But keep some perspective. What we've lost in combat deaths since 1975 doesn't equal what we lost on the beaches of Normandy on one morning in 1944, nor what we lost in NYC on 9/11. It's important to have professionals fight and die in this war, and it's important to keep it an away game, not a home game.

But yes, we can and will do better in terms of organizing ourselves for the tasks that lie ahead, and that's why I continue to push the Leviathan-SysAdmin arguments.

Everybody take a deep breath and relax on election day

"No Matter What Happens, Relax," op-ed by George F. Will, Washington Post, 2 November 2004, p. A21.

"One bright spot amid dirty tricks, paranoia: Early voting went well," by Laura Parker, USA Today, 2 November 2004, p. 5A.

Will's op-ed reminds me why I still like to read the man: he's a great historian on America's past. Here's the key bits:

If, for the fourth consecutive election, neither candidate wins a popular vote majority, relax. There were four consecutive such elections from 1860 to 1892 . . .

If today's election produces vast consequences from slender margins, relax. This is not unusual . . . In 1968 a switch of 53,034 votes in New Jersey, New Hampshire and Missouri would have denied Richard Nixon an electoral vote majority and, because George Wallace won 46 electoral votes, the House probably would have awarded the presidency to Hubert Humphrey.

If George W. Bush loses, relax. Turbulence is normal. Since 1900, not including Bush, there have been 18 presidents, of whom only five served a full eight years or more. Only 11 of the 42 presidents before Bush served two consecutive terms.

At the dinner I attended last night to discuss PNM, a lot of angst was raised about the red state/blue state polarization of American politics. My answer was that this was not that unusual if you look back over the length of American political history. Plus, when you look at what we are so jacked up about concerning the Supreme Court, that cluster of issues is awfully narrow and removed from much of daily life (the nexus of abortion, stem cells, etc.). This is not so much a hugely divided electorate but one that squabbles incessantly over relatively small issues (historically speaking) on the margin.

Yes, this is probably a fairly dirty election, but I, like Laura Parker of USA Today see that bright spot being the great success of early voting. I think that's the future: something more like a month-long voting period during which half vote, leaving the other half (the same people who turn in their tax forms on 15 April) to conduct the idiotic mad scramble on election day.

This is a real improvement that helps more to vote, so I choose focus on that today.

The Leviathan wants to keep its defense intelligence agencies

"Pentagon's objections block overhaul of U.S. intelligence: Wide support not enough to overcome military concerns,"," by John Diamond, USA Today, 2 November 2004, p. 12A.

Eighty percent of the Intelligence Community's budget is taken up by the defense intelligence and service agencies plus the 600-pound gorillas of the highly technical "overhead" agencies that use vast amounts of technology to look down upon and listen to the rest of the world. Guess what? The Pentagon will fight to not lose budgetary control over those assets, and I don't blame them.

The vast bulk of the IC's budget does go to agencies that essentially serve the Leviathan (aka, combat support agencies), when in reality the desire to have a National Intelligence Director isn't so much about reining in the Leviathan-related intell agencies as it is gathering up the rest of them, most notably the CIA. So a struggle naturally ensues that could be avoided if we admitted that the Leviathan needs its own version of intell, but so does the everything else of the U.S. government.

That's why I have stated in the past that we need to bifurcate the intelligence community just like the Pentagon: one group of agencies to serve the Leviathan in secrecy and whose budget should be under its firm grip, and another to serve the System Administrator force (which, frankly, the Department of Homeland Security should serve as well with its many disaster-relief skill sets—as a colleague of mine Bruce Elleman recently observed). Pretending that a NID ruling over all these intell agencies is the answer is just plain stupid and goes against the bureaucratic reality that says we already have a warfighting force, but what we really need is a peacekeeping force to augment it if we're ever going to get serious about winning real and permanent victories in this war on terror.

Fighting the Pentagon over the budgetary control over the Leviathan's intell agencies is a waste of time and effort. But just watch it drag on for months.

November 1, 2004

The average road trip day

Dateline: Holiday Day Inn, Arlington VA, 1 November 2004

Flew to DC this morning and drove to DC to brief the CAPSTONE program, a special joint education course for senior military officers run by National Defense University.

On the way there I meet up with a rep from the defense contractor that's sponsoring a defense industry conference tomorrow where I'm speaking. He's got 30 copies of PNM for me to sign. They are being given to all the conference speakers as a gift.

After the 90-minute talk at NDU, I drive to my hotel and check email. Then it's onto to a 3-hour dinner with 13 others who've come together to meet me and discuss PNM's main ideas. The dinner is put together at Ruth's Chris Steakhouse here in Crystal City by a trio of senior analysts/managers from the Naval Surface Warfare Center in Dahlgren VA. I had spoken there about a year ago and, after many requests for me to stop by down there on one of my DC trips to discuss the book with them, these three offered instead to take me out for dinner next night I was in DC. Once the date was set, they contacted 10 of their closest colleagues and friends from their informal network of contacts in various defense contractors, intell agencies, and think tanks, and so tonight ended up being a sort of casual dinner party to discuss PNM in depth.

All in all, a nice way to spend an evening since it's really any author's dream: an extended audience with smart readers who just want to meet you and discuss your book's main ideas. My thanks especially to David Ray and Steve Anderson for setting up this get-together.

The only down side? The day which began at 0730 ends at 2300, but that's fairly standard for me on the road, which is why I always return home somewhat exhausted from the non-stop travel and constant performing.

Here's the daily catch:

The new missionaries come—quite logically—from the New Core

The limited logic of reform in the Islamic world

9/11's most pervasive new rule set is classified

New Core economies: where is the action is . . .


The new missionaries come—quite logically—from the New Core

"Koreans Quietly Evangelizing Among Muslims in Mideast," by Norimitsu Onishi, New York Times, 1 November 2004, p. A1.

"Afghan Militants Release Video of Hostages" by Carlotta Gall, New York Times, 1 November 2004, p. A11.

Fascinating story on Christian missionaries in the Middle East trying to win converts to Christ. That part alone is not new, since the West has been doing that for . . . oh . . . a good millennium or so. What's fascinating is how the new source for these missionaries is the increasingly fervent Christians of South Korea.

Now the joke is that when the Chinese arrive in a new place, they set a restaurant, the Japanese, a factory, but the Koreans, a missionary church.

Don't get me wrong, I don't mean to spoof this effort whatsoever. I believe in missionaries of all forms: missionaries of security, missionaries of democracy, missionaries of markets, and—most of all—missionaries of a faith that's has meant the world to me personally. Anybody willing to do these difficult tasks of spreading new rule sets in the Gap deserves our utmost respect, just not our blind loyalty.

For in any evangelical mission, the best purpose of spreading your faith (whatever it is), is that it pushes the locals to either improve their own version or abandon it. I have little doubt that when it comes to religion, the vast majority in the Middle East will stick with Islam when confronted with an alternative, but I am likewise certain that just being offered that choice is an important spur toward reform within Islam, simply because it presents the possibility of being both pious and modern in social, economic and political realms. Modernity is not a threat to true believers, confident of their faith. But frankly, if that were true of Islam in the Middle East, there wouldn't be so many radical fundamentalists trying to take the faith "back to the future" of the 7th century—there would be no compelling reason for a reinvigoration of the faith.

Connectivity is all about options: you stay with what you currently have only because you're happy with the options it provides. Globalization is not about always saying yes to new things; it's about having a choice to try new things and say yes to some and no to others. What's so wrong with radical Islam is its attempt to define, in an upstream fashion, what's okay and what's taboo, the ultimate result being the infantilization of the individual (That which I cannot fathom on my own I intrinsically recoil away from.)

And that's a sad of affairs. There's nothing in the experience I can trace of Muslims living inside the Core that says they must be any more or less stressed by modernity than any other religious adherent living in the same environment. Moreover, it's the freedom of all religions inside the Core (or most of it, on a good day) that provides an inherent dampening effect on all of them collectively (if you get too harsh, people simply move on to a faith that better serves their needs—something going on in China right now to an unusual degree.)

New adherents to new faiths are always the most devote, because it's a recent and very conscious choice for them. So it's no surprise that the new burgeoning population of missionaries in the Gap will come not from Old Core states, but from New Core ones, where the competition of such belief systems tends to be more vigorous.

Godspeed, I say.

But let us remember, there is nothing more impressive than a person willing to put their lives on the line to extend freedom to others. Extending the freedom of faith is God's work (no matter whom you believe in), but just as impressive are those willing to put their lives on the line for helping to bring democracy to Gap states. Like the recently converted religious believers, you will find these "missionaries" come primarily from states that recently moved in more democratic directions (or have suffered the violence of such efforts to move in that direction). The three hostages now held by the Taliban in Afghanistan right now are from Bosnia, Northern Ireland, and the Philippines, three countries trapped in their own Gapdome in recent decades by all moving in better directions today.

The efforts of such missionaries of democracy are just as important as foreign direct investment flows by multinational corporations into Gap economies and security exports by Core militaries. We need everything and everyone involved in this process of shrinking the Gap.

The limited logic of reform in the Islamic world

"Concern Rises in Pakistan Of a War Without End: Fear that American policies are fueling militancy," by David Rohde, New York Times, 1 November 2004, p. A10.

The Pakistan military on the global war on terrorism:

"O.K., tactically we are getting hold of people here and here and here, but then what's the end?" asked General Sultan, the chief spokesman for Pakistan's military. "Until the time you shut down the factory, you will keep picking up the products. You don't shut down the factory until you resolve the disputes."

This is brilliant code for . . . it's all America's fault. This is (a) complete bullshit and (b) a sign of the limited logic we can expect to get from most of the our Islamic "allies" in this global war on terror.

"Terror would go away," we are told, "if only you'd give up Israel!" It's our support for Israel that accounts for the failed and/or rigidly authoritarian regimes that dominate the Muslim regions of the Middle East and Western Asia. It accounts for why these societies just don't "get" globalization and therefore do so badly at it. It accounts for the lack of broadband economic connectivity between Islamic societies and the global economy. It generates the social tensions arising from exposure to the richer, freer, more decadent West via globalization's creeping embrace of the region. It generates the reality that the only thing the Islamic governments have proven themselves adept at is both repression and hiring Western companies to exploit their oil reserves—and nothing else.

Yes, if we only stopped supporting "aggressive" Israel, then there would be no transnational terrorism, because there would be no social unrest in the region, no broad dissatisfaction with living under repressive regimes, no unhappiness over a lack of economic opportunity, useful education, or effective freedom of speech . . . or even women's rights—for that matter. No, all of these problems pale in comparison to the great evil done by Israel and abetted by the United States. If the U.S. would only abandon Israel and show more "respect" to Islamic regimes, then Bin Laden and company would disappear from the landscape, never to be heard from again.

Now, I am not doing these arguments justice, because we are told by Islamic regimes that if there was a "broad-based American-led military, political and social effort to eliminate Muslim political grievances and poverty," then regimes like Pakistan could effectively combat Islamic fundamentalists. How so? Such radicals would be stripped of their appeal then.

Right. Osama would lay down his arms in his campaign to dislodge the House of Saud once Israel was reined in, and the Pakistani government would somehow magically regain legitimacy across large swaths of its country-side that it currently does not control, because . . .hey! All the insurgents and warlords and terrorists would submit to their rule once the Palestinian question was solved!

People like to talk about America's oil addiction somehow blinding us to the reality of the Middle East we've had a hand in creating, but tell me whether that "addiction" and "blindness" is anywhere near the sort of self-delusion we constantly hear coming out of these retrograde elites ruling over the region.

Let me tell you, I have no trouble whatsoever understanding Bin Laden's raging contempt for these regimes, even as I find his proposed solution even more loathsome than the current reality.

9/11's most pervasive new rule set is classified

"Psst. President Bush Is Hard at Work Expanding Government Secrecy: The Future of open government is now up for grabs," editorial by Dorothy Samuels, New York Times, 1 November 2004, p. A28.

Good bit about an expanding new security rule set coming out of the 9/11 experience that receives very little press coverage (hmm, must be because it's so secret!).

It is clearly true that the Bush Administration has gone hog wild in expanding the Cone of Government Silence in response to 9/11, which is a direct reversal of what Clinton did. Does that make one administration evil and the other good? Not exactly. It means we were more willing during the Clinton years to think America would not only do better economically but be safer security-wise in a global environment of greater openness. 9/11, not surprisingly, makes us collectively recoil from that vision, but the question is, For how long and how hard?

Did we get careless with info in the 1990s? Sure, it was happening all over society and the economy and government, and privacy was suffering plenty in the process. Now privacy suffers in a different way, or so it would seem (Now it's just the government that wants to know all about you? Come on! Business still does too!).

My problem with the extent and tone of this push for secrecy from the Bush Administration is that it so negatively dovetails with their close-mouthed tendencies in explaining themselves and their national security strategies, instead leaving it to the conspiracy theorists to fill in the many blanks. Of course, when you're as obsessed with secrecy as this White House has often been, what happens too often is that countries that are or should be your allies end up feeling really outside of the loop, which is what gets you the backlash we have today on Iraq, meaning not just the American people but the rest of the Core feel like they were sold a bill of goods on that one.

Samuels' last para says it all:

On a superficial level, the hush-hush treatment of this issue on the fall campaign trail might seem perversely fitting. But Mr. Bush's unilateral rollback of laws and practices designed to promote government accountability surely rates further scrutiny by voters. We've learned over the last four years that what we don't know can hurt us.

Amen, sister.

New Core economies: where is the action is ...

"Have Supercomputer, Will Travel: A technology pioneer leaves the U.S. for opportunities in China,"," by John Markoff, New York Times, 1 November 2004, p. C1.


Some readers will ask me why I concentrate so on the Times, Journal and Post, and my answer is essentially two-fold: (1) when the subject I am tracking or hypothesizing about (in effect, I'm waiting for that article to be written) appears in one or more of these three papers, then I know it's really out there in terms of the mainstream media (so, in effect, these three papers become bloggers of record for me), and (2) these three papers simply field the best journalists—year in and year out.

I always read John Markoff in the Times, because his pieces are always right on the edge of my understanding of trends in technology. Today's piece is a good example, because it captures something that makes intuitive sense to me: if you want to be involved with cutting-edge technologies, then New Core powers are great places to be because there you're talking not just about countries struggling mightily to catch up, they're also attracting the most risk-accepting investment flows in the Core and that money is going to players most willing to place big bets on technologies that deal with the biggest problems the Core is facing right now.

Why is that? New Core economies are full of players trying to break into established markets, so they need to come up with compelling products that meet compelling needs. That's because New Core states are more under the gun than Old Core states to deal with the most pressing issues of mature development—like environmental damage, the push for hydrogen, new forms of urban architecture and development, etc. These issues are all far more compelling for China and India because of the explosive nature of the economic growth there, which triggers lotsa social and political change and pressures.

So you get this interesting phenomenon of the best tech brains that once came to America because that was the one great place to do what motivated them most (to innovate) now returning to their New Core homelands. This article is about a supercomputer genius, Taiwan-born Steve Chen, deciding to emigrate to mainland China because that's where the work and—most importantly—the funding is taking him:

Supercomputing is being seized upon by the Chinese government to help speed the nation's transition from low-cost manufacturing to becoming a more powerful force in the world economy. China's leaders know that high-speed computing is essential to global leadership in scientific fields and advanced design of a variety of sophisticated products.

"Right now the Chinese have started to pay attention; they are catching up and they learn fast," said Mr. Chen, 60 . . ..

How does the Pentagon come to understand this trend? No surprise: they only see the military application threat:

Military intelligence experts in this country have long been concerned that supercomputing capabilities may aid China's weapons development. But many technologists and economists say that blazing computing speeds alone do not represent a particularly new nuclear weapons threat. Instead, they are more concerned that the Chinese may catch up more quickly with the United States in areas that have economic and scientific, rather than military, ramifications.

The latter analysis being what I mean when I say the Pentagon needs to move beyond defining war solely within the context of war instead of within the context of everything else. The future of any conflict or competition with China isn't going to be about their catching up or surpassing us in killing technologies, but in connecting technologies. And by that I mean technologies that allow China to become more pervasively connected to the global economy than we are.

For now, China's connectivity is mostly about sucking up raw materials and sending out manufactured goods, whereas America's has long been about exporting technology + media/cultural content and importing consumer goods. China aims to break into the exporting technology market and that connective influence will likely define China's global reach far more than any imaginary military power projection.


Such computing now occupies a central role throughout the global economy, providing stark proof that decades-long American attempts to control the flow of advanced information-processing technologies are largely moot. It is only a matter of time, experts says, before companies in places like China, India and Russia essentially match the capabilities of the American and Japanese leaders.

"When they really get noticed," said Horst D. Simon, director of the computation center at the Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory in California, "will be when a country like Malaysia or Australia decides to buy a supercomputer from a Chinese company like Mr. Chen's rather than from I.B.M."

Bingo!

Isn't it amazing—as well as counter-intuitive—to remember back to the time when our policy towards the old Soviet bloc was: "For God's sake, don't let them get their hands on information technology!" When—in the end—that was the very thing (that Information Revolution) that served as the downfall of the socialist, centrally-planned economic system? The Sovs could boss their way through the industrial and petro-chemical revolutions, but what they could never master was the info revolution, because it demands horizontal connectivity from a system that inherently distrusted all such bonds.

Thank God, I say, that we were as unsuccessful as we were, because with the old socialist system dies the state-based war system of the 20th century. What comes in its place may seem more complex, at first glance, but that only means we haven't enunciated—much less mastered—the new rule sets that define this era. For while mutual-assured destruction and the old Cold War concepts of deterrence effectively rule out great power-on-great power war, they don't rule out the everything else that we confront today. In fact, by disconnecting the escalation phenomenon from war, we entered into a new age with the fall of Soviet bloc—one in which lighting a nuke in a major US city would not automatically segue into global nuclear Armageddon (hence we're safer in the ultimate sense even as we're more vulnerable in the proximate sense—unless, of course, you happen to reside in THAT city!).

The key now is to figure out how to reduce that proximate vulnerability as well (transnational actors looking to use WMD), and that's what PNM is all about.

You know, when I was in China, I was told by my hosts that my material and vision were too sophisticated for American audiences, meaning requiring too much of a balance between opposing concepts (or what they call the yin-yang). One of the international relations experts said I'd be better off working for the Chinese, because (1) they'd understand my stuff better and (2) China has more pressing and challenging processes to master in terms of their foreign policy (meaning China offers IR experts like myself a tougher nut to crack!).

It's true that trying to sell the Theory of Peacefully Rising China is hard (I won't tell you how many China experts on my side will tell you it's all a ruse to confuse us as China prepares to rule the world . . . or is it just retake Taiwan?), but frankly, I find I have my hands full with just trying to see the Theory of Benevolently Dominating America.